Home

Flex User Manual%>

1. Numerical Modeling Workflow 357 F ic 1 om a File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D Hl om OF Be Data n amp drumco Elevation 1 E Define Modeling Objectives I Inspect Define Properties crumco Elevation 2 EJ View Edit Grid B dumco Bevation 3 J Define Properties a BHA amp drumco Elevation 4 Define Boundary C amp drumco Elevation 5 H Sel ma R P AP h D Eaggeration 10 amp dumco Bevation 6 Ta 1 amp jh A VMod Imported Wells e Column View e Row 1 J35 7 Column 1 J5 Model Explorer e a 3D FDRUMCO Model Boundary E Structure Toolbox C Horizons Conductivity M Zones Properties Zones Z amp Simulation Domain Model Domain Database Layer View S E Boundary Conditions Pumping Wells Boundary Condition DRUMCO grid S Run Legend oe Color Zones C Properties S O Row M Conductivity 2 Storage IntialHeads E Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Boundary Cond Zone Budget O Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells E Outputs Layer 1 Row 64 Column 63 X 1181 88 Y 8 62 Zones 1 t L DRUM
2. InitialHeads2 Conductivity Child gr iM Corana Chid midt 4 antl e When the conversion is complete click Next Step to proceed to the Properties step View Edit Properties e At this step you can view edit the flow properties for the model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services e VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex conceptual model Ne aon x File Tools Workflow Window Help D GH Deka amp Conceptual Model1 x gt NumericalGrid1 Run1 x a ol 2o 9 OF O boundary B ground a EJ Convert conceptual model to nun j oF Inspect Define Properties BB layer2top m J Define Properties layer2 bottom E EJ Define Boundary Conditions rea EEE g E GB chd west si Select the Next Step p 7 chd east I Define Observation Zones a XP PROOF i fiver Define Observation Wells 1 w vi Pumping_Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones or Obswells Define Particles Pow S E Select Run Type i amp E PEST Run as Single Run Column Translate r JA Run Numerical Engines z View Resuits 3D View Chats View Ma ps Toolbox Conductivity m Zones Database Model Explorer CE y Sim
3. pia 86 Be Don Bso a Det gt i aimort4 Bevation 1 E E Define Modeling Objectives Run Numerical Engines aiport4 Elevation 2 S E Define Numerical Model aiport4 Elevation 3 E Create Grid a E aimort4 Bevation 4 E Import Model A E LL VMod Imported Wels EJ View Edt Grid MODFLOW 2005 E Define Properties MODFLOW 2005 e Boundary Conditions ion single bit Define Boundary Co Version 1 8 00 12 18 2009 Prec x86 32bit E E Select the Next St OpenMP parallelized using 2CPU a m e eas PEEN Using NAME file D SampleProject demo data MODFLOW AIRPORT4 Run start date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 E Define Observation Wells U S GEOLOGICAL SURVEY MODULAR FINITE DIFFERENCE GROUND WATER FLOW MODEL Define Zone Budget Zones Period 1 Step 1 Define Particles Convergence Residual 8 2018813E 03 Max Change 4 0346560E 05 Bj Select Run Type Run end date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 si Blapsed run time 0 120 Seconds E PEST Run Normal termination of simulation E Single Run Time O 01sec Translate rate 1 0 1 sec p S Numeri al Engin allTime 0 2 Total CPU_time 0 1 sec ii a PEANAS OpenMP paraleized using 2CPU Model Explorer PORTS grid gt Run i Inputs B Properties Boundary Conditions Recharge Constant Heads Z CH Upper Aquifer Z CH Lower Aquifer _ Z CH Lower Aquifer Rivers Z Waterloo River
4. alo x Delimiters From row MV Space T Comma 1 MV Tab I Slash P Other m Preview Source Data Row Column 1 mw 4 740 1612 1 178 31 1 183 55 rw 95 1295 17565 118348 m7 5 TOR AT7 1 10903 mw 8 885 814 1 177 27 1 183 1 mow 10 1170 1210 1 183 18 1 183 45 C CEA C C E 9 mw 19 885 1335 1 176 57 1 183 49 10 mw 20 885 1395 1 176 48 1 183 51 11 mw 21 877 1487 1 176 94 1 183 55 1 mw 22 873 1529 1 175 56 1 183 57 nw 23 O07 44116554 18958 we TA AMAA AINA ARANA ATA lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Herp _ For XLS files Shown below select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose which row to import from using the From row selector 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 160 VMOD Flex Help RE Data Import ba 2 0 Ves m Work sheet and range Select Worksheet From row Sheeni x 1 M Preview Source Data Kx ft day a Heads 20 3 CE 3 13 1 mooo e 7 D M O l a L o vem e a a ae a 13 574850 4863050 19 5 10 5 1 5 13 5 14 5 e fetes e ge vm a e s e e e e e E lt Back Newt gt gt Cancel He For MDB files shown below you can choose to import data from a table or a query by selecting either the View Tables or View Queries radio button Select the desired query table from the Select Table or Query drop down list box 2013 by Schlu
5. aio xi m Data Mapping Target_fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type rg Creste anew atribute WIDTH Length m i Numeric 4 xi paoc Das Previn 1D EDMARK_0 WIDTH TYPE 1 1 River 2 2 River 3 3 River 4 4 River 5 5 River 6 6 River 3 3 River wi IE lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Hep e Click Next gt gt then Click Finish e The next step is to import a surface that represents ground surface e Click the Import Data button e Select Surface for the Data type e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to the My Documents folder then VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel folder and select ground grd e Click Next gt gt through all the screens to accept the defaults then click Finish e Repeat these steps to import the remaining Surfaces layer2 top grd layer2 bottom grd e Next import polyline data objects and from the same source directory select chd east shp use all the defaults and finish the import e Repeat these steps for polylines importing first chd west shp then river shp e Once the data objects are imported they will appear in the tree on the left side of the program window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help File Tools Window Workfh Ladi Data G Data e Og layer2top poe 1 layer2 bottom ag chd east e You can view these data objects in 2D or 3D simply create a ne
6. The Time Steps option is only available when you are running a transient model i e when Transient Flow run type is selected For transient flow simulations VMOD Flex will automatically merge all of the different time periods defined for all of the different pumping wells and boundary conditions into the uniform stress period format required by MODFLOW A stress period is defined as a time period in which all the stresses boundary conditions pumping rates etc on the system are constant Unfortunately the data collected for each modeling site is rarely synchronized in terms of stress periods so VMOD Flex merges the time schedules for all pumping wells and boundary conditions to determine the length of each stress period for a transient simulation As a result the user cannot directly modify the number of stress periods or the length of each stress period The Time step options window as shown in the following figure is used to define the number of Time steps in each stress period and the time step Multiplier is used to increment each time step size The Period column indicates the stress period number while the Start and Stop columns indicate the start time and stop time respectively for each stress period 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 390 VMOD Flex Help Each stress period is divided into a user defined number of Time steps whereby the model will calculate the head solution at each time step The default
7. Species Parameters Model Parameters VMOD Flex currently supports saturated flow simulations and contaminant transport with MT3DMS Future releases will support variably saturated flow density dependent flow and reactive transport simulations The available engines provides a preview of what engines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 265 are available based on your selected objectives VMOD Flex supports e MODFLOW 2000 e MODFLOW 2005 e MODFLOW LGR e Zone Budget and e MODPATH A MODFLOW LGR and Transport MODFLOW LGR currently does not support contaminant transport with MT3DMS e The Start Date of the model corresponds to the beginning of the simulation time period It is important to define a relevant start date since your field measurements observed heads and pumping schedules will be defined with absolute calendar date measurements and must lie within the simulation time period In this example the default start date can be used Transport Objectives An explanation of the Transport Objectives is available in the section Numerical Model Define Objectives b47 Contaminant transport simulation can be enabled and setup in the conceptual model workflow The species concentrations for sinks sources can be defined while you define your conceptual boundary conditions However the transport properties initial concentrations dispersion e
8. al s Mani AIRPORTA grid Run When the run completes the Heads and Drawdown nodes will be added to the Output folder on the model tree 10 12 View Results At the View Results step you have the option to View Maps 438l or View Charts h33 Maps contains contours and color shading of heads and drawdown and also contains MODPATH results if MODPATH was included with the model run Charts contains several chart types e Observed vs Calculated Heads e Time Series e Zone Budget e Mass Balance 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ DRUMCO grid Run a9 File Tools Led Window Help dumco Elevation 1 drumco Hevation 2 drumco Elevation 3 drumco Bevation 4 drumco Elevation 5 drumco Hevation 6 Al VMod Imported Wells Workflow Fl E E Define Modeling Objectives B E Define Numerical Mode E Create Grid E Import Mode E View Edit Grid E Define Properties E Define Boundary Conditions E E Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles B E Select Run Type W PEST Run G Single Run E Translate E E Run Numerical Engines E MODFLOW 2005 Vie
9. 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 9 Minimum Data Requirements Conceptual Modeling Workflow 267 In order to build your conceptual model you require at least the following data objects gt Two Surfaces One for the top and one for the bottom of a geological unit gt A polygon that represents the model area Once you have the data loaded Click Next Step to proceed You may return to this step in the workflow at any time during the model process to import or create new data objects See the following table for some typical data object types and how they are used in the conceptual model workflow If you have River locations ina shapefile Geological layers ina Surfer GRD or ASCII GRD Air photo with river location XYZ points for geological contacts Raster Grid of Kx or Recharge data from Import these as Polylinelie data objects Import these as Surfacehe data objects Import this as a Map imagehes Then Create a new Polylinel204 data object Digitize the polyline in a 2D Viewer Import these as Points 157 data objects Then Create Surfaces from these data objects Import these as surface data objects Surfer ESRI GRD 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Select this data object when creating a river boundary condition Select these data objects when defining horizons Select this new polyline data object when creating a river boundary co
10. 7 6 2 Define Pumping Wells At this step define well boundary condition 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 299 Visual MODFLOW Flex drumeo Conceptual Modet O O O O O O O O O OO O O OO g a x a9 Fie Tools Window Help Workflow 8x ERATI sak O El Data dumco Elevation 1 E Define Modeling Objectives Define Well Boundary Condition D drumco Hevation 2 E Collect Data Objects drumco Elevation 3 EJ Define Conceptual Model iene crumco Bevation 4 E Define Model Structure E drumco Bevation 5 EJ Define Property Zones Des crumco Bevation 6 J Select the Next Step sas a f VMod Imported Wells S E Define Boundary Conditions EO Polygont E Define Surface Water Ne z Define Boundary Conditic H Select Grid T Select Wells Data Object Ca E jel IE Show Only invalid Wells Name x 7 Z Model Explorer L E Rive ij Pumping E Pum EM Particles Forward E Backwa El pow Observa E Outputs Conceptual Model 2 E Model Boundary l E Structure S E Horizons E Horizont E Horizon2 E Horizon3 E Horizon4 D Horizon5 E Horizon6 E S E Zones Zonet E Zone2 E Zone3 E Zone4 5 me okie ig m Exaggeration 1 Sew DRUMCO grid Run Conceptual Model Quick Overview Instructi Select a wells data object to be ons used as wells in the conceptual model Pre Boundary Co
11. BMP TIF GIF JPEG follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the viewer e Select Export Current View to Image from the pop up menu e A Save As window will display allowing to you specify the location on your computer where the graphics file will be saved To export a 3D Viewer to a graphics files follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the viewer e Select Save as image from the pop up menu e The following dialog box will display on your screen 10 x Image Size 3200 2400 Width Height File Name Eag OK Cancel Aa e Select the desired image size from the Image Size combo box If you select Custom then specify the desired image dimensions in the Height and Width combo boxes e Click the button and specify a folder location on your computer to save the image file e Click the Ok button to save the image 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 6 Data Settings VMOD Flex allows you to view and modify various settings and properties for each imported or digitized data object In general data object settings consist of the following categories e General View data object metadata including source data information statistics native coordinate system field mappings view the attribute and geometry table e Operations Apply arithmetic and geometric operations to data object geometry and attributes e Style Settings Modify various style
12. Note Some boundary conditions only support one type of geometry either polygon or polyline Polygons and polyline data objects that extend beyond the model domain must be clipped before they can be used to define boundary conditions Polygons and polylines can be clipped using the clip to polygon data operations which can be accessed in the data object settings right click on the polygon or polyline in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu For more information on data object operations please see Performing Operations on Databe7 section e Click the Next button to proceed to the next step For boundary conditions that are to be applied to the Side s of the simulation domain VMOD Flex allows you to define the geometry by selecting the appropriate side s using an interactive 3D Viewer window This process is described in Defining Boundary Condition Geometry Sides section 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 292 VMOD Flex Help If you select a polygon data object to define the geometry of the boundary condition the next step is defining boundary condition parameters Please skip to Defining Boundary Condition Parameters section for information on this topic If you select a polyline data object to define the geometry of the boundary condition the next step is defining zones for the selected polyline This procedure is described in the following section Define Attributes
13. Select the check box in the Use column in order to include this parameter zone Tied To Tied The parameter value is tied linked to the value of another parameter in which case this parameter takes only a limited role in the parameter estimation process If you select the tied to option then you can select the parent parameter from the dropdown list Note you can only tie to other parameters that have been selected included in the PEST run PEST does not allow a parameter to be tied to a fixed parameter or a parameter that is already tied to another parameter lf a parameter is tied to a parent parameter the parameter piggy backs on the parent 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow s parameter during the estimation process In this way the ratio between the initial values of the parameter and its parent remain constant throughout the estimation process Transformation In many cases the linearity assumption on which PEST is based is more valid when certain parameters are log transformed This means that the log transformation of some parameters can often make the difference between success and failure of the estimation process However a parameter that can become zero or negative during the estimation process must not be log transformed The parameter Transformation field controls how the parameter value will be transformed during the optimization process There are three tra
14. is the vertical dispersivity L V is the vertical velocity of flow along the plume migration pathway D is the diffusion coefficient L2 T v is the magnitude of seepage velocity L T MT3D calculates the Dispersion tensor for the mass transport model using the following parameters e Longitudinal Dispersivity for each transport grid cell e Ratio of Horizontal to Longitudinal Dispersivity for each layer e Ratio of Vertical to Longitudinal Dispersivity for each layer e Molecular Diffusion Coefficient for each layer At the Define Properties the Longitudinal Dispersion can be defined on a cell by cell level The additional Dispersion parameters 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 369 C Initial Concentrations i Log mman wuwa B C Transport 5 O Species Parameters Delete Settings Flex Viewer Export 3D Viewer Expand to selection m Expand all child nodes Collapse all The following dialog will appear B Dispersion Parameters Horiz Long 2 0 1 0 01 Species Parameters The Species Parameters include the Sorption and Reaction parameters used by the selected transport settings The available parameters will depend on what sorption and reaction settings you selected in the modeling objectives The parameters presented in the Species Parameters Database window are from the parameters listed in the Species Parameters
15. Conceptual Model E Si DRUMCO 5 2 Simulation Domain i O Mode Domain Te Boundary Conditions i bu C Pumping Wells Boundary Condition FO Specified Head 1 GAE DRUMCO orid The Model Boundary node allows you to show hide the conceptual model boundary in a 2D or 3D Viewer The Structure folder allows you to define the horizons and structural zones of the conceptual model For more information on structural modeling please see Defining the Structurel270l The Properties node allows you to define property zones for the conceptual model For more information on property modeling please see Defining Property Zones e7a 7 4 Defining the Structure At this step provide the geological surfaces that will represents the tops and bottoms of the geological model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 271 ssl MODF OW Fe mpl a icon Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Con x w File Tools Window Help Workflow E A IE oa GOFF aa S CE ground E Define Modeling Objectives tayer2top E Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure layer2 bottom E Define Conceptual Model ae el elie IC boundary J Define Model Structure a se l 4 m Preview eSzate 4 chd east Define Prope e Horizon Infomation gast i3 a Surfaces Name Type Ta lt Model Explorer rae
16. Edit Boundary Condition PolylineD Zone a Select how the attributes are defined Define for the entire zone Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation e Click Finish The River conceptual boundary condition will be added to the model tree The following display will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 36 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model 9 OF EJ Define Modeling Objectives NedState EJ Collect Data Objects EJ Define Conceptual Model EJ Define Model Structure SLY UNE EY amp O ANS EJ Define Property Zones WB Select the Next Step S E Define Boundary Conditions Define Surface Water Ne Define Pumping Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditic KS Define Finite Element Mesh Select Grid Type E View Finite Bement Mesh E View Finite Difference Gnd Translate to FEF Model Define Finite Difference Grid Translate to FEFLOW Mode Convert to MODFLOW Model Next you can define a Finite Difference Grid or a Finite Element Mesh e Click the Define Finite Difference Grid button and define the inputs as explained in the following section Define Grid 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Define Numerical Grid Name NumericalGrid1 Define Horizontal Grid Rotation Ymin Ymax 3000 000 Width 13000 000 Height 0 Add Data Object _ Gr
17. Initial Heads bd In the Map_to column select the desired attribute field in the source data from the combo box Repeat for additional attributes You can delete a mapped attribute by selecting the row from the Data Mapping table and then clicking the x Delete button Use the Unit Category and Unit columns to define the units of a mapped field If the specified units are different than those defined in the Project Settings VMOD Flex will automatically convert the data in the source file to the default project units The Multiplier column allows you to multiply all values in the mapped field by a specified multiplier value The Data Type column allows you to define the data type Select from the following options Numeric Text Boolean Date and Time For example if the mapped column contains text data select Text from the drop down list Once the data mapping is complete click the Next button to continue to the validation dialog Data Validation The final step involves validation of the data being imported This step will ensure that the data set contains valid data for each of the mapped fields 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 16 ipl There are 1 records with errors highlighted in red These records will not be imported Source Kx ft day contains ilegal numeric value IV Do not import rows with warnings M Mapped Data Preview 20 records were mapp
18. e Transport MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT e MODFLOW SURFACT e MODFLOW 96 e MODFLOW NWT e MNW package e ETS1 Package VMOD Flex All new projects should begin within the Flex interface Create Your Conceptual Model The first step is to create your conceptual model using the VMOD Flex interface Starting with a conceptual model can save you a significant amount of your total project time because the material properties and hydrological boundaries are done independent of the grid design and numerical engine selection This enables rapid adaptation of grid requirements to match property and boundary definitions thus reducing modeling instability and convergence problems Here are a few places to get started e Conceptual Modeling Tutorial e Conceptual Modeling workflow in more details Some sample images from the conceptual model demo project are below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 484 VMOD Flex Help re Figure 1 Property Zones in the Conceptual Model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 48s Figure 2 Boundary Conditions in the conceptual model constant heads on the east and west boundaries colored red a river through the middle of the model colored blue and 4 extraction wells Q When you transfer your flow model to VMOD Classic the names for the boundary conditions and wells are not preserved If this is important define only the geological model
19. 1 When the pure finite difference methods are used FD all terms in the governing equation are represented with implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations 2 When the particle based methods MOC MMOC and HMOC and the TVD method are used to simulate solute transport the terms on the right hand side are represented with implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations At the risk of confusing the issue should add at this point that the TVD algorithm implemented in MT3D is explicit in time This means that even if the GCG Package is used the times steps in TVD run will be still be subject to a time constraint but only the advection term If the user does not specify the use of the GCG package then all terms are represented with explicit in time weighted finite difference 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help 10 10 3 3 MT3DMS_Output_Control The Output Settings and Output Times settings are used to define the length of the transport simulation and the times at which the results will be saved to the binary concentration file UCN Translate General 4 General Settings Simulation time length project time units 200 MODFLOW 2005 Max number of transport steps 1000 Settings Specify maximum step size No Time Steps Maximum step size project time units 1 Solvers Save concentation at observation point forever 1 Recharge and EVT Save one4ine summary of mass budge
20. 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 32 VMOD Flex Help properties This file is required for importing your model into FEFLOW The default file name is Project_name FEM and the default directory on your computer is Project Folder Numerical Models Translation Log File When a numerical model is translated in VMOD Flex a log file is automatically generated and saved on your computer By default the log file name is Project_Name LOG and the directory is Project Name Numerical Models Click the Ea button to specify a new file name and directory Problem Class Currently VMOD Flex only supports the separate flow problem class Simulation Type Select Steady State or Transient from the combo box If the Steady State option is selected VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a steady state flow simulation and will automatically use the data from the first stress period of each boundary condition and pumping well defined in your conceptual model If the Transient Flow option is selected VMOD Flex will automatically merge all the different time period data defined for each pumping well and boundary condition into the stress period format required by FEFLOW Flow Type Select the flow type of the problem class Choose from the following options Saturated media groundwater unsaturated media Unsaturated steady state linearized Richards equation Translation Format The output FEM file generated by VMOD Flex during
21. A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations and basic contaminant transport with MT3DMS If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt Transport MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package When you click on the Import Model button the following dialog will appear Import Model ang G gt Libraries Documeni ts Visual MODFLOW Flex gt Search Vis ODFLOW Flex P Organize New folder BS Desktop BR Downloads Recent Places A Projects Name J Projects Ga Libraries Documents a Music E Pictures B Videos 1 Computer Gia Network ot Favorites Documents library isual MODFLOW Fle fl Date modified Type 5 21 2013 5 41PM File folder Visual MODFLOW projects VN cone To import your Visual MODFLOW project select the VMF file and click Open to continue To import a MODFLOW data set change the file type to MODFLOW 2000 or MODFLOW 2005 then select the desired NAM file and click Open to continue Once the model is finished importing click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 352 VMOD Flex Help Create Grid If you select the Create Grid option the following window will appear amp Visual MODFLOW
22. Settings Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control Translate E General 4 General Settings Run Run MODFLOW 2005 Output Folde D SampleProje Start Date 3 14 2005 At this step you choose if the model is steady state or transient choose the solver you want to use and define any other MODFLOW package run settings such as cell rewetting etc For more details see MODFLOW Translation Settings keel Note in the General Settings there is a default location where the MODFLOW and other files will be generated you can modify the location if you wish gt Translate e Click the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services button circled above to proceed this will read the input from the numerical model and translate this into the various input files needed by MODFLOW and the other engines The files will be created in the directory defined in the previous step 66 VMOD Flex Help Veas MODFLOW Pex domol AIRPORT grit Runi E Vew Ean Gid E Dedna Procanes E Dera Boundary Condtons 5 E Ssa the Not Stes I Define Observation Zones E Define Observation Wels I Define Zine Budget Zones E Define Patices d g Select Fun Type Basa B rgan O Tanase B Aan Namea Enges AO avat 42328 PM STR Package EEEN Sdimbege Water Services 4 6 jae 423 28 PM Translate Sat 4 23 28 PM Transite Boundary for ied 423 28 PM Translate Bounda
23. VMOD Flex provides various methods for assigning parameter values to boundary conditions Each parameter in the boundary condition can be set to Constant or Transient and values can be assigned using attributes from various imported data objects The available methods for assigning attributes include Parameter values must be entered in the units defined in the project settings To read more about the project settings please see Units section in the project settings Once the geometry has been defined see previous sections the next step is to define the boundary condition parameters Although each boundary condition type requires a different set of parameters the data input windows each have similar features and functionality For information on required parameters for each boundary condition please see the appropriate heading under Boundary Conditions Overview section A typical boundary condition data input window is shown below Options for defining attributes PA so Ki pe e Zorer Ports pass Feature List ers o af we i Lee Zone gt Zone List t 2D Viewer Points List Vertices Data Input Gr oS zm PARETO 0 hy e I Proven Fosh Cct Hee Select the Method for Defining Attributes Polylines Only For polylines there are two ways in which you can assign attributes to the boundary condition geometry e Define for the entire zone default This o
24. and one set for the grid cell at the End Point of the line or line segment The boundary condition data for the grid cells between the Start Point grid cell and the End Point grid cell will be linearly interpolated between these two points using the formula below TVAR i where e Xi is the boundary condition parameter value at the ith grid cell along the line e XSP is the boundary condition parameter value at the Start Point of the line e XEP is the boundary condition parameter value at the End Point of the line e TVAR1 i is the cumulative length of the line at the ith grid cell along the line as measured from the center of the Start Point grid cell through the center of each successive grid cell along the line see following figure e LENGTH is the total length of the line as measured from the center of the Start Point grid cell through to the center of the End Point grid cell see following figure When the line is digitized from the Start Point to the End Point each grid cell is numbered in sequence according to the order in which the line passes through each cell If the line passes through the same grid cell twice the grid cell will be numbered twice as seen for grid cell 4 and 6 in the following figure As a result the parameter value calculated for grid cell 6 will over write the parameter value calculated for grid cell 4 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 298 VMOD Flex Help
25. e From the Data or Model Explorer right click on a data object and select 2D Viewer or 3D Viewer from the pop up menu A new viewer will then launch displaying the selected data object Please note that the viewers listed in the pop up menu depend on which data object is selected see table under Displaying Data in Viewers 208t Adding Data Objects to Viewers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 209 To display data in a viewer select the check box beside the data object in the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer If multiple viewers are opened the data will be shown in ad Sint M ote aea iss aa the active viewer Point F ere points To remove data from a viewer select Wells the check box beside the data object ie MAY wells so that it appears empty or unchecked Please note that some data objects may not be viewable in the 3D or 2D Viewers When a data object is displayed in a viewer it will appear as defined in the data object settings For more information on viewing and modifying data object settings please see Data Settings 217 Layering Order in 2D Viewer kerit Layer ordering in 2D Viewer is determined by the sequence in which data objects are added to the viewer For example if two data objects completely overlap each other the data object added last will appear on top of the other You can bring layers to the top by using
26. e Pumping Wells ka Modifying Boundary Conditions From the Conceptual Model tree right click on the desired boundary condition and select Edit Boundary Condition from the pop up menu The Edit Boundary Condition dialog box will display on your screen allowing you modify the input parameters for the boundary condition For more information on defining parameter attributes please refer to Boundary Conditions Overview bod section Once modifications have been made to the input parameters click the Finish button to save the changes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 289 Deleting Boundary Conditions To delete a boundary condition follow the steps below From the Conceptual Model tree right click on the desired boundary condition and select Delete from the pop up menu You will prompted with a confirmation message Click the Yes button to delete the boundary condition Note Please be aware that there is no undo function to recover a deleted boundary condition Please exercise caution when deleting boundary condition Parameters for Transport Boundaries Sinks Sources If you need to include contaminant transport in your model then the species concentrations for transport sinks sources must also be defined while you create your conceptual boundary conditions By default species concentrations will be undefined when you create a new boundary condition An undefined value is identi
27. ime laai 1726 2012 3 23 Pm gt p e If you ran MODPATH you will see Pathlines appear as a new node in the tree under Output circled below add a check box beside the Pathlines to display these in the active 2D 3D Viewers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help ayer 3 Paw 1 Come 21 x 12082 Y 198001 Heads 18 View Charts e Click on View Charts from the workflow tree and the following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Calculated vs Observed Heads Time 1 374 354 334 E F z s 14297612211 314 5eR0 wer 131340 7 e 15838 A 294 14 Pail 4 P of 2744 274 294 314 334 354 374 Observed Head m Min Residual 2 7 m at 10897 Standard Error of the Estimate 0 69 m Max Residual 2 23 m at 18364 Root Mean Squared 3 8 m Residual Mean 1 4 m Normalized RMS 4 9 Abs Residual Mean 2 89 m Correlation Coefficient 0 99 To the left of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select individual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart e In the Charts toolbox under Chart Type select Time Series and the following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 3 3 View Charts Time Series Chat Type Time
28. 2005 etc and if you want to include MODPATH and ZoneBudget in the run e MODFLOW 2005 should be selected by default e Click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Translate Packages e You will arrive at the Translation Step Quick Start Tutorials O O P Define Modeling Objectives 3 gJ Define Numerical Model E Create Grid EJ Import Model View Edit Grid E Define Properties E Define Boundary Conditions B Select the Next Step Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones IJ Define Particles B B Select Run Type PEST Run Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines View Results Translate E General Settings MODFLOW 2005 Settings Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control Run Start Date At this step you choose if the model is steady state or transient choose the solver you want to use and define any other MODFLOW package run settings such as cell rewetting etc Note in the General Settings there is a default location where the MODFLOW and other files will be generated this can be modified if you wish gt Translate e Click the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services button circled above to proceed this will read the input from the numerical model and translate this into the various input files needed
29. 227 255 3 146 428571428571 W 118 255 15 132 142857142857 We 64 255 83 117 857142857143 I 64 255 208 103 571428571429 Me 40 149 246 89 2857142857143 E 8 8 255 75 From the tree on the left side of this window select Colors under Style Recharge In the main window under Attribute you can then change this between Zone or Rate as you change this the color range in the grid will refresh Upon clicking Apply or OK the 2D 3D views will be refreshed Exporting Boundary Conditions The boundary condition cell locations and attributes be exported to shapefile see Exporthai for more details Adjusting Style Settings The style settings of some of the Boundary condition cells Right click on the desired Boundary condition cell group from the model tree and select Settings 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 381 The Settings dialog will appear the settings are similar to described in Points 235 10 5 1 DefineBC_Theory Steady State vs Transient Flow Boundary Conditions For transient simulations MODFLOW requires the time element of the boundary conditions to be defined using Stress Period counters as opposed to using real times As a result each time interval for a transient model must be determined in terms of Stress Periods before any boundary condition data is defined Unfortunately accommodating this format is quite tedious because the data co
30. Aux is assigned to the top face of all cells Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Week Sink Option Week Sink Option Recharge EVT Options The Recharge Options are used to define how MODPATH treats the Recharge flow entering the system The Recharge Options are e Recharge flux is treated as internal sources and sinks for all cells e Recharge flux is assigned to the top face of all cells The first option treats recharge as a distributed source entering the cell from all sides while the second option treats recharge as though it is entering only through the top face of the cell According to the MODPATH reference manual the distributed source approximation for areal recharge is usually only appropriate for two dimensional areal flow models The Evapotranspiration Options are the same as described for Recharge above 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 417 10 10 2 2 Reference Time The Reference Time is used by MODPATH as the time datum for the simulation of both forward and backward tracking particles This option is only applicable for transient flow simulations Translate General 4 Time Format Settings Time Format Absolute time MODFLOW 2005 Stress Period Settings Time Step Time Steps Reletive Time Inside Step 0 lt t lt 1 Solvers Ab
31. Define Property Parameters E Define Pilot Points Variograms EJ Define Kriging Variograms Select Run Type Type os Exponential y gt 0 Alpha 500 However the structures should be modified e Click Zone1 under Kx in the tree The display will appear as below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s Ea Apply Define Observations Define Property Parameters Define Kriging Vairograms Kri Structure BJ Define Pilot Points ane J Define Kriging Variograms Nugget posname A ae ce Zone3 16 AA r Zone4 Transform sha Variograms zat gt Variogramkx1 p bal E Variogramkx2 Number of Variograms Paramete Variogramkx3 Analyze Rese Variogramkx4 1 Update Mode Weight 0 15 Kriging Min Number of Points 1 Max Number of Points 50 Search Radius e In the editor on the right side of the display for Transform set this to log e Repeat these steps setting log Transform for Kx Zone2 3 and 4 Thus any variogram cited in each of these structures must pertain to the spatial distribution of the logarithm of the pertinent hydraulic property This is in accordance with the fact that most studies cited in the groundwater literature which treat transmissivity and or hydraulic conductivity as a regionalised variable indicate that its distribution is better described by a log variogram than by a vario
32. Export Data and choose TecPLOT DAT file format This must be done for each desired output time e This file will then be imported as a 3D Gridded Data object in VMOD Flex as explained below VMOD Flex Import Results from VMOD Classic Polylines Shapefiles In VMOD Flex select File Import and choose Polyline as the data type Select the desired pathline or concentration contour polyline shapefiles The polylines will not have any elevation attribute If you wish to position these in a 3D Viewer you need to define an elevation A simple way to do this is through data operations Select the desired polyline and load the Settings Data Operations Select a desired Z Elevation value or select to have the Z value calculated from a surface Execute the Data operation and click OK to update the data object For more details see Data Operations in the web help The following figures illustrate the pathlines and contour lines visualized in 3D viewer after assigning an elevation attribute to each polyline data object 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help amp ground layer2top layer2 bottom boundary GZ chd west A chies ZB river Pumping_Wells Obswells 7 pathlines pth LIS pathines tim Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 Initial Heads C Property Zone 3 imulation Domain C Model Domain M
33. Horizon3 Database Zones eneu E Zonet Assign E Zone2 i Properties Conductivity J Property Zone 1 E Property Zone 2 Simulation Domain Model Domain GB Boundary Conditions NumericalGrid1 Run E Inputs Me vans Runt i inputs Outputs LGR 5 J Run2 E Inputs 5 E Outputs 5 C Coarse Grid 5 Run3 Inputs E Outputs ai rll Layer Row Column HCoord VCoord Atrribute The tree structure for multiple model runs is shown below Each numerical grid which is derived from a conceptual model can have one or more model Runs each model run contains the inputs and output for a single numerical model Deformed Grid 100 100 la Run2 i ij Inputs i E Outputs Run4 Inputs i Outputs 5 C LGR Child Grid Around Wellfield E Inputs i E Outputs 5 C Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layers 5 Run1 E Inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 480 VMOD Flex Help Closing Minimizing Workflow Windows You can close a workflow window at anytime by selecting the X button in the top right however this is only recommended if you do not need the workflow window until a later time for example a specific model run How To Reload a Closed Workflow You can reload a workflow window at any time from the Workflow menu by selecting Workflow Open and the following dialog will appear amp Open Workflows Select Workflows to Open rid Ru
34. License Install will allow you to install a LIC file that you have received from SWS Technical support For more details on licensing please refer to the Getting Started Guide 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 3 Quick Start Tutorials The following tutorials provide a brief introduction on how to use VMOD Flex The objective is not to teach you every detail but to familiarize you with basic principles and the way the program works The steps are intentionally kept brief so that you can actually start using the program as quickly as possible You are encouraged to explore the more detailed sections of the Help to further familiarize yourself In VMOD Flex there are two workflows you can follow Conceptual or Numerical Modeling Please take a moment to review the summary below to help you decide where you should start Conceptual Modeling Recommended for Creating New Models Use this option if you e Are starting anew modeling project and have various data types formats GIS etc for defining the geological layering flow materials and boundary conditions e Are dealing with complex geological layering pinchouts and discontinuities e Wish to evaluate multiple numerical grids for your project e Wish to build a conceptual model for FEFLOW The Conceptual Modeling tutorial will walk you through the following steps e Loading your raw data Defining the Geological Structure e Defining the Proper
35. Once the points data objects are created they are added to the Data Explorer using the naming convention wells data object name formation label shown above Calculating Well Head Elevation Z from a Surface For well data objects only This operation is only available for well data objects It allows you to calculate elevation values for each well head in the data object using a specified surface data object Please note any well head elevations that have been added manually or imported will be overwritten with the elevation values calculated from the specified surface 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 234 VMOD Flex Help Settings B x E General Operations Operations Select Operation Calculate well head elevation 2 from a surface Description and Instructions Calculate well head elevation values from a selected surface Parameter Ve o surface Execute To calculate well head elevation from a surface e Select Calculate well head elevation Z from a surface from the Select Operation combo box e Select the desired Surface data object from the Data Explorer and select the button to insert the data object into the surface field e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Once the operation is applied you can confirm that the new Z values were created by viewing the table view for the selected well data object Please note that VMOD Flex will ignore wells where
36. Parameter Estimation Analyze Results IJ Update Model inputs PEST control file PEST Run Log pest_jac rec pest_jac sen pest_jac seo pest_jac res pg 1 29 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg2 30 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 31 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 32 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 33 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg 3 34 log factor 30 1 300 pg3 1 00 01 pg 4 35 log factor 30 1 300 pg4 1 00 01 Record file REC Sensitivities for Observations Composite Sensitivities SEO Sensitivities for Parameters SEN Residuals RES Select the appropriate tab and you will see the sensitivities for the parameters and observations along with other useful PEST run results Select Regularization At this step choose which regularization options you want to use in the PEST Run No Regularization 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow s Tikhonov Regularization ke7 SVD Assisthes Define Observations Select Regularization Define Property Parameters EJ Define Pilot Points y Define Kriging Variograms BB Select Run Type Sensitivity Analysis D SVD Assist f Tikhonov Regularisation IE No Regularization ia Tikhonov Regularisation 000 SVD Assist Theory One of the great advantages of using pilot points is that we can distribute a superfluity of those po
37. The Drain package assumes the drain has no effect if the head in the aquifer falls below the fixed head of the drain Required Data The Drain Package requires the following information as input for each cell containing this boundary condition e Elevation The drain elevation or drain head of the free surface of water within the drain The drain is assumed to run only partially full so that the head within the drain is approximately equal to the median elevation of the drain e Leakance The drain leakance is a lumped coefficient describing the head loss between the drain and the groundwater system This loss is caused by converging flow patterns near the drain the presence of foreign material around the drain channel bed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow sos materials the drain wall and the degree to which the drain pipe openings may be blocked by chemical precipitates plant roots etc There is no general formulation for calculating drain leakance In most situations the detailed information required to calculate drain leakance is not available to the groundwater modeler These details include the detailed head distribution around the drain aquifer hydraulic conductivity near the drain distribution of fill material number and size of the drain pipe openings the amount of clogging materials and the hydraulic conductivity of clogging materials It is common to calculate drain leakance f
38. Translation Type Max step size days 0 Settings Multiplier 1 Output Control Output Settings Output Times For numerical solution of the advection dispersion transport equation MT3D based transport engines provide the following Solution Methods Standard Finite difference methods e Upstream Finite Difference UFD e Central Finite Difference CFD 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help e Higher order finite volume TVD method NOTE The Particle tracking based Eulerian Lagrangian methods MOC MMOC and HMOC are currently not available in Visual MODFLOW Flex No single solution method has been shown to be effective for all transport conditions The combination of these solution methods each having its own strengths and limitations is believed to offer the best approach for solving the most wide ranging transport problems with desired efficiency and accuracy A brief description of all the above solution methods and their advantages and disadvantages is available below Further Zheng and Bennett 1995 provides an introduction to all these solution methods and a discussion and comparison of their relative strengths and limitations with emphasis on their implications in solving practical problems General methodologies of the solution methods MT3DMS is a transport model for simulating advection dispersion and chemical reactions of contaminants in groundwater flow systems It solves the transport
39. e After the parent grid has been defined right click on the numerical grid from the Conceptual Model tree and select Create Child Grid Horizontal Grid Refinement Horizontal child grid refinement involves specifying the location of the child grid within the parent grid and defining the row and column refinement ratio amp Define Numerical Grid i E oo p Eon xX Name Child grid1 Define Horizontal Grid Refinement Ratio ET PE EY PEN EN EN PRS ES PM VC A YS MY YE YS J 3 1 z Preview H Row Refinement Column Refinement B Start Start M End End E __Add Data Object a Next gt gt Cancel Tip You can add data objects e g boundaries wells site maps from the data explorer to the 2D Viewer preview to assist you in determining the placement of the child grid within the parent grid Select the desired data objects from the data explorer and the data will be displayed in the 2D Viewer preview Enter a unique name for the child grid in the Name field Next select the refinement ratio from the Ratio combo box A ratio of 3 1 for example will refine the parent cell by a factor of three resulting in nine horizontal child cells within one parent cell Finally specify the Row Refinement interval and the Column Refinement interval by selecting the starting row column and ending row column for where the grid refinement should be applied within the parent grid The child grid can
40. e Click OK when you are finished A new node will appear on the model tree under Particles Forward and Reverse particles can be shown in the Flex viewer or ina stand alone 3D Viewer 10 9 Select Engines Select the Engines you wish to include in the model run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 385 USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS i Run Numerical Engines H View Results Only one version of MODFLOW may be selected for a particular run You can also include ZoneBudget and MODPATH Currently these options are only appropriate if you have imported a Visual MODFLOW project with zone budget zones defined and particles MODFLOW LGR should only be run when you have defined a child grid and ran Conceptual to Numerical Conversion from the Conceptual Modeling workflow When you are finished click Next Step button to proceed 10 10 Translation Settings The Translate button will translate the model input data from VMOD Flex file formats to the data files required for the selected numeric engines see Appendix A The available translation settings will depend on what engines you chose to include in the previous step Select Run Type Single Run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 386 VMOD Flex Help 10 10 1 Ea gt Translate a Define Modeling Objectives S E Define Numerical Model Translate E Create Grid Im
41. e From the 2D Viewer sidebar select the Pick button to set the 2D Viewer to pick mode Pick mode allows you to click and select individual shape elements e g vertices line segments features that comprise the active data object e From the 2D Viewer sidebar select the Edit button to set the 2D Viewer to edit mode Once this button is selected a set of editing buttons will display in the 2D Viewer sidebar The edit buttons that show in the sidebar will vary depending on which type of data object is being edited For example the Add Points button will not be shown when you are editing creating a polygon or polyline data object The edit buttons are described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 206 VMOD Flex Help a z G he Add Points Digitize points in the 2D Viewer by moving the mouse cursor to the desired location and clicking the left mouse button This button only shows when creating edit a Points data object Add Polyline Digitize a polyline in the 2D Viewer Click the left mouse to start the line and then left click to insert a vertex along the line path Double click to end the polyline This button only shows when creating editing a Polyline data object Add Polygon Digitize a polygon in the 2D Viewer Click the left mouse button to start the polygon Each successive left mouse click will insert a vertex Double click to close the polygon Move Points Move a point by selecting and drag
42. grids for a MODFLOW LGR run For more details please see the Define Child Grid for LGR b3 section When you are finished with the grid edits click on the Next Step to proceed This will generate the model tree structure in the lower left corner of the window with Inputs and Outputs Note Once the model tree has been generated it is not possible to make further edits to the numerical grid Such as coarsening or refining However a workaround to this is to create a new numerical grid then populate this grid with the conceptual objects that are defined when you do cell based editing You can create an additional grid for your model by right clicking on the Model Domain folder under the model tree and selecting Create Finite Difference Grid Create the desired grid and make the necessary edits you can right click on the grid to access the Edit Grid or Define Child Grid options explained above Once the grid is finalized right click on this new grid in the tree and select Convert to Numerical Model This will run a conversion routine that populates the new grid with the conceptual data that were defined while creating inputs for the first grid You can then proceed through this new workflow to run the model for this adjusted grid View Edit Grid After you have created a grid or imported a grid and associated model you will be taken to the View Edit Grid step There are several options available e Under View
43. near the bottom of your display you will see a list of active windows al L Properties i i i B C Aow C Storage i i C Initial Heads 5 C Boundary Conditions C Constant Heads f C Constant Head 1 6 oO Rivers i i C River 1 m Outputs i Z Heads i i C Drawdown i C NumericalGrid2 E Nintimizatinn_ o 2 m Conceptual Model WumericalGridl Numerical Model e Click on the Conceptual Model button to make this the active window and it should now appear on your display e Click on Select Grid Type from the workflow tree e Click Define Finite Difference Grid button and the Define Grid window will appear e Define a new grid with the desired grid size and rotation e Click Next e Specify the desired vertical discretization you may wish to use a different vertical grid type or refine any of the vertical layers e Click Finish when you are done e The new grid should now appear and you will also see the grid appear as a new node in the model tree e Click the gt Next step button to proceed Now you are ready to populate the numerical grid mesh with the conceptual elements The Convert to Numerical Model display should appear similar as below Now in the Select Grid combo box you will see there are 2 grids by default the grid you created should be selected e Click on the Convert to Numerical Model button to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger W
44. o Update Model Inputs charting Click on the file the results will be separated into individual worksheets for facilitate analysis PEST REC PEST SEO PEST SEN PEST RES PEST RUN RECORD CASE pest_run PEST Version 12 3 1 PEST run mode Parameter estimation mode Case dimensions Number Number Number Number Number of parameters 35 of adjustable parameters z 35 of parameter groups 2 4 of observations 21 of prior estimates o Model command line s model bat Jacobian command line na Model interface files Templates pest kx points tp1 for model input files pest kx points dat Parameter values written using single precision protocol Decimal point always included Instruction files pest heads ins for reading model output files 2 pest mo obs out PEST to model message file na The PEST output files can be exported to Excel spreadsheets for further processing and 2 4 Export button to specify an output name location for the Excel Save PEST Parameters as New Inputs At the end of the PEST run provided the adjusted parameters are reasonable you may want to save these as inputs for anew model run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 475 J Define Observations Define Property Parameters BJ Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms H B Select Run
45. provided with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Well cells is stored in the projectname WEL file You can define the location for horizontal or deviated wells which include the well path and the screen location When you translate your conceptual model to MODFLOW format the horizontal well screen location is converted to set of pumping well cells side by side Another option is to define a specified flux or drain boundary condition in VMOD Flex These are the workarounds since there is no MODFLOW package for horizontal wells For finite element model translations VMOD Flex translates the pumping well boundary conditions as a Type 4 Well boundary condition Please note that the defined screen interval must extend beyond half of the element height for it to be assigned the boundary condition Currently deviated horizontal well translation is not supported for finite element models If you intend to translate to FEFLOW please make sure all pumping well boundary conditions are defined using vertical wells Required Data In VMOD Flex pumping well boundary conditions are defined using the well data contained in a wells data object During the boundary condition creation process you will be required to select a wells data object from the Data Explorer A well can only be used if it meets the following requirements e The pumping well must be located within the simulation domain e Ascreen must be defined for the pumping well e A pumping sc
46. so that generally MXCYC can be less than 50 For highly nonlinear problems however better performance may be achieved by limiting the solver to a small number of cycles and increasing the maximum number of iterations MXITER This prevents the solver from needlessly finding very accurate solutions at early iterations of these highly nonlinear problems Residual Convergence Criterion RCLOSE for the inner iteration Typically RCLOSE is set to the same value as HCLOSE If RCLOSE is set too high then additional outer iterations may be required due to the linear equation not being solved with sufficient accuracy Likewise a too restrictive setting for RCLOSE for nonlinear problems may force an unnecessarily accurate linear solution This may be alleviated with the MXCYC parameter or with damping Note In the new SAMG package RCLOSE and HCLOSE replace BCLOSE Damping Factor DAMP Default 1 The damping factor can be used to restrict the head change from one iteration to the next which commonly is useful in very nonlinear problems DAMP makes the solution change slowly thus avoiding spurious deviations prompted by nonlinear effects at intermediate solutions Values of DAMP less than 1 0 restrict the head change under relaxation while values greater than 1 0 accelerate the head change over relaxation For linear problems no damping is necessary and DAMP should be set equal to 1 0 For non linear problems restricting the head change
47. sorption isotherm is included in simulation For further detail please refer to page 4 19 in the MT3DMS Documentation and User s Guide Maximum number of inner iterations ITER1 Default 50 The inner loop in the iteration 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow process continues to iterate toward the solution until the convergence criterion is obtained or the maximum number of inner iterations is reached During these iterations the coefficient matrix and the right hand side vector matrix remain unchanged The default number of inner iterations is fifty A maximum value of thirty to fifty inner iterations should be sufficient for most problems For further details please refer to page 4 19 in the MT3DMS Documentation and User s Guide The Relative convergence criterion CCLOSE Default 104 is used to judge the convergence in terms of relative concentration of the inner iterations of the solver The default value is 104 A value between 10 and 10 is generally adequate The Concentration change printing interval IPRGCG Default 0 is the interval for printing the maximum concentration changes of each iteration The default is O for printing at the end of each stress period Preconditioners The GCG Solver implicitly solves the non advective terms in the transport equation using a two iteration loop process and the choice between three pre conditioning options e Jacobi ISOLVE 1
48. you will have options to specify the start and end time and the number of time frames These options are only appropriate if you are animating Heads or Drawdown that has multiple output times 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 215 e ad Animation Parameters hjall V Rotate Transient Time Time Delay ms 200 Rotate Time Start Time 11 18 1858 jv Min Time gt 11 18 1858 End Time A Max Time 3 29 2012 fv 3 29 2012 Frames Time steps 5 a Video T Write Video File D apritest0 avi 1280 720 Click OK after defining the desired Animation settings Then right click on the 3D viewer and select Animate and the rotation will start If you have selected to record a video file then the video recording will begin Once you are done recording right click on the 3D viewer again and select Animate to stop the animation A Caution The AVI recording can be memory and CPU intensive The performance will depend on the size of the model you are visualizing and the hardware on your computer memory CPU video driver Please be patient while this is recording The recording time will also increase when you include 3D gridded objects such as Conductivity Zones Calculated Heads Drawdown or Concentrations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help Exporting Views To export a 2D Viewer to a graphics file e g
49. 2 amp 30 Tools A heeeeeesesessensen Constant Head x 3 Edt lt lt I i gt Layer 1 Row 22 Column 1 X 3033 13 Y 12505 4 Abrribute Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 NumericalGrid1 Run Figure 6 Boundary Condition cell representations in the Numerical Workflow Translate to MODFLOW Packages After reviewing the numerical model you are ready to generate MODFLOW packages that will serve as inputs for the MODFLOW 2000 2005 Run At the Translation step in the numerical workflow click on the Translate button Oi B KROJ Convert conceptual model to numeric Translate Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions E Select the Next Step E Define Observation Zones S General B6 al I Define Observation Wells IW Define Zone Budget Zones Settings a Ren Wi Define Particles SOR S ae A woe E Select Run Type mas IR PEST Run aks Single Ri ikas Recharge and EVT D Translate gt Lake Run Numerical Engine View Result Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 490 VMOD Flex Help Make a note of the Output Folder circled above for your project This is where VMOD Flex will generate the MODFLOW files on your hard drive These are the files you will need to select when you import into Visual MODFLOW Classic as explained below If you are running a flow model at this point you could proceed to the Ru
50. 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 295 The constant value method allows you to define a single value for the entire zone Upon translation each grid cell comprising the boundary condition zone will be assigned the specified constant value When this method is selected default simply enter the desired attribute value in the Data Entry Grid Note The values for each constant value attribute should be entered in the same units as defined in the Project Settings Use Surface From Surface This method allows you to define boundary condition attributes using an existing Surface data object Upon translation attribute values are calculated from the specified surface data object A surface data object can be useful for defining an elevation attribute i e River Stage Head Lakebed Bottom etc Note The surface data object must cover the entire conceptual model domain area When this method is selected click the From Surface button to launch the Static Data Control dialog shown below To specify a surface data object e Select the desired surface from the Data Explorer e Click the button to insert the surface data object into the attribute field e Repeat for other attributes that have been assigned this method e Click the OK button Use Shapefile Attribute From Shapefile The method allows you to use Shapefile attributes for defining boundary condition attributes e Select
51. 217 T Gener l S ttings nnmnnn ERE scevecsestedeessueuecds cde tuesucanesaueeaeds eleeeede cosevavese R Ei 218 2 Data Table 3 Data Operations 4 Style Settings Points Polylines and Polygons 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 VMOD Flex Help Part 7 ana u A U N F Part 8 Part 9 Part 10 uw A U N F O on Q 10 Cross SO CEOS ae eea a aerae e aE ooe e EEE EE aaoo Ea E ASEE E Ea 243 Wells a a A A A Ae AAE a a A O LONG e E N Aa 246 e E E E E E E E E TT E ES TA 249 3D Gridded Data errare A E E a TAES ENT AES EE E TENE E EAE E ETEei 252 Conceptual Modeling Workflow 263 Define Modeling Objectives sonens nann nA RRT RE R E SE a 264 Collect Data Objects ee E R R AA EE i EE SE A ER EATE 265 Create New Concept al M del riea ese araa ee aaea a E EE a ri esi otoda 268 Defining th Str ct r CjO A A E E EE OE Sasi 270 D fining Pr perty Zones O csseesesssscsesdeaiseececessesccsees apssceucsceansvesases aaa Sah oen Sineo Sio doesceavaqseeseuseesesnvoetasavscegsveensceeees Defining Boundary Conditions Define Boundary Conditions Lines Polygons sssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssessssseessusseenssssessusseesssssosnessotsssssoenesseessssseeesse 289 Define PUMpPiNng A EE EEE EE E E E EE E E EE 298 Theory Defining Grids Meshes 314 Create Finite Difference Grid scccicscccccsccssscsesessveietensccecsecseces ee useeostvececsocscesseusevessteeatentsacectocdesssuewsstnesssaceetensotsaess 315
52. A 1979 Groundwater Prentice Hall Inc Englewood Cliffs New Jersey 604 pp Glover F 1986 Future paths for integer programming and links to artificial intelligence Comp and Operations Res 5 p 533 549 Glover F 1989 Tabu Search Part ORSA J Comp 1 3 190 206 Graham D N Chmakov S Sapozhnikov A Gregersen J B OpenMI Coupling of MODFLOW and MIKE 11 MODFLOW and More 2006 Managing round Water Systems Conference Proceedings May 21 24 v2 p727 731 Harbaugh A W 1990 Acomputer program for calculating subregional water budgets using results from the USGS Modular Three Dimensional finite difference groundwater flow model U S Geological Survey Open File Report 90 392 Henry R M 1995 A Critical Comparison of Some Commonly Used Groundwater Modeling Codes M Sc Thesis University of Waterloo Department of Earth Sciences Waterloo Ontario 115 pp Hill M C 1997 Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient 2 PCG2 A Computer Program for Solving Groundwater Flow equations USGS Water Resources Investigations Report 90 4048 Hill M C 1992 A Computer Program MODFLOWP for Estimating Parameters of a Transient Three Dimensional Ground Water Flow Model using Nonlinear Regression U S Geological Survey Open File Report 91 484 Huyakorn P S and Pinder G F 1983 Computational Methods in Subsurface Flow Academic Press New York NY 473 pp HydroGeoLogic Inc 1996 MODFLOW SURFACT ver 2 2
53. A Conc001 730 IPE ow 760 1640 165 A Conc001 1460 IAE Owi 760 1640 165 A Conc001 2190 5 owl 760 1640 165 A Cone001 2920 HEG owl 760 1640 165 A Conc001 3650 lel ow2 810 1415 165 A Conc001 730 E FE OW2 810 1415 165 A Conc001 1460 el ow2 810 1415 165 A Conc001 2190 g 10 Ow2 310 1415 165 A Conc001 2920 ain ow2 810 1415 165 A Conc001 3650 g2 Ow3 310 1140 165 A Conc001 730 gl 13 ows 310 1140 165 A Conc001 1460 pl 14 ow3 310 1140 165 A Conc001 2190 A ay a me m a m gt eam p at r lt lt Back Netos Cancel _ e Next gt gt e VMOD Flex provides you with various options to import well data e Choose the radio button Well heads with the following data radio button e Then select Observations points e Then select Observed concentrations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 121 a Data Import a e Ermo Select the type of wells to import Vertical iD Deviated Horizontal Select the fomat of the vertical data in your data source Bevation Measured depths Select the type of data you want to import Well heads only with Id x y Bevation and depth Well heads with the following data C Screens ID locations Observation points Observed heads Observed concentrations Well tops lt lt Back Net gt gt Cancel Help e Next gt gt e Next gt gt to accept the default Coordinate System e In this screen you
54. As New Data Object Execute To apply an attribute operation e Select the desired expression from the Select Operation combo box e f you are unsure of what the expression does refer to the provided description in the Description and Instructions text box e In the Input Parameters frame select an attribute from the combo box under the Value column e Enter a value in the Constant field under the Value column e Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transformed data as a new data object e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Creating an Attribute from 3D Gridded Data Object For Points and Surface data objects only This operation allows you to create a new attribute using 3D Gridded data for surface and points data objects This feature can be useful after you have run the numerical model simulation using VMOD Flex and you have imported the HDS file back into VMOD Flex as a 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 230 VMOD Flex Help 3D Gridded data object for visualizing the heads in 3D Viewer The head information in the 3D Gridded data object can be extracted and interpolated for a surface or points data object You can then use the Color by Attribute feature to display the heads information on the surface or points data object Likewise this can be used for visualizing any attribute contained in a 3D Gridded data object on a surface or points data object This procedure is de
55. Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file 10 10 1 4 6 SAMG Visual MODFLOW supports the Algebraic Multigrid Methods for Systems Solver SAMG Package developed by the Fraunhofer Institute for Algorithms and Scientific Computing FhG SCAI Please note that the SAMG solver is only available with the MODFLOW 2000 2005 and LGR flow engine The Algebraic Multigrid AMG Package solver may be obtained from the Fraunhofer Institute for Algorithms and Scientific Computing FnG SCAI for research purposes only Although most users will not have any difficulty running Visual MODFLOW with the AMG solver Schlumberger Water Services unfortunately cannot provide technical support for users who choose to manually add the AMG solver to their Visual MODFLOW software The SAMG solver package is a complete multi level framework designed to overcome the high memory requirements of previous AMG based solvers while maintaining the scalability and rapid execution times Testing of the SAMG solver vs the PCG2 solver using several models generated using Visual MODFLOW demonstrated solution times to be faster by a factor of between 2 4 and 11 3 The SAMG Package has some distinct advantages over other solvers available with MODFLOW for problems with large grids more than about 40 000 cells and or a highly variable hydraulic conductivity fiel
56. Define Optional Model Elements e You will arrive at a choice screen here you can proceed to some of the non essential inputs for the model such as Zone Budget Zones Particle Tracking or Observation Wells Or you can proceed to Running the simulation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s B B Define Modeling Objectives S E Define Numerical Model i E Create Grid I impot Model B View Edit Grid Define Properties E Define Boundary Conditions a I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles i Select Run Type PEST Ru bas 4 0929 Select Run Type Define Particles 213 1 214 5 mmm 60 2137 120 212 4 Define Zone Budget Zones Define Observation Wells e Click the Select Run Type button to proceed Mouse over this and you will see the blue Next arrow appear on top just left click once to select this option Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Click the Compose Engines button to proceed Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step View Results e You will arrive at the Select Engines step Here you can choose what engines you want what version of MODFLOW 2000
57. Define Property Parameters J Define Pilot Points Select existing well point data object Defi B 65 Pilot points Parameter zones a e P Name Group Used Parameter Zone m k li amp Kx 2 oP LS lk On mike 3 eu oe ia Kx j4 Used Fred _ Name o Gop DOE a E Value F ppd pilot points zone1 43947 7 763089 130 a a b pilot poits zone1 43892 763127 l2 F F pp2 pilot points zonel 43763 763134 lao E m p03 plot paints zone 437457 763012 30 Vv F pp4 pilot points zone1 43920 762974 30 v O Ibos pl tpants zone 44024 3 763057 30 E F p6 p otportszoneT 44028 762956 30 wl a pp7 pdot points zone 441883 762939 0 z wm m s pict points zone1 437343 763190 E Now repeat these steps to define the pilot points for the remaining Kx Zone2 e Select pilot points zone2 data object from the Data Explorer tree e Click Insert button at the top of the Define Pilot Points window to add these points e Select KxZone2 for these pilot points if it is not already selected Repeat these steps for Kx Zone3 e Select pilot points zone3 data object from the Data Explorer tree e Click 2 Insert button at the top of the Define Pilot Points window to add these points 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials m e Select KxZone3 for these pilot points Repeat these steps for Kx Zone4 e Select
58. E General General Style Cells Vertices n Lines W Show Colormap V Use virtual grid Slice Colormap Slice Settings Colormap Colors Isolines lsosurfaces After selecting this Slice Type you need to provide a polyline data object that contains one or more polylines representing the cross sections you want to render Polylines can be imported from a shapefile or DXF file or created manually See Creating New Data Objects ko4 for more details Select this polyline data object from the tree then click on the 2 to insert this into the field as shown above Click Apply and the display will update with the appropriate cross section lines An example for two cross sections is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 258 VMOD Flex Help amp 3D Viewer 1 koda Rk MPF Object Exaggeration 31 gt da In the Settings tree under Colormap Colors you can access the color page where you can choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recharge rate etc For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attribute 23el section Isolines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 259 Settings eta E General General Style C
59. EditGrid assccecececceeeeeseees Define Child Grid for LGR Create Finite Element Mesh ssssssssssssssssssesssesessssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssnsssssssssssassssesssnsesssssessssssssnsessssesesenes 325 Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 334 CONVEFTINE TO MODELOW cdsssssiscssissiosastsossoibocseasocsecescsscsecssscesreadeastumsesceadsocscasuedbessassseddesetensansisdussssdosseseaseasenetoaseets 334 CONVEFTING to FEFLOW sssssstsscesssccssessoecesssesnesoesectedeuceed EEEa TEE E ENEE EAVES aS ENI EEEE ERTER ESS 339 Numerical Modeling Workflow 345 Define Objectives vamia i RAE EE E R a a E esati 346 Define Numerical Model cssssssssssssssssessssssssssssscsssnssesssssssssessnsssssessssssssnsssssssussessssassesssssesessesasasasssecenssesssnsssees 350 View Edit Grid Define Properties Theory saceekedcescecdecectecesehaaidedecsactessecdsbsusnacueicevectestoccacasseuciesdeiucvectucoucesdsebissdaddesseneccatncdsacersisedensseicccctacaveseidestest Define Boundary Conditions s cccsctics cheese heres caceecdsnsewcsetecsecda e saved scleceecbesdelecbnchestnstocteceuteasenttevondaceevtnabedeecoudbetacseave 370 DEFNEBE THEORY i cefceicc E E EE A AEE Loulestundivergenbiosceccesdoveusavosvesdeussedccstodevcenvevesselossbsccaecueudtventenuarscceess 381 DefINE OBSERVATIONS aacacacsctasacccviecutectesecesseuctecsdeccctevaccenssacbccesonasiasevsesduceccnsescensdatbesbincensesocesseucscudausvavevanceverts 382 Define
60. Fe E mal E Define Model Structur bE eE E m Horizon Infomation Surfaces n ground Horizont Erosional gt lay2 Hotizon2 Conformable Conformable i gt iad Exaggeration 46 e Finally click the i gt button to create the horizons and proceed to the next step Once created the horizons will be added to the Conceptual Model Tree under the Horizons node shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 274 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model E 4 Conceptual Model i C Model Boundary cy Structure i EF Horizons C Horizon2 C Horizon3 C Horizon4 C Horizon5 i C Horizon i he C Horizon H P Zones E Properties i C Simulation Domain Horizon Types Each horizon can be assigned a particular type which defines the relationship to other horizons in the conceptual model This prevents intersecting layers and establishes layers that satisfy both FEFLOW and MODFLOW requirements Each horizon type is described below Erosional horizons can be used as the highest or as an intermediate horizon but not as the bottom of the conceptual model This type of horizon will truncate all horizons below it including the base horizon Base horizons can be used as the lowest horizon in the conceptual model Any conformable horizon types will lap onto it while all erosional or discontinuity horizons will truncate it 2013 by Schlumberger Water Serv
61. Flex Data Import Map coordinates Top right x 575606 106278753 Y 4863929 99300153 Bottom left x 1574143 944498471 Y 4862790 07073205 Georeferenced image JEASampleFiles test_project baseline_sup Georeference parameter JEASampleFiles test_project baseline_sup The Map Coordinates frame provides the georeferenced coordinates of the Top Right and Bottom Left corners of the image The path of the georeferenced image and the associated georeference tag file is also shown Click the Finish button to import the map into VMOD Flex 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 194 VMOD Flex Help 4 1 9 Time Schedules Time schedule data generally contains time data for one or more attributes It can be used in VMOD Flex to define the stress periods for transient boundary condition attributes e g recharge river stage etc The following file types are supported for time schedule data Excel XLS Time schedule data can be imported using either an absolute or relative time format An example of an absolute time schedule is shown below Time River Stage 11 01 2008 16 18 11 15 2008 16 01 12 01 2008 16 12 12 15 2008 16 29 etc An example of a relative time schedule is shown below Starting Date 11 01 2008 Time days River Stage 0 16 18 15 16 01 30 16 12 45 16 29 etc To import time schedule data follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the p
62. Import p 0 x Geographic information for the source data Coordinate Systems UTM Zone 17N 8 Datum world Geodetic System 1984 m Local Coodinate System lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help Next set your Data Mapping by mapping columns in the source data to the target fields in VMOD Flex A read only preview of the source data is presented The process of data mapping is described in the following section in greater detail 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 163 RE Data Import lol x m Data Mapping Target_ fields Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type x x Length m 1 Numeric Y Y Length m 1 Numeric Elevation None None None 1 Numeric xi M Source Data Preview x Nj lay2 lay3 lay4 WellName Kx ft day Initial Heads amp 574366 6799 4862849 399 21 11 7 2 1 20 3 16 574366 6799 4862900 19 1 12 1 8 1 1 2 18 1 14 1 574366 6799 4863050 21 2 11 2 7 2 1 3 20 3 16 2 574366 6799 4863349 399 20 3 13 3 7 3 1 4 19 5 15 3 574520 4863349 399 18 1 12 1 8 1 0 1 5 18 3 13 1 574666 4862849 399 20 3 9 11 1 3 6 19 5 15 3 574666 4863000 18 1 9 5 10 5 21 7 18 3 13 1 a i aa lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Hep _ Data Mapping The first column in the Data Mapping table named Target_Fields contains the required target fields for the data object The second column named
63. InitialHeads i 3 C Boundary Conditions PoE Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads i C Constant Head 1 ioi LD Rivers O River 0 River 1 Data Objects All of the data that you interact with in VMOD Flex are referred to as data objects These can consist of e Raw Data that you have e Imported From polyline or polygon shapefiles wells from a spreadsheet surfaces from Surfer GRD etc e Created Through digitizing points polygon or polylines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview 9 e Conceptual Data Objects These are generated as you progress through the conceptual modeling workflow and include e Horizons Structural Zones Property Zones and Boundary Conditions e Numerical Model Data Objects These are generated as you progress through a numerical modeling workflow and include e Input Numerical Grid Properties Conductivity Initial Heads etc Boundary Conditions a group of river cells drain cells pumping well cells etc Observation Wells Zone Budget zones and Particles e Output Calculated Heads Drawdown Pathlines etc Each data object will have a check box beside it allowing it to be displayed in different 2D 3D viewers Each data object also has Settings which can be accessed by right clicking on the data object in the tree and selecting Settings The settings provide access to general properties statis
64. M r Hydraulic conductivity in X direction Value 0 0004 4 EE Export ResetOrder Cleanup Advanced gt gt ok Cancel Z Row I Column 3 Layer K 2 List all assigned conductivities by the user E E OE OA GeO POGO GA 4 54PM Figure 7 Property Zone Database in VMOD Classic 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW D SampleProject cm sample project data MODFLOW NumericalGrid1 Run MODFLOW 2005 sampleproject vmf Var001 Jee File Grid Wells Properties Boundaries Particles ZBud Tools Help X 4588 2 Y 644 8 Z 318 1 Row D 77 Column J 29 Layer K 1 Constant head edit module IDG i cos Bs EM Gm A T ar ae my RA me wu ey Ga PWG Ses 453M Figure 8 Boundary Conditions in VMOD Classic Add Transport Inputs or Pathlines Use Visual MODFLOW Classic to add inputs for Transport or Particles for Pathlines then translate and run the model For more information on these options refer to the Visual MODFLOW Demo Tutorial or the help documentation Tutorials http trials swstechnology com pdfs Visual MODFLOW tutorials html Web help http www swstechnology com help vmod View Results After running the model in VMOD Classic with MT3DMS or MODPATH the results will appear something similar to below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Servi
65. MODEL Period 1 Step 1 Convergence Residual 8 2018813E 03 Max Change 4 0346560E 05 Run end date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 Elapsed run time 0 120 Seconds Normal termination of simulation Time O 0 1 sec Time 1 0 1sec WallTime 0 2 Total CPU_time 0 1sec OpenMP parallelized using 2CPU will see the Engine progress in the scrolling window button on the main workflow toolbar to start running the engines You e Note that after a successful run the Heads and Pathlines items will be added the tree in the model explorer e Once finished Click the gt Next step button to proceed View Results e You can then choose to view results in the form of Maps Contours and Color shading or Charts 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 68 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex demo DRUMCO grid Run af File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x PETAI j E E Define Modeling Objectives EE Define Numerical Model View Results E Create Grd EJ Import Model drumco Blevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid B dumco Elevation 6 E Define Properties l VMod Imported Wells E Define Boundary Conditions S E Select the Next Step B Define Observation Zones I Define Observat
66. MODFLOW engines and analyzing the results The following sections are covered 1 Define Modeling Objectives b48 2 Define Edit Gridkso through importing or creating OOF 7 Define Modeling Objectives 3 View Edit Properties bse vertical E4 Define Numerical Model layering and resulting vol W Create Grid ayering and resulting volume models T iro i j i View Edit Grid 4 View Edit Boundary Conditions 370 oy ide k constant heads drains pumping Define Boundary Conditions wells recharge etc Select the Next Step Define Observation Zones E Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones 5 Define Observation Wells bs2 6 Define Zone Budget Zones ss3 W Define Particles Select Run Type 7 Define Particles ke3 W PEST Run J 8 Translationhk27 Translate l 9 Run Numerical Engines k27 IO ras Re 10 View Results 429 View May e Contours and Color Floods 430 e Charts kas 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 346 VMOD Flex Help 10 1 Define Objectives The first step in defining your numerical model is to Define the Modeling Objectives This entails selecting the desired flow and transport simulation options Visual MODFLOW Flex currently supports e Saturated groundwater flow with MODFLOW 2000 2005 or LGR e Multi species non reactive transport with MT3DMS VMOD Flex supports the following flow engines e MODFLOW 2000 e MODFLOW 2005 e MODFLOW LGR
67. Map_to allows you to match the fields in the source data to each required target field If the column labels in the source data are identical to the labels of the target fields VMOD Flex will automatically map the columns for you However if the labels differ you must map the columns manually To map a source field to a target field select the corresponding source field from the drop list box in the Map_to column The drop down list displays the column headers in the data source file iix mM Data Mapping Target_ fields Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type x Length Numeric Y ooo po CE re z Numeric Numeric 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 164 VMOD Flex Help For example in the figure above the elevation field in the source data is labeled Z To map this field to the target field Elevation select Z from the adjacent drop down list Source fields that are not required can be mapped by creating a new attribute To create a new attribute click the Add a new attribute button A new row will be added to the Data Mapping table RE Data Import 0 x mD ata Mapping Target_ fields Unit category Length x zZ m Elevation Length gt Create a new attribute None vy None Y Unit Multiplier Data type Numeric Numeric Numeric ill Numeric EIEN
68. Modeling Workflow 379 Edit Boundary Condition Attributes Parameter Unit Transient Method Value i 3 F Constant xi 400 x Conc001 mg L J Constant BE OK Cancel Help Note if you make edits to the well pumping rates in this screen these changes are not propagated back to the raw original wells data object in the Data Explorer This means that if you re run a Conceptual to Numerical Model conversion the original well rates will be used for anew numerical model and not the values you define here Display By default VMOD Flex uses the following color scheme for Boundary Condition Cells ConstantHead Red Wall Horizontal Flow Olive Barrier Light red Recharge and Evapotranspiration Recharge and Evapotranspiration have additional settings for rendering the cells by either ZonelD or Rate either Recharge or Evapotranspiration To access these settings right click on the Recharge or Evapotranspiration node in the model tree and select Settings The following dialog will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 380 VMOD Flex Help Settings Lo General E Style Recharge General i Time Color Classification E Use Project Color Palette Show Project Palette Type Classes Stretched Number of Classes 8 E Classified L Equal Intervals Color Value Label BET 175 WE 255 146 0 160 714285714286 py
69. Project Color Palette Show Project Palette Type Classes Stretched Number of Classes 7 2 Classified I Equal Intervals Color Value Label 125500 367 65562649291 250 165 1 342 205211039316 i 190 255 7 322 754795585723 E 91 255 49 303 304380132129 E 64 255 167 283 853964678535 WE 24 166 240 264 403549224942 Wm 5 255 244 953133771248 Min 244 9531 App OK cance Hep e Select the desired attribute from the Attribute combo box You will notice that the min and max values are displayed to the right of the combo box Some data objects will have attributes while others will not The following table lists which data object types 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 238 VMOD Flex Help can have attributes available for color rendering Data Object Points Polygons Polylines Surfaces 3D Gridded Data Conductivity Storativity Initial Heads Recharge Evapotranspiration Heads Drawdown Available Attributes Only if attributes were created during import Z Z and other attributes that were added during import ZonelD Kx Ky Kz ZonelD Ss Sy Tp total porosity Ep effective porosity ZonelD Initial Heads ZonelD Recharge Rate ZonelD Evapotranspiration Rate Extinction Depth Head Drawdown e Select the Color Classification by default the colors will be calculated from the min and max values for the current data
70. Run W 3p Single Run EJ Translate E E Run Numerical Engines Toolbox EJ MODFLOW 2005 Legend ZONEBUDGET Color Heads m EJ MODPATH I View Results aula View Charts 62 4142 J View Maps 63 8974 Model Explorer 65 3806 naa 66 8638 E inputs 2 D Properties 68 3469 Flow 69 8301 Conductivity Storage InitialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 gt River 1 lumping Wells Pumping Wells Bc Zone Budget Particles Forward Particles a Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells S E Outputs M Heads Drawdown Layer 1 Row 40 Column 78 X 1618 38 Y 489 18 Heads 1 00000001504747E 30 You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier If your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time lwa aal 1226 2012 3 23 Pm z im If you ran MODPATH you will see Pathlines appear as a new node in the tree under Output circled below add a check box beside the Pathlines to display
71. Runt E Inputs Properties we C Fow ol A T amp 2 Es E Z Boundary Condtions B C Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Child grid1 few Po Constant Head west 9 2 Converting to FEFLOW Quick Overview Instructions Create a FEFLOW FEM file by populating the selected mesh with data from the conceptual model Pre requisites Finite Element Meshb2 has been created 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help Result AFEFLOW FEM file ASCIl is generated Next Steps Open this project file in FEFLOW v 5 4 or later Once you have the conceptual model designed and at least one finite element mesh you are ready to populate this mesh with the conceptual data Proceed to the Translate to Finite Element Model step in the Conceptual Model workflow this is shown in the display below ip Data Oe m O O F Erd jaa E dine Moding Onecives OO baramy Se Cotect Date Obects D comes rani GB Oene Conceptus Modei OG ukes E Odine Model Suce EO generat hens E Oeine Property Zones E Select the Nac Step E Seea Gui Twe E ven Frte Deret Mes Translat to Finne Element Model Mode Engien SA Conceptus Model 1 O Model Boundary D Srctue O Hentors apa O Hoang O Hanson Ovo C FrteBenertitesh S Conceptual Model Nume caiGridl Run Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layert Runl Deformed Grid 100 100 Run LGR Child Grid Around Wellfield Ru
72. TU oC wm Ke 2 mA 1 h se m cH o o a Kx 4 30 j a 300 4 e Click Next Step to proceed to the Define Pilot Points step Define Pilot Points e The next step is to Define Pilot points as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 18 VMOD Flex Help Ea Apply Define Pilot Points Select existing well point data object Pilot points Parameter zones i eee Name Used Parameter Zone Parameter zone selection Kx_Zone1 z __ Omt E Pilot points are XY points with an initial value for each parameter Pilot points can be imported hs from TXT file XLS SHP file or assigned manuallyko4 by digitizing in the 2D environment An example of the pilot points on top of conductivity zones is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 139 Layer View The general steps are as follows e Select pilot points zone 1 data object from the Data Explorer tree e Click Insert button at the top of the Define Pilot Points window to add these points e Select which parameter zones the points represent under the Parameter Zones grid in the upper right section of the window for this set Kx Zone1 is fine this should be selected by default e You display should now appear as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services uo VMOD Flex Help O OE om Define Observations
73. Tab in the Modeling Objectives If no sorption or reactions are selected in the current Transport Variant then no sorption or reaction parameters are required for the simulation and there will not be an option for Species Parameters at the Define Properties step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 370 VMOD Flex Help The parameters are described as follows Kd is expressed in units of 1 mass volume and is derived as follows mass gt solidphase mass L Ka solidphase _ _ _ ayucousphase f mass mass rolum e volume First order reaction coefficients can be derived from a Half Life value as follows Ci Cie Where e Ct is the concentration at time t in units of mass volume e CO is the initial concentration in units of mass volume e kis the first order decay rate in units of 1 time e tis the time t For a Half life calculation the equation can be rewritten as follows k 1n0 5 t e kis the first order decay rate in units of 1 time e t1 2 is the Half Life value 10 5 Define Boundary Conditions At the Define Boundary Conditions step you can view the various boundary condition cells and edit the numerical attributes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 371 Inspect Define Boundary Conditions Views Ke PROe v Layer 1 Row i S Column 1 5 3D Toolbox pee Edit x Assign Z Layer 1 Row 21 C
74. User s manual A three dimensional fully integrated finite difference code for simulating Fluid flow and Transport of contaminant in saturated unsaturated porous media Herndon VA 20170 USA 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services References 503 Doherty J 1998 Visual PEST Graphical Model Independent Parameter Estimation Watermark Computing and Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Kladias M P and Ruskauff G J 1997 Implementing Spatially Variable Anisotropy in MODFLOW Ground Water v35 no 2 p 368 370 Koch K 1988 Parameter Estimation and Hypothesis Testing in Linear Models Springer Verlag Berlin 377 pp Levenberg K 1944 A method for the solution of certain non linear problems in least squares Q Appl Math v2 164 168 pp MacDonald M G and Harbaugh A W 1988 MODFLOW A Modular three dimensional finite difference groundwater flow model U S Geological Survey Techniques of Water Resources Investigations Book 6 Chapter A1 586 pp MacDonald M G and A W Harbaugh 1996 User s Documentation MODFLOW 96 An update to the USGS Modular three dimensional finite difference groundwater flow model U S Geological Survey Open File Report 96 485 Marquardt D W 1963 An algorithm for least squares estimation of nonlinear parameters Journal of the Society of Industrial and Applied Mathematics v11 no 2 431 441 pp Mehl S W and Hill M C 2001 MODFLOW 2000 The U S Geological Survey M
75. Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wireframe crumco Elevation 6 E Define Properties 1 8 7 _ ___ ee A VMod imported Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions Layer View _3D View EJ Select the Next Step Row Define Observation Zones 50 fe IE Define Observation Wells gt Define Zone Budget Zones Column E Define Particles 1S 5 Select Run Type a He PEST Run 7 3D E Single Run EJ Translate Run Numerical Engines Toolbox E MODFLOW 2005 Legend EJ ZONEBUDGET Color Heads m EJ MODPATH Ts EJ View Results ae View Charts 62 4142 J View Maps 63 8974 Mode Explorer ie ris aS oaa 66 8638 S Inputs 5 C Properties 68 469 Flow 69 8301 Conduetivity Storage Initial Heads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 gt River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Bc Zone Budget Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells S E Outputs M Heads Drawdown E Layer 1 Row 40 Column 78 X 1618 38 Y 489 18 Heads 1 00000001504747E 30 1 e You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier refer to View Edit Grid s91 section e If your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time
76. Weight L133 pilot points zone3 gt Heads Observation Wells 1 iC pilot points zone4 Observation Points Use Name Group Type Layer Weight gt BHI Observation Wells Heads 1 1 E BH10 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 T BHI Observation Wells Heads 1 1 f T A F BH12 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 AEREE a BHI3 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 r F BH14 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 he carias m BHI5 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 E2 grid EJ BH16 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 i 7 BH17 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 ale an E BH18 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 i Flow F BH19 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 i ca selena El BH2 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 ikai E BH20 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 amp Satay Conditions E BH21 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 i panei a E BH3 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 i LC Constant Head 0 Eal BH4 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 ance 3 7 BH5 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 i Zone Budget Vv BHG Observation Wells Heads 1 1 C Zone Budget w BH7 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 TPA ii z BHR Observation Wels Heads 1 1 lms E BH9 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 a Observations i Parameters f Pilot Points i Zones 6 Mitru te hej pan m b B t _ SAMPLE2 grid Run PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run The observation values are assigned a default weight of 1 0 which means the residual will not be modified We want PEST to e give more weight to measurements that you can trust e give greater priority to measurement
77. a zonation scheme than to ignore geological heterogeneity altogether e Piecewise constancy as a method of characterizing geological heterogeneity lacks the flexibility required to explore the effects of small scale geological variability on model predictive uncertainty To overcome these problems the distribution of transmissivity within the model domain will be described by a set of pilot points Anumber of these pilot points will be introduced to the model domain and PEST will be asked to estimate the transmissivity of the aquifer at each such point These point transmissivities will then be spatially interpolated to all of the active cells within the model domain using Kriging Hence in estimating transmissivity values at pilot points PEST will effectively be assigning parameter values to the whole of the model domain Individual pilot points can be assigned to different zones within the model domain Only those points assigned to a particular zone can be used in calculating transmissivity values throughout that zone using the Kriging interpolation procedure Furthermore the variogram upon which Kriging is based can be different in each zone reflecting differences in the geology or in the level of heterogeneity expected within each geological unit Note that if only one pilot point is assigned to a particular zone then that zone is characterised as being 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 4
78. active wet layer in the model The Evapotranspiration settings are shown in the following Evapotranspiration Options window and these are described below e Evapotranspiration is only applied to the top grid layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the Evapotranspiration values assigned to these grid cells will NOT be carried down to the underlying active wet grid cells In this case the inactive or dry cells act like an impermeable barrier to the Evapotranspiration e Evapotranspiration is applied to the specified layer It allows the user to assign the Evapotranspiration values to any of the specified model layers Evapotranspiration is applied to the uppermost active layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the evapotranspiration values assigned to these grid cells will be carried down to the upper most active wet grid cell in the same vertical column of grid cells 10 10 1 6 Lakes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help Translate E General 4 General Settings Solution for lake stages THETA 1 6 MODFLOW 2005 Maximum number of iterations for steady state solution MSSITR 25 Settings Convergence criterion for equilibrium lake stage SSCNCR 0 01 Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads 4 Anisotropy Output Control 5 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Solut
79. are now finished setting up the flow and transport objectives Click Next Step to proceed The following Define Grid step will appear at this step you can import Visual MODFLOW Classic or MODFLOW data sets or define a new empty grid Click on Create Grid to proceed Numerical Model x O Ol W Define Numencal Model Dee Cod me Numenc I Create Grid E Import Model Import Model Create Grid z 005 Sage ka a Creating Grid At this step you can specify the dimensions of the Model Domain and define the number of rows columns and layers for the finite difference grid Type the following into the Grid Size section Columns 40 Rows 40 For Grid Extents enter 2000 for Xmax and 2000 for Ymax Under Define Vertical Grid enter 3 for Number of Layers Define Layer Elevations In Visual MODFLOW Flex you can define the elevations of the tops and bottom of the model layers Or you can have varying layer elevations defined from Surface data objects Surfaces could be from data objects you imported from Surfer GRD ESRI ASI DEM or from Surfaces you have created through interpolating XYZ points In this exercise you will import 4 surfaces from Surfer GRD files then use these to define the layer elevations File Import from the main menu The following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberg
80. arrow key or you can scroll through the options by clicking the spin buttons on the left as shown in the following figure The Layer type column displays the Layer Type associated with each layer of the model The available layer types can be chosen from a picklist by clicking the down arrow on the right or you can scroll through the options by clicking the spin buttons on the left 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 407 10 10 1 8 Cell Rewetting Translate General 4 Wetting General Settings Cell wetting IWDFLG Inactive MODFLOW 2005 Wetting method WETDRY flag From below WETDRY lt 0 Settings Wetting threshold WETDRY value 0 1 Time Steps iteration interval for attempting to wet cells IWETIT 1 Solvers Wetting head IHDWET Calculated from neighbours IHDWET 0 Recharge and EVT Wetting factor WETFCT 1 Lake Head value in dry cells 1e30 Layers Keep min saturated thickness for bottom layer False Rewetting Min Saturated thickness for bottom layer 0 Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control 5 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Cell wetting IWDFLG Activate cell wetting The original USGS MODFLOW did not allow cells in unconfined layers to become re saturated if the head dropped below the bottom elevation of the grid cell during the course of the simulation or during the solution iterations Instead these cells were simply made inactive for the remainder of t
81. because additional RAM is relatively inexpensive and because accurate and efficient matrix solvers are now widely available The disadvantage of the method is that it is now possible to create transport models that require much more storage than the corresponding MODFLOW model Although implicit in time weighting is unconditionally stable its accuracy is not assured if the time steps are too large In order to guarantee the accuracy the maximum Courant number may be limited to 1 0 As a simulation proceeds and the concentration gradients diminish this requirement may be relaxed Time weighting options with the particular MT3D solution methods 1 When the pure finite difference methods are used FD all terms in the governing equation may be represented with either explicit or implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations 2 When the particle based methods MOC MMOC and HMOC and the TVD method are used to simulate solute transport the terms on the right hand side the dispersion reactions and source sink mixing may be represented with either explicit or implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations A potential source of confusion to MT3D users is the apparent absence of a switch for specifying explicit or implicit time weighting It turns out that this switch is implied When the user specifies that the GCG Solver Package is to be included in a simulation the user is telling MT3D to do the following
82. can save the adjusted Kx parameter zonation as inputs for a new model this is explained in the next section e Click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 153 Save PEST Parameters as New Inputs After reviewing the PEST output if the adjusted parameter values seem reasonable you can save these parameters as inputs for a new model run 0 OF BJ Define Observations Update Model Inputs B Define Property Parameters BJ Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms E B Select Run Type IE Sensitivity Analysis B E PEST Select Regularization BE SVD Assist ii Tikhonov Regularisation BJ No Regularization BI Parameter Estimation BJ Analyze Results Wi Update Model Inputs Update model with PEST results e Click on the Update Model with PEST Results button VMOD Flex will save the adjusted model parameters in a new model run within the same project This new model run will appear in the Model Explorer below the most recent model run Anew workflow window will also appear with this model run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help File Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutor SAMPLE2 grid Run1 Tools Window Workflow Help D G Hla 3 O E IO Data be QB sample2 Elevation sample Elevation VMod Imported Well Imported Observation e pilotpoints zone1 p gt pilot points zone2 2 pi
83. conceptual model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 287 Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual li T uF Fie Tools Window Help Workflow z EREA IE R a amp Data j ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives Next State tayer2top E Collect Data Objects E layer2bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model CH D Time d Rate m3 d OO boundary EJ Define Model Structure E chdeast EJ Define Property Zones DR o 150 e 7 chd west E Select the Next Step 30 175 bon GS rivers EHF Define Boundary Conditions 60 200 E Define Surface Water Ne 90 150 E E Define Pumping Wells RC 120 200 E Define Boundary Conditic pred P elect Grid Type s i Define Boundary Conditions Define Pumping Wells 000 Model Explorer i Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary B E Structure 5 C Horizons Horizont Horizon2 i Horizon3 l C Zones V Zonet M Zone2 E Properties Conductivity Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 B E Simulation Domain 2 C Model Domain CH Boundary Conditions Quick Overview Instructions Define hydrological boundaries sources sinks for the model Pre requisites Structural Zonesk70 have been created Property Zonesk7 l have been creat
84. consist of heads concentrations and groundwater flux support for transport MT3D will be added in future releases Acknowledgements Excerpts from the following publications are used throughout this documentation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 447 e Using Pilot Points to Calibrate a MODFLOW MT3D Model by John Doherty Watermark Numerical Computing e PEST Model Independent Parameter Estimation User Manual 5th Edition e Addendum to the PEST Manual June 2012 e www PESTHomepage org Suggested References Several USGS publications are also available on PEST See Approaches to Highly Parameterized Inversion a Guide to Using PEST for Groundwater Model Calibration http pubs usgs gov sir 2010 5169 Approaches to Highly Parameterized Inversion a Guide to Using PEST for Model Parameter and Predictive Uncertainty Analysis http pubs usgs govw sir 2010 521 1 Approaches to Highly Parameterized Inversion Pilot Point Theory Guidelines and Research Directions http pubs usgs gov sir 2010 5168 Loading the PEST Workflow The PEST workflow can be launched from the Select Run Type step in a numerical workflow as shown below simply click on the PEST button in the main window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 448 VMOD Flex Help O l E EJ Define Modeling Objectives View Edit Grid Select Run Type EJ Define Properties EJ Define Boundary Co
85. created Adding a Data Source e From the Data Explorer select the desired Point data object from which the surface will be interpolated e Click the Add button to add the point data object to the Data Source frame e VMOD Flex allows you to create a single surface from multiple point data objects Repeat the steps above to add additional points data objects to the Data Source frame e For each data source select the Z Value from the combo box shown below The Z 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data value can be any numeric attribute stored in the points data source e g Elevation Conductivity etc General Settings Interpolation Settings Surface Name Sutaced Description D points Elevation X Y Elevation Next click the Interpolation Settings tab to define the interpolation settings for the surface These settings are described in the following section Interpolation Settings 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 202 VMOD Flex Help x General Settings Interpolation Settings Interpolation Method Natural Neighbor General Bilinear Min Value Inverse Distance Max Value kriging Interpolate Log Values Natural Neighbor El Grid Settings intervals Y intervals E Interpolation Domain x Max Y Max x Min Y Min E Advanced Settings Mag x Mag Mag Z Interpolation Method The interpolation method is used to interpolat
86. data object in the Define Volume frame Assigning Property Parameters Once the geometry has been defined you can assign parameter values to the property zone e Select the group of parameters that will be defined e g conductivity storage or initial heads The data input grid below will display the appropriate parameters based on 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 234 VMOD Flex Help which parameter group is selected For example if conductivity is selected the data input grid will show the parameters Kx Ky and Kz The data input grid will already be populated with the default values specified in the Project Settings File gt Project Settings e VMOD Flex provides various methods for assigning parameter attributes The available methods include Constant Value Use Surface Use 3D Gridded Data and Use Shapefile available only when property zone is defined using polygon data object The type of method used can be specified per parameter For each parameter in the data input grid there is a combo box in the Method row shown below Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping Each method is described in the following sections Constant Value The Constant Value method is selected by default for each parameter in the data input grid and allows you to specify a spatially constant value for the parameter If you do not
87. file e Go to the Run PEST step and Run PEST If you change the pilot point values or add new pilot points e Make the changes at this step in the workflow e Click Apply button e Go to Define Kriging Variograms and click Apply to re generate these values e Go to the Run PEST step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 478 12 VMOD Flex Help Working with Multiple Model Scenarios One of the unique features of VMOD Flex is the ability to work with multiple numerical models inside a single project Unlike other modeling GUI s VMOD Flex does not restrict you to a single model scenario or single grid for your model With the workflow based approach you can generate multiple grid realizations from your conceptual model each one with one or more model runs Likewise you can import multiple MODFLOW models or Visual MODFLOW projects into a single project and analyze and compare these projects Loading a New Workflow There are a number of ways in which a new numerical model workflow window will be created e You have Imported a MODFLOW or Visual MODFLOW projectlss1 immediately after creating a new project e You have imported an additional MODFLOW or Visual MODFLOW model into an existing project To use this option select the Workflow Numerical Model menu option e You have Duplicated or Cloned an existing numerical model through the Clone option To use this option right click on the Run node on the model tree and
88. foo degree Import the true grid dimensions High quality slower performance C Import a reduced grid size Lower quality higher performance The true grid data can be retrieved from the data object after import Import every fi th node lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When this option is selected the Grid Origin frame will display If the gridded data is in model coordinates specify the Grid Origin and the degree of Rotation If the grid is in world coordinates you may leave the grid origin as is For both file types you can specify the grid resolution To import the full grid dimensions select Import the true grid dimensions option Please note that depending on the performance capabilities of your computer 3D Gridded data containing large volumes of data may take a significant time to import To improve importing and viewing performance select the Import a reduced grid size option and specify a value in the Import every nth node box For example if a value of 2 is defined then VMOD Flex will only display every other node in the 3D grid Next select the appropriate Data Category Unit and Data Type for each of the mapped attributes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help Data Import The final dialog in the import process for 3D Gridded shows the grid dimensions of the source data 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 183
89. from points to new nodes 45 Gradation steep J smooth Polygons Refinement Mesh triangles 4095 A Mesh edges 6183 Mesh exterior boundary edges 81 Mesh interior boundary edges 357 Mesh subsegments constrained edges 438 Triangle Copyright c by J R Shewchuk v 1 6 2005 Generate 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 332 VMOD Flex Help Defining Slice Elevations The third step in the finite element mesh creation involves defining slice elevations Various settings are available for defining the slice elevations in the third dialog of the finite element mesh creation wizard Shown below x e Define Finite Element Mesh Define Slice Hevations Mesh Type Deformed eds Number of Layers Zmin 1 41 527 Min Layer Thickness Zmax 0 1 365 988 Description In a deformed grid mesh the tops and bottoms of the model layers follow the horizons elevations You can refine the model layers by dividing the zones into proportionately thick layers Layer Refinement el ft fd fod ae ee Exaggerste 39 a The options available for defining slice elevations are similar to those for defining slice elevations for finite difference grids For information on these settings e g grid types min layer thickness and layer refinement please refer to Defining the Vertical Gridjs17I Once the vertical mesh settings have been defined click th
90. from the model tree e Click on gt button to insert the zone in the Structural Zones field as shown below e Type the desired values for property zone2 Kx 7E 5 Ky 7E 5 Kz 7E 6 e Click on the Save button located on the right side of the window Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones j Property Zone 1 Use Structural Zone s Prover e ee 2a Use Polygon Data Object Shialar Name Property Zone 2 Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz x Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping gt m s Constant PA 7E 15 PA Ky m s Constant EA 7E 05 Z Kz m s Constant iy 7E 06 EA e Property zones can also be defined using polygon shapes the values can also be defined from shapefile attributes or 2D Surface distributed values For more details please see Defining Property Zones bza 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 31 e Click gt Next Step to proceed to the Selection screen e In this screen you can choose to proceed to Defining Boundary Conditions or proceed to Defining a grid or mesh e Click the Define Boundary Conditions button to proceed D Orne Boundey Condeors 00050 2 Model Exelerer ap Conceptus Modei 1 e In this window you can choose the type of Boundary Conditions Standard MODFLOW B
91. has completed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 55 e In addition this new model run will appear in the model tree The model run has a grid and corresponding inputs this can also be seen in the figure above e When the conversion is complete click Next Step to proceed to the Properties step e Now as explained previously you can review the properties and boundary conditions and translate and run this model e Once the heads are generated you can compare this to the results from previous grids 3 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW Models The following example is a quick walk through of the basics of importing an existing Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW data set Objectives e Learn how to create a project and import an existing numerical model e Become familiar with navigating the GUI and steps for numerical modeling e Learn how to view and edit properties and boundary conditions in a variety of views e Translate the model inputs into MODFLOW packages and run the MODFLOW engines e Understand the results by interpreting heads and drawdown in several views e Check the quality of the model by comparing observed heads to calculated heads Required Files e This tutorial is designed to allow you to select your own Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project and follow through the steps If you wish to use the model that is shown in the following example it can be downloaded from our website below http trials sw
92. heads only with Id x y Bevation and depth Well heads with the following data Screens ID locations V Pumping schedule Observation points Well tops L lt lt Back Net gt gt Cancel Help e Next gt gt e Next gt gt to accept the default Coordinate System 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials w The following Data Mapping window will then appear Data Import ae oos Gahi Wall heads Screens Pump Schedule Target_fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type Well Id Well Id None None 1 Text x X Length m 1 Numeric Y Y Length m 1 Numeric Elevation Elevation Length m 1 Numeric p Well bottom Well bottom Length m 1 Numeric j x Source Data Preview Well Id xX N Elevation Well bottom Screen Id Screen top Z Screen bottomZ lt Supply Well 1 1415 535 185 0 1 5 3 Supply Well 2 1463 509 18 4 o 1 5 z Wie HE H e ie Cr Te In this screen you need to map the fields from the spreadsheet to required fields in the Wells Import utility If you prepare your Excel file with the exact filenames that are required by VMOD Flex then no mapping is required and this can save you time For this exercise the source Excel file has the map names pre defined Take a moment to review the required fields for the Wells import e Well heads Well ID XY Coordinates E
93. in VMOD Flex then add the boundary conditions in VMOD Classic Generate MODFLOW Grids Once the conceptual model is designed you must generate one or more MODFLOW grids This process is described in Conceptual Modeling Tutorial and further explained in the help section Creating MODFLOW Grids R VMOD Flex allows you to generate various numerical representations of your conceptual model this means you can experiment with various grid sizes horizontal and vertical discretizations etc This includes grids with Local Grid Refinement LGR 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 486 VMOD Flex Help After a grid is generated you may see something similar to the image shown below in a 2D plan view 15000 000 10000 15000 x Figure 3 Numerical Grid with Conceptual Boundary Condition Objects Convert Conceptual Model to Numerical Model After the grid is designed you must populate the numerical model Run the Conceptual to Numerical Conversion wizard as shown below OOF Define Modeling Objectives EJ Collect Data Objects Select Grid Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid x Define Model Structure Define Property Zones W E Select the Next Step Select Grid Type IB View Finite Element Mesh View Finite Difference Grid Translate to FEFLOW Mode E Convert to MODFLOW Model Convert To Numerical This will generate a numer
94. ina point data object The point data object can be one that has been imported using the import utility or one that has been generated from other data objects e g cross sections and wells For more information on creating points data objects from well data and cross sections please see Creating Points from Model Layer cross sections zsil and Converting well tops to points dataksal This chapter presents information on the following topics Creating a New Surface General Settings Interpolation Settings Creating a Surface To create a new surface follow the steps below e From the Data Explorer right click anywhere and select Create Surface from the pop up menu 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 199 Settings view Spreadsheet Export Delete Import Data Create Surface Create New Data Object New Folder 2D Viewer 3D Viewer e The Create Surface dialog will display Specify the general settings described in the following section 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 200 VMOD Flex Help General Settings Interpolation Settings Surface Name Surface Description OK Cancel Help Enter a unique name for the surface in the Surface Name field and a description of the surface optional in the Description text box The Data Source frame allows you to select the point data object s from which the surface will be
95. measured depth in the Depth field e Enter the name of the formation e g Clay Sand etc in the Formation field Horizontal Wells The Horizontal Well tab is used to store information on deviated horizontal wells and contains many of the features available in the Vertical Well tab e g add modify screens pumping schedule observation points etc Please refer to the previous section for a description of these common features The primary difference of the horizontal well tab is the ability to view and modify the deviated Well Paths 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 26 VMOD Flex Help HE Tableview Vertical Horizontal Find Well Heads PERTE Name x Y Zmax 535800 4814059 41989487 324 Zmin 220 3 535401 4814229 69989488 324 220 Elevation Elevation Total Vertical Depth TVD 595720 4814200 220 535670 4814250 220 535570 4814350 Well Path Table Data To Display Active Welk 2 Divers Well tops Screens Screen location should be entered as a measured depth along the well path starting from the well head Start m End m 50 Pumping Schedule pr Start End Ratel The Well Path table is used to view add and modify the well paths for horizontal wells When a well is selected from the Well Heads table its corresponding well path geometry data is displayed in the Well Path table Horizontal well paths consi
96. need to map the fields from the spreadsheet to required fields in the Wells Import utility To save time you can prepare your Excel file with the exact filenames that are required by VMOD Flex and then no mapping is required For this exercise the source Excel file has the map names pre defined Take a moment to review the required fields for the Wells import e Well heads Well ID XY Coordinates Elevation and Bottom e Logger Id Logger Z Head observation date Observed head 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 122 VMOD Flex Help Data import zi Data Mapping E Source Data Preview Well ID x owi 760 1640 Owl e Next gt gt The Data Import preview will appear E Data import Errors and wamings Heads Obs Points E Do not import rows with wamings Mapped Data Preview Heads Obs Points Row Loggerid LoggerZ Chemical Concentration Concentration observation date Wellld Er A 16 5 Conc001 0 01 01 2000 owt 2 A 165 Conc001 80 1231 2001 owl ee HE A 165 Conc001 280 12 31 2003 owl HE A 165 Conco01 750 ls A 165 Ezi E z ae eee e Finish 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 123 The Concentration Observations will now appear as a new data object in the Data t
97. of PEST Check Define Observations gt Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms Select Run Type PEST Select Regularization gt SVD Assist gt Tikhonov Regularsation No Regularization PEST Run Log Before launching the PEST run it is a good idea to run PEST Check This PEST utility will check all the input files to ensure they meet a minimum set of criteria of PEST Check Click on the button on the toolbar If there are errors you will receive a notification if there are just warnings you will not receive a notification Click the Run PEST button to start the pest exe The progress should appear in a DOS window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 473 Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutorial PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run File Tools Window Workflow Help 1 EH o Data gt Ea un PEST Stop f PEST Check Define Observations Define P Parameters ee PEST Run Log Data CE sample2 Bevation D sample2 Elevation J VMod imported Well 4 Imported Observatio 13 pilot points zone1 C pilot points zone2 OF pilot points zone3 OF pilot points zone4 Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms 3 a o m x pi E C Windows system32 cmd exe PEST is running in parameter estimation PEST run record case pest_run lt See file pest_r
98. of your simulation Under Property Settings you can modify the default flow parameters Transport Objectives The transport objectives are defined on the right panel of the Define Modeling Objectives window When you select the Transport Active check box at the top of the screen then the options can be defined as explained and shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 34s VMOD Flex Help USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET MODPATH The available Sorption options for MT3DMS are e No Sorption is simulated e Linear Isotherm equilibrium controlled e Freundlich Isotherm equilibrium controlled e Langmuir Isotherm equilibrium controlled e First order kinetic sorption non equilibrium e First order kinetic dual domain mass transfer without sorption The available Reaction options for MT3DMS are e No kinetic reaction e First order irreversible decay e Zeroth order irreversible decay The selections you make for Sorption and Reaction options will determine what parameters you need to define for your model Default values can be defined in the Species Parameters and Reaction Parameters tab respectively After the model is created you can define additional zonation for Transport Properties at the Define Properties step Detailed 2013 by Schlumberge
99. only and is calculated using 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 312 VMOD Flex Help formula described below e Lakebed Thickness Thickness of the lakebed Seepage layer e Lakebed Conductivity Vertical hydraulic conductivity of the lakebed material e Precipitation Rate per Unit Area The rate of precipitation per unit area at the surface of the lake L T e Evaporation Rate per Unit Area The rate of evaporation per unit area from the surface of the lake L T e Overland Runoff Overland runoff L3 T from an adjacent watershed entering the lake e Artificial Withdrawal The volumetric rate or flux L3 T of water removal from a lake by means other than rainfall evaporation surface outflow or ground water seepage Normally this would be used to specify the rate of artificial withdrawal from a lake for human water use or if negative artificial augmentation of a lake volume for esthetic or recreational purposes The default leakance formula is as follows _ DX x DY x K x UCTOCOND RBTHICK where e COND is the Leakance e K is the Lakebed Kz e UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same L and T units used by COND e RBTHICK is the Lakebed Thickness e DX is the length of each grid cell in the X direction e DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default Leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the River Conductan
100. pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 15 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 16 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 17 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 18 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 19 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 20 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 21 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 22 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 23 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 24 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 25 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 26 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 27 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 28 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 29 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg2 30 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 31 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 32 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 33 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg3 34 log factor 30 1 300 pg3 1 00 01 na4 35 lan factor 301 30 nnd 10001 11 7 2 Tikhonov Regularization When you select Tikhonov Regularization the PEST control file will automatically be generated to support this feature Select the Generate Tikhonov Regularization button to select the type of regularization e Preferred Homogenous Smoothness Prior information equations relate the pilot points to one another Pilot points that are near one another should have close values only enough heterogeneity will be introduced to the system as necessary the level of the heterogeneity being controlled by the pertaining semi variogram e Preferred Value Prior information equations re
101. screen e Click the CutOffs Active check box to enable CutAways e Under the Activity tab specify which slices to make active by clicking the appropriate Active check boxes The YZ slice refers to a vertical plane along the Y and Z axis the XZ slice refer to a vertical plane along the X and Z axis and the YZ slice refers toa horizontal plane along the Y and Z axis e For each active slice select which portion to remove from the viewer for example the portion of the model that is left or right side of the slice before or after the slice or above or under the slice 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 213 e By default the position of each slice is automatically positioned in the middle of the data along its respective axis However you can manually change the position of the slice by entering a new value in the Position field Note The Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Zmin and Zmax fields are read only and cannot be changed e Alternatively you can set the position of a slice by entering a value in the Fraction field For example a fraction value of 0 5 will set the slice position in the middle of the 3D data e Click the OK button to apply the changes to the current 3D Viewer 3D Viewer Performance Preferences For details on adjusting the 3D View performance settings see 3D Viewer Preferences 13 Linking 2D Viewer with Attributes Table The 2D Viewer can be linked with the spreadsheet table
102. see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view vso MOOLOW Fer ipod TT bald File Tools Workflow Window Help U SHa Faa i Numerical grid Run x 20 Viewer 1 x i s Bm 0m aiport ground surfac aiportiayer2top B 85 Define Modeling Objectives a neea T i Define Numerical Model Wew MAPS airport ayer fom S Create Grid a ee n peers 3 E Import Model we Ai 730 a 2 tumping_Wells View Edit Grid Br RAS faiie Bi Deine Properties ial ROLFE Head_Observations EJ Define Boundary Conditions MB Select the Next Step E Row I Define Observation Zones fm EJ Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Column I Define Particles im Select Run Type S PEST Run 3p EJ Single Run EJ Translate EJ Run Numerical Engines Toolbox S E View Results Legend E View Chats Color Heads m 2 J View ea 12 3356 4 T PM 13 2879 Model Explorer a ie 15 1927 low f C Conductivi 16 1451 Storage 17 0974 LD InitialHead Lae ake 18 0498 G Initial Cone 19 0022 f Conc0 iy Species P C Conc0 Bulk Densi i C Longitudini Boundary Conditior 5 Constant Heac iri Constant H Constant H C Constan
103. select Clone When this option is selected the model run tree in the model explorer will be duplicated and a new workflow window will appear e When you are within the Conceptual Model workflow upon running the Conceptual to Numerical Modellss4 conversion Each new workflow will load as a separate window inside the VMODFlex main application window The windows can be accessed from the window toolbar at the top of the screen as highlighted in red below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Multiple Model Scenarios 479 Visual MODFLOW Fiex conceptual mode i cot i Li bala File Tools Workflow Window Help D gH Data Conceptual Modeli gt NumericalGridi Runt gt X LGR Run2 x Coarse Grid Run3 x e o E Data B O boundary ground B E Convert conceptual model to nun pr Dale Ps e a layering a 7 Define Properties Inspect Define Properties layer2 bottom ee in in i 7 p p JE 2 Define Boundary Condtions mamn E ma IG chdeast 2 e e eiar Re PROOF DG river Def im Pumping_Wells 60 Obswells Ps Row FO Se 1 es Column E e g Model Explorer 3 3D E Conceptual Model 1 lt Model Boundary s Toolbox 3 A Structure et 5 C Horizons Conductivity Ho zon1 m Horizon2 e
104. settings Line Style Label Spacing r 100 Line Width Label Margin f 1 U Number of decimals Color 2 Specto MEM Era Label Font _ Apy oki i Cancel Help 9 Preview Display Settings before Committing All of the Settings windows have an Apply button in the lower right corner This means you can Apply the adjusted changes and see the impact in the current 2D or 3D before you close the window This makes it easier to obtain the desired display without having to open and close this window several consecutive times e You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 113 Visual MODFLOW Flex faitport A Oxgg E a bal File Tools Workflow Window Help Lea o Numerical grid Run x 2D Viewer 1 x ae Ja Soe 95 OQ aiport groundsurac PEE aiportiayer2top EJ Define Modeling Objecti jectives z aiportiayer3top m 3 5 Define Numerical Model View Maps airportJayer3 bottom S Ei Create Grid T LO discontinuous aquita 3 l frie as BE a 7300 m 4 Pumping_Wells 3 E Vi ae Layer er ere i ue gt p Exaggeratio
105. splitting methods are used to simulate solute transport the governing equation is split into two parts On the left hand side are the mass accumulation term and the advection term in the fluid mechanics literature the sum of these two is referred to as the total derivative of the concentration with respect to time Dc Dt On the right hand side the dispersion reactions and source sink mixing terms are represented with finite difference approximations The operator splitting techniques implemented in MT3D are the particle based methods MOC MMOC and HMOC and a 3rd order TVD method Treatment of the transport terms with respect to time MT3D offers the user two options for evaluating the terms in the finite difference approximations explicit or implicit in time weighting 1 Explicit in time weighting With explicit in time or forward in time weighting FIT the terms in the finite difference approximations are evaluated at the previous time step This was the only option available in versions of MT3D from v 1 1 to MT3D96 Explicit in time weighting has the advantage of not requiring the assembly storage and solution of a matrix It requires the least amount of RAM of all feasible methods In particular it requires no additional RAM with respect to the corresponding MODFLOW model This was an important requirement for the development of MT3D since the code was developed on a PC for implementation on PCs We now live in a world in which R
106. the USGS finite difference groundwater flow model U S Geological Survey Open File Report 94 464 Pollock David W 1998 MODPATH Documentation of Computer Programs to compute and display pathlines using results from U S Geological Survey modular three dimensional finite difference groundwater flow model U S Geological Survey Open Report 89 381 188 pp Prommer H Barry D A and C Zheng C 2003 PHT3D AMODFLOW MT3DMS based reactive multi component transport model GroundWater 42 2 247 257 Prudic D E 1989 Documentation of a Computer Program to Simulate Stream Aquifer Relations using a Modular Finite Difference Ground Water Flow Model U S Geological Survey Open file report 88 729 113 pp van Genuchten M Th and Wierenga P J 1977 Mass transfer studies in sorbing porous media Il Experimental evaluation with Tritium 3H20 Soil Sci Soc Am J 41 p 272 278 Zheng C 1993 Extension of the Method of Characteristics for Simulation of Solute Transport in Three Dimensions Ground Water vol 31 3 456 465 pp Zheng C and Bennett G D 1995 Applied Contaminant Transport Modeling Theory and Practice Van Nostrand Reinhold New York Zheng C and Wang P 1999 MT3DMS A Modular Three Dimensional Multi species Transport Model for Simulation of Advection Dispersion and Chemical Reactions of Contaminants in Groundwater Systems Documentation and User s Guide U S Army Corps of Engineers U S
107. the elevation of the bottom of the well Zmin is greater than the calculated well head elevation 6 4 Style Settings VMOD Flex provides you with a wide variety of style settings allowing you to modify the appearance of data objects in both 3D and 2D Viewer The style settings can be accessed by 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 235 expanding the Style node in the Settings tree shown below Please note that the Style node will only be available when the particular data object is being shown in 2D or 3D Viewer In general each data object has its own set of style settings although some settings are common between data objects The following sections describe the style settings for the various data objects lolx E General 4 Operations fog Style General Labels M Appearance Colors Color Specified x C Symbol Circle 7 Size 2 fas fti Preview Select the links below to jump to the appropriate sections e Points Polylines Polygons 235 e Cross Sections b43 e Wells bae e Surfaces e49 e 3D Gridded Databs2 6 4 1 Points Polylines and Polygons Points Vertices The style settings for points data objects are described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 236 VMOD Flex Help B Settings Gi Genesl General 4 Operations 3 Style General e Col Show Vertices Labels Appearance Color By Attribute z E Symbol Circ
108. the following assumptions e When the water table is at or above the ground surface top of layer 1 evapotranspiration loss from the water table occurs at the maximum rate specified by the user e When the elevation of the water table is below the extinction depth or is beneath layer 1 evapotranspiration from the water table is negligible Between these limits evapotranspiration from the water table varies linearly with water table elevation Required Data The Evapotranspiration Package requires the following information 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 311 e Evapotranspiration rate The rate of evapotranspiration as it occurs when the water table elevation is equal to the top of the grid cell elevation This value should be entered in the units set for recharge as defined in the Project Settings e Extinction Depth The depth below the top of grid cell elevation where the evapotranspiration rate is negligible The Evapotranspiration Package approach is based on the following assumptions When the water table is at or above the ground surface top of layer 1 evapotranspiration loss from the water table occurs at the maximum rate specified by the user When the elevation of the water table is below the extinction depth or is beneath layer 1 evapotranspiration from the water table is negligible Between these limits evapotranspiration from the water table varies linearly wi
109. the method from the combo box You should then see the button become beside the Value column e From the Data Explorer select the desired surface data object e Click the button to insert this data object into the Object field Once you are finished click OK and the new property zone will be created note when you view the Database values for this new property zone it will show Distributed Values since it contains a range of values for this zone not just a single value Use 3D Gridded Data You may want to define initial concentrations from a UCN file from a previous transport run In order to use this option you must need to import the UCN file to the project as a 3D Gridded Data set Follow these steps in the section Import 3D Gridded Data l78 Once the file is imported you select this object when defining the properties e Use assign polygon or entire layer to select the desired group of cells e Click the New button to create a new zone e Select Use 3D Gridded Data as the method from the combo box e You should then see the l button become activated beside the Value column e From the Data Explorer select the desired 3D Gridded Data which contains the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 363 imported UCN file e Click the gt button to insert this data object into the Object field e By default Concentration should be selected in the Mapping column you m
110. the tree Mi The data object should now appear in the Layer View of the grid 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Zoom into this area using the mouse wheel or the Zoom in button on the toolbar e Click Assign Polygon from the toolbox e Trace a polygon overtop of this discontinuous aquitard shape when you have closed the polygon click the right mouse button e Select Define Attributes from the menu that appears e The New Property Zone dialog will appear e We want to assign these cells to an existing Zone Zone that represents the aquifer above So in this case it is not necessary to create a new parameter zone You will see that Zone is selected by default in the top left of the window e Click OK to assign this group of cells to Zone1 This display should appear as shown File Tools Workflow Window Help D H Data Numerical grid Run x X L jo T OF b airport ground surfac airport tayer2top Bile Define Modeling Objectives pect De j h airport4ayer34op a E Define Numerical Model we EDIE aimportdayer3 bottom S Create Grid MO discontinuous aquita 3 E Import Model a Ee EJ View Edit Grid Layer KP PROOF EJ Define Properties 2 w Define Boundary Conditio S er view Select e F Row Define O 2 1 Define es Column i s oes 1 amp OPE 3D E z 2 Toolbox 5 0 Conductivi
111. the width thickness of the contour lines Label Spacing Set the spacing between the contour line and the label Number of Decimals Set the number of decimals to show in the contour labels 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 252 VMOD Flex Help 6 4 5 Label Font Select this button to specify the font settings for the contour labels Click the Apply button to view the changes in an active 2D or 3D Viewer 3D Gridded Data The following section describes the available style settings for 3D Gridded data objects To access the style settings right click on the surface data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings Cells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 253 Settings Eta General General Style Cells Colors Vettices Show Cells V Use virtual grid Lines Slice Colormap Fill Settings lsolines lsosurfaces Color ByAttribute d Transparency 0 J Show only Active Zone Show Legend The Cells node allows you to specify style settings for the grid cells The following options are available The Show Cell check box allows you to show hide the grid cells in the 3D gridded data object When the check box is selected you can choose how to show the cells in the Color combo box in the Fill Settings fr
112. these wells and the boundary that determines the heads in those wells e Don t leave any large gaps in the final pilot points pattern e If you use preferred value regularization for example if you have used the ADDREG1 utility to add Tikhonov constraints to the PEST input dataset consider using a covariance matrix instead of weights for the prior information equations See the PPCOV utility from the Groundwater Data Utilities suite e If you are absolutely sure that no heterogeneity can arise over a distance of less than x then don t place any pilot points closer together than a distance of x 11 4 Define Kriging Variograms Once the pilot points are generated the next step is to specify the Kriging settings that will be used to interpolate the pilot point data during PEST calibrations for these zones Principally this involves definition of the appropriate variogram Variograms are also used by PEST in the calculation of regularization weights and so are an important part of the process 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ase VMOD Flex Help Ba D Apply Define Observations Define Kriging Vairograms Define Property Parameters z E Define Pilot Points Angee Variograms ans ogo vo Zone1 Type i E pr Zone2 3 i Da ya Zone3 Exponential eo PE na EST PE Zone4 a Variograms Bearing a 0 y N Variogramkx2 gt Seeks Variogramkx3 Aha es Variogramkx4 it Dodata Madd
113. these in the active 2D 3D Viewers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 432 VMOD Flex Help If you ran MT3DMS you will also see output nodes for Concentration one for each species Only one 3D Gridded results can be shown in a 2D viewer at a given time so in order to view Concentrations you need to first turn off Heads or Drawdown from the model tree Note the 3D viewer supports displaying multiple 3D Gridded results simultaneously just create a new 3D viewer Window 3D Window from the main menu bar Adjusting Style Settings The style settings of either the 2D or 3D views can be adjusted note each one must be defined independently First make the desired property group selected and visible in the Flex Viewer Next make the desired 2D viewer active Then right click on the desired property group in the tree as shown below and select Settings 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow s B C Inputs CompositeView Time Series Compare Export 3D Viewer Expand to selection 4 Expand all child nodes Collapse all The 2D Colors and Contour line settings can be adjusted For more details see Color and Contour settings b43 Export Heads Drawdown or Concentrations The calculated heads or drawdown can be exported to shapefile see Exporth4i for more details 10 12 2 Charts In VMOD Flex you can view time series and calibr
114. these steps are described in the following sections 11 1 Define Observations When PEST is used to assist in the calibration of a model it is asked to minimize an objective function represented by the symbol This is comprised of the sum of the weighted squared deviations between the calculated and observed system responses The difference between the calculated and observed values are referred to as a residual and represented by the following equation ri Xcalc Xobs The objective function is calculated using the following equation min Xr In the case of a groundwater model these system responses are typically head at a point in space concentration at a point in space or groundwater flow to a specified zone At the Define Observations step you will see a list of all your available head observations as shown in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help E Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutorial PEST SAMPLE grid Run a9 File Tools Window Workflow Help ERSA EE Data z g B gt Apply E Data z sample2 Blevation J Define ha Setting irie 2 Define Observations x Imported Observatio Eg Available Observations 2s pilotpoints zone1 3 i es pilot points zone2 Use Type Group Default
115. time 0 10 days 10 20 days etc Well Heads with Observation Points 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 176 VMOD Flex Help S Data Import O x m Data Mapping Wellheads Observation Points Target_fields p f Logger Id Elevation peee Unit category e Multiplier Data type CN Head C ep Head observation date i None None Date Quemical o None Nore e OE xl M Source Data Preview Well Name Y Screen Top Sc Bottom Startti Stop Tim Eanes FIO FI F4 F5 32339 None 125 9 113 76 0 234 CMEA E a Pt Rw 2 57471 32339 None 125 9 1113 76 538 641 14 28158 lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab described above Next click the Observation Points tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields For Observed Heads e Logger ID e Elevation e Observed Head e Head Observation Date For Observed Concentrations e Logger ID e Elevation e Chemical e Observed Concentration e Concentration Observation Date 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 177 Well Heads with Well Tops loxi m Data Mapping Wellheads Tops Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type Top ld soil_typ
116. to include for calculating the objective function and assign weights to various observations In this example there are 21 observation wells where heads were measured at several intervals E Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutorial PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run a9 File Tools Window Workflow Help ESA EE 9 OB om Data z 2 c 8 sample2 Bevation lz Define Observations Setting sample2 Elevation 2 Defi sremeters VMod Imported Well Fy Define Observations am imported Observation SF Available Observations O2 pilotpoints zone1 E lt r BAN Perap iC pilot points zone2 ype R fault Weight LOR piotpoints zone3 gt Heads Observation Wels 1 iS pilot points zone4 A S Use Name Group Type Layer Weight gt BHI Observation Wells Heads 1 1 E BH10 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 Se E BH11 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 S23 E BHI2 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 El BH13 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 Model Explorer 4 E BH14 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 Condit Ie a Ww BH15 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 E2 grid Ea BH16 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 p E BH17 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 sad 4 dey Properties E BH18 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 5 Fow E BH19 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 re rer Jl E BH2 Observation W
117. to repeat calculation of the Kriging factors on each occasion that the model is run can result in large savings in the time required to complete the overall parameter estimation process In this example there are 4 hydraulic property zones as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 13 Inspect Define Properties Views i E 7 tayer coat Toolbox Conductivity Database Assign Legend Color Zones Win e Zone 1 river alluvium e Zone 2 creek alluvium e Zone 3 western basalt e Zone 4 eastern basalt Each zone is represented by a geostatistical structure Each of these structures cites one variogram though it could cite up to five Structure1 will be used to characterize zone 1 of our model domain ie the river alluvium structure2 will be used to characterize zone 2 ie the creek alluvium whereas structure3 will be used to characterize zones 3 and 4 Note that the variogram assigned to these latter zones is quite unimportant because there is only one pilot point assigned to each of them all cells within these zones will be assigned the one interpolated value same as the respective pilot point irrespective of the variogram In VMOD Flex a default variogram is generated for each parameter zone with type 2 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services m VMOD Flex Help Exponential O FE om Define Observations
118. top elevation or measured depth in the Screen Top field e Enter a screen bottom elevation or measured depth in the Screen Bottom field Note For Horizontal Wells the screen values for Screen Top and Screen Bottom should be entered as a measured depth MD along the wellbore with respect to the well head see image below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 7 MD length of wellbore along path TVD Vertical depth independent of path Wellbore Adding Editing Pumping Well Schedule The Pumping Schedule table is used to enter the well pumping rates for specified time periods Negative pumping rate values are used for extraction wells and positive pumping rates are used for injection wells Pumping well schedules are defined for well screens and therefore a screen must exist before a pumping schedule can be defined To add pumping schedule items to the pumping schedule table Make sure the Screens option is selected from the Data to Display box Select a Well from the Well Head table and a Screen from the Screen Table if multiple screens exist Click the Add Row button from the Pumping Schedule toolbar to add a new item to the table Enter a Start time value and press the lt Tab gt key to advance to the End time field Enter an End time value and press the lt Tab gt key to advance to the Rate field Enter a pumping Rate value remember to use a negative value for extracti
119. translation is currently compatible with FEFLOW v 5 3 11 or later Start Date The default start date is the date specified in the conceptual model settings The Start Date of the model is the date corresponding to the beginning of the simulation This date is relevant only for transient flow simulations where recorded field data may be used for defining time schedules for selected boundary conditions Start Time Specify the simulation start time The Start Time of the model is the time corresponding to the beginning of the simulation This time is relevant only for transient flow simulations where recorded data may be imported for defining time schedules for selected boundary conditions Steady State Simulation Time A steady state simulation time is required for Steady State Flow simulation This parameter is not used if you have selected Transient Flow Although the simulation will always be run to 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models s the same equilibrium solution in Steady State the total amount of water passing through boundary conditions i e the cumulative value of the solution depends on the amount of time simulated Translate to Finite Element Model Loh Translate FEFLOW Conditions Recharge 1 Iv Material In Out Flow Well boundary Pumpingell1 BC 4th kind Recharge and Evapotranspiration Options Recharge i Translate as IN OUT f
120. type S Define Boundary Condition x Select Boundary Condition Type Specified Head v Name Specified Head 1 Description Where to connect on the Simulation Model Domain Top M Geometry Select a polyline or polygon from Data Explorer T Show gt gt Help Choose the desired boundary condition type from the list and define a name and optionally a description Define where the boundary condition object should be connected on the simulation model domain this will determine to what model layer the boundary condition will be translated Top Bottom Intermediate You must then select a polygon or polyline to define the boundary condition geometry Select the Sides option if you wish to define a boundary condition to the side face of the simulation model domain For this option supported boundary condition types are Specified Head General Head and Specified Flux Next gt Help m e EF Constant Head v v v e e ee General Head v v v v a IIIs Ero oy on a ome ee 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 291 Boundary conditions can be applied to the top bottom intermediate layers or sides of the simulation model domain using imported or digitized Polygon or Polyline data objects or by manually selecting the sides of the simulation domain using an interactive 3D Viewer Each option is described below e To
121. use the Transparency slider to set the level of transparency opaqueness e Click the Add button to create the isosurface The isosurface will be added to the isosurface table Modifying an Isosurface To modify an existing isosurface follow the steps below e Select the isosurface from the isosurface table e Make the modifications to the desired settings e g attribute name attribute value color etc e Click the Change button to apply the changes Time 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 262 VMOD Flex Help General Transient Attributes Time Schedule 31 12 2003 12 00 00 4M 30 12 2007 12 00 00 4M 29 12 2011 12 00 00 4M 28 12 2015 12 00 00 4M 27 12 2019 12 00 00 4M Active Time 17 11 1858 12 00 00 AM The Time node provides a list of all the time steps in the 3D gridded data object and allows you to select the desired time step data to display in the 3D Viewer window For 3D gridded data objects generated by steady state flow models only one time step will be available For 3D gridded data objects generated by transient flow models multiple time steps will be available as defined in the Translation settings in VMOD Flex i e Translation Time Steps 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 263 7 Conceptual Modeling Workflow A Conceptual Model refers to a basic high level representation of the hydrogeological system being modeled It will form the foundati
122. using the up down arrows Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e The standard navigation tools allow you to zoom pan and in the case of 3D view rotate e Click Next Step to proceed to the Properties step View Edit Properties e Atthis step you can view edit the flow properties for the model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials st kd MODFLOW Flex sampl O grid Ru fia aJ File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D a O O El amp Data drumco Elevation 1 S E Define Modeling Objectives I i Inspect Define Properties drumco Bevation 2 View Edit Grid B drumco Bevation 3 J Define Properties yems F raa arete gosana v wee drumco Bevation 5 e Lye R A A B Baggeration 10 dumco Bevation 6 eT 1 J VMod imported Wells e Ee amp Vie Row 1 amp 7 Column 1 310 Model Explorer 3D DRUMCO Model Boundary B Structure fom H Horizons Conductivity hd Zones es CE Properties Zones z Simulation Domain od By Mod aa Database Laye
123. wizard you can define various discretization settings for the horizontal mesh Define Finite Element Mesh ya Name Generate Finite Bement Mesh Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch Constrained conforming x Meshing Algorithm j switch Divide and conquer X V Total number of elements Approx 1000 Quality mesh q switch minimum angle 0 30 degrees 20 Refinement V Refinement along all superelement border edges Target element edge length 180 Refinement along line add ins Target element edge length 180 v Refinement around point well addins Number of triangles around points 10 Space from points to new nodes 45 Gradation steep smooth Polygons Refinement Triangle Copyright c by J R Shewchuk v 1 6 2005 lie Generate Finite element meshes are created using the Triangle mesh generator developed by J R Shewchuk Triangle provides various options for generating finite element meshes These options are described briefly below Please note that the switch letters in parenthesis beside the name of each option refers to the command line switches used by the Triangle mesh generator Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch Delaunay triangulation methods are typically used in finite element mesh generation as they 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 329 tend to maximize the minimum angle of all the angles of the triangle
124. zones 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 12 VMOD Flex Help In this example leave the defaults as is e Click Next Step to proceed to the Define Kriging Variograms Define Kriging Parameters The use of pilot points in characterizing the spatial distribution of a hydraulic property must be accompanied by a mechanism whereby hydraulic property values assigned to pilot points are spatially interpolated to the cells of the finite difference grid Spatial interpolation is accomplished using the Kriging algorithm Kriging is a method of spatial interpolation based on geostatistics The cornerstone of geostatistics is the variogram a variogram describes the extent to which hydraulic property values or any other type of data pertaining to any two points are likely to be different from each other as a function of the distance between those points One of the benefits of using Kriging as a basis for spatial interpolation is that the factors by which hydraulic properties at pilot points are multiplied before summation to obtain the hydraulic property value at a particular grid cell are independent of the actual hydraulic property values at the pilot points Hence a set of Kriging factors pertaining to each of the cells of the finite difference grid can be calculated in advance of the actual interpolation process As the latter is undertaken again and again as the model is run repeatedly by PEST the fact that it is not necessary
125. 0 or 1 In the case that there are large vertical variations in the hydraulic conductivities then a value of 1 should be used If no coarsening is implemented ISC 4 then the GMG solver is comparable to the PCG2 ILU 0 solver described in Hill 1990 and uses the least amount of memory e Damping factor DAMP This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the dampening factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to acceleration parameters used in other solvers 10 10 1 4 3 WHS The WHS Solver uses a Bi Conjugate Gradient Stabilized Bi CGSTAB acceleration routine implemented with Stone incomplete decomposition for preconditioning of the groundwater flow partial differential equations This solver as all iterative solvers approaches the solution of a large set of partial differential equations iteratively through an approximate solution Because the matrix equation for groundwater flow is initially ill conditioned effective pre conditioning of these matrices is necessary for an efficient solution The WHS solver works on a two tier approach t
126. 01 Ke n s 1605 4 Storage Ss 1 m 1605 Sy 02 Species Parameters Model Parameters Kx m s Ke Hydraulic Conductivity X Direction e The Start Date of the model corresponds to the beginning of the simulation time period It is important to define a relevant start date since your field measurements observed heads and pumping schedules will be defined with absolute date measurements and must lie within the simulation time period e Select 1 1 2000 for the Start Date e For this scenario we will include contaminant transport in the model run Turn on the check box beside Transport Active in the right hand side of the window under Define Modeling Objectives e For Sorption select Linear Isotherm equilibrium controlled For this tutorial you will not be simulating any decay or degradation of the contaminant so the default Reactions setting of No kinetic reactions will be fine e Below the Sorption and Reaction settings are two tabs Species Parameters and Reaction Parameters By default one species chemical component is defined for the transport run For this example we will leave the initial concentration SCONC as 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help B Define Modeling Objectives 7 0000 0000082875 000 00 re F zero but adjust SP1 Kd the distribution coefficient Type 1E 7 in SP1 1 mg L column You
127. 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 264 VMOD Flex Help 7 1 generate FEFLOW ASCII FEM file for running in FEFLOW When a new conceptual model is created a new conceptual model tree is added to the Conceptual Model Explorer in the main VMOD Flex window The conceptual model tree consists of a fixed folder structure that is designed to guide you through the workflow of building your conceptual model Define Modeling Objectives The first step in defining your numerical model is to Define the Modeling Objectives as shown below B Visual MODFLOW Flex demo W W File Tools Workflow Window Help DSH Data Data Ce Conceptual Model x OOF Ba Define Mod Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Oefine Model Structure Define Property Zones E Select the Net Step Define Boundary Conditions Define Pumping Wells LQ Define Boundary Conditi Select Gid Type L View Finite Bement Mesh Le View Finite Difference Grid b Translate to FEFLOW Mode Convert to MODFLOW Model Simulation type C Transport Active Sorption No sorption simulated Reaction Groundwater Row No kinetic reactions Available Engines USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET MODPATH fallable Engines Mo din nnd iiaii
128. 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 315 environment The finite element method involves fitting your conceptual model to a finite element mesh Once translated a FEFLOW ASCII FEM file is created which can then be opened and simulated using FEFLOW Note a license of FEFLOW v 5 4 or above is required to open FEFLOW FEM files generated from VMOD Flex Sections covered in this chapter e Create Finite Difference Gridb s e Create Finite Element Meshkes 8 1 Create Finite Difference Grid Quick Overview Instructions Specify the horizontal grid resolution and the vertical layering type and resolution Pre requisites The Conceptual Model has been defined 263 Result A numerical grid is created Next Steps Convert the conceptual model to a MODFLOW TETI From the Select Grid Type step in the Conceptual Model workflow click on the Define Finite Difference Grid button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 36 VMOD Flex Help B us adie DA gourd G Otea Mossing Obecirves Seiat thee Gand Type DR wee E Colea Data Obeas DR wedinan E Odea Conceptus Model boundary D Odre Mose wuare OG dissa E Odra Propety Zonas OG hiwe D Ssa te Net Seo OF men 5 B View Finge Donert Mas W View Fite Dtterence Gas Duline Fite Dflorence Grd Dotine Finto Elemurt Mosh C Consort Head Wen Conceptual Modei 3D Viewer 1 Defining the Horizontal Grid By default VMOD Flex discret
129. 34E 3B44B01 574520 4S 34E 3644001 574666 45 34E 36 BB01 574666 48 35E 07ACA01 574666 4S 35E 08CAB01 574720 45 35E 17CCA01 574800 45 35E 184BC01 574850 45 35E 184DC01 574850 4 35E 18DCC01 574850 45 35E 19BBB01 574850 4S 35E 29CBC1 574900 45 35E 30CBA01 575000 5S 33E 24CCC01 575000 5 33E 24CCC02 575075 5S 33E 24CCC03 575100 5S 34E 01CDA01 575150 4863349 39999949 4862849 39999949 4863000 4863349 39999949 4862849 39999949 4863050 4862849 39999949 4862999 4863050 4863349 39999949 4863120 4863349 39999949 4863200 4862925 4862849 39999949 4863000 Pumping Schedule Stat End Rate m 3 d The Well Heads table contains a list of all the wells in the data object The data stored in this table includes the Name X Y coordinates Elevation and Depth for each well When a well is selected its corresponding attribute data is displayed in the adjacent data tables e g Screens Pumping Schedule You can search for a well in the Well Heads table by entering the well name in the text box located at the top of the window and then clicking the Find button The Data to Display list box allows you to select which tables to display For example if Screens is selected default the Screens and Pumping Schedule tables will be shown If Observations is selected the Observation Points and Observation Data tables are shown If Well Tops is sel
130. 500 Aniosotropy 1 VMOD Flex will create one default variogram for each parameter zone structure VMOD Flex uses Ordinary Kriging to interpolate between pilot points This method has the following advantages e numerically efficient e respects values assigned to the points e regularization and interpolation can be based on same variogram The only downside is that it requires a defined variogram to be effective In VMOD Flex a default variogram is provided for each parameter zone Suggested defaults are e Exponential Variogram Type e A approx 20 of the length or width whichever is greater of the model domain typical range is 20 70 e Anisotropy 1 uniform e Nugget 0 Each parameter zone must have its own variogram Select the desired Parameter zone from the tree and provide the necessary variogram parameters Note Gaussian variograms are not recommended for use with PEST because they can lead to spurious interpolated property fields greater than or less than the highest lowest property 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow a value assigned to any pilot point Doherty 2008a O OB om z Define Observations Define Property Parameters Define Kriging Vairograms Ki Structure BJ Define Pilot Points aie DJ Define Kriging Variograms Nugget Te a eee Zone2 0 Se ae 33 2 Zone3 Ss ms Zone4 Transform Ps ae a Vario
131. 57 uniform Conventional wisdom dictates that the number of parameters involved in a parameter estimation exercise should be kept to a minimum However when using pilot points in conjunction with PEST s new regularization mode the opposite is often true PEST s regularization functionality prevents the onset of numerical instability which often accompanies attempts to solve over parameterised inverse problems Furthermore a superfluity of pilot points allows PEST to achieve a much better fit between model outcomes and field observations Reference Using Pilot Points to Calibrate a MODFLOW MT83D Model John Doherty General Tips General tips on using pilots points taken from http Awww pesthomepage org PEST FAQ php e There is no need to be parsimonious use as many pilot points as you can Let PEST do the regularization use SVD Tikhonov SVD assist or all of these together e Use more pilot points in those parts of the model domain where information has a high spatial density for example where there are more observation wells e Try to place pilot points between head measurement wells in the direction of groundwater flow where they represent hydraulic conductivity Place them on measurement wells where they represent specific yield or storage coefficient e Make sure you place hydraulic conductivity pilot points between measurement wells and any downstream boundary for it is the hydraulic conductivity of the material between
132. 5E 06 LJ E Layer 6 In the top left select which zone the selected cells should be assigned to from the combo box If you choose an existing zone the parameter values cannot be adjusted from within 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s2 VMOD Flex Help this GUI instead select the Database option described above to adjust parameter values for existing zones Or click the New button to create a new property zone After doing this a new zone number will be incremented Next select in which layers the new property zone should be generated by default your current layer will be selected however you can include other layers or select all layers Lastly define the Zone Attributes for this new property zone in the main grid There are several Methods for defining the attributes and these include Constant Value and Use Surface Use 3DGridded Data and Use Shape Data are not applicable for this scenario Constant Value The Constant Value method is selected by default for each parameter in the data input grid and allows you to specify a spatially constant value for the parameter Replace the default value with a new value Use Surface The Use Surface method allows you use an existing surface data object to define spatially variable attribute values This is ideal if you have a Surfer GRD or ESRI ASCII GRD file containing parameter values Follow the steps below e Select Surface as
133. 7 OG chdwest g EJ Define Model Structure Fe a a eile f u chdeast Ej Define Property Zones river S E Select the Next Step of Pumping_Wells B E Define Boundary Conditions OAL Obswels EJ Define Pumping Wels Define Boundary Conditic EJ Select Grid Type I View Finite Bement Mesh Ej View Finte Diference Grid EJ Convert to MODFLOW Model Convert To Numerical 1 0 IntialHeads3 Boundary Conditions i Constant Heads Constant Head 1 O Constant Head 2 m Rivers O River 1 Wels C Pumping Well 1 puts 0 Storage2 C hntialHeads2 E Conductivity Chid or _ M Sharana Child mid oii e After clicking on the conversion button a new window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on the size and type of grid you used and the complexity of the conceptual model inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials a Sw r amp Visual MODFLOW Flex conceptual model File Tools Workflow Window Help 10100x japoy PEG storage number is property for initial_heads the layer number is 1 Converting property for initial_heads the layer number is 2 Conductivity I Conceptual model to numerical model conversion has completed
134. 71 4783 peng apam low Z Conductivity 235 2053 Storage Initial Heads Boundary Conditions Recharge Constant Heads C Constant Head 0 5 C Wells S Wells Zone Budget Zone Budget Observations Midnite lt Observation Wells m Layer 1 Row 58 Column 22 X 43851 33 Y 76200885 Kx 30 0000 SAMPLE2 grid Run PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run SAMPLE2 grid Run1 You can mouse over the 2D display to see the range of Kx values Click on the button on the toolbar to show color shading with contour lines You must Translate and Run this new model run in order to see the updated MODFLOW results using the adjusted Kx parameters from PEST This concludes the PEST Tutorial 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 156 VMOD Flex Help 4 Working with Your Data The modeling workflows in VMOD Flex are data driven This means that you first need to load or create the appropriate data objects in order to use these at a particular step in the workflow See the following table for some common examples If you have First you should River locations in a Import these as Select this data object shapefile Polylineled data when creating a river objects boundary condition Geological layers in a Import these as Select these data Surfer GRD or ASCII Surfaceltes data objects when defining GRD objects horizons Air photo with river Import this as a Map Select th
135. AM is inexpensive However when MT3D was developed in 1987 1988 additional RAM over 640 KB was very limited and very expensive Explicit in time weighting has the disadvantage of not being stable unless tight restrictions on the size of time steps are satisfied In many cases the size of the time steps can be relatively small and may only get smaller as the spatial resolution of a model was increased Furthermore in versions of MT3D preceding 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow s MT3D96 the calculation of the overall maximum allowable step size was not correct and a model could still experience severe problems although it seemed that all stability criteria were being satisfied In theory the maximum Courant number may be 1 0 However because the stability requirements were not calculated correctly in practice users often had to specify maximum Courant numbers significantly smaller than 1 0 to ensure stability 2 Implicit in time weighting With implicit in time or backward in time weighting BIT the terms in the finite difference approximations are evaluated at the current time step This option was added with the introduction of MT3DMS and MT3D99 Implicit in time weighting has the advantage of being unconditional stable and allows the use of relatively large time steps The option requires the assembly storage and solution of a matrix but these requirements are not as onerous as they were both
136. Army Engineer Research and Development Center Vicksburg Mississippi SERDP 99 1 Zheng C and Wang P 2003 MGO Modular Groundwater Optimizer Incorporating MODFLOW MT3DMS Documentation and User s Guide The University of Alabama in cooperation with Groundwater Systems Research Ltd Zheng C 1999 User s Guide MT3D99 A modular 3D Multi species transport simulator S S Papadopulos amp Associates 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Index oy oe 3D Record to AVI File 213 3D Viewer Performance Preferences 13 A About the Import Process 157 Cx Constant Head 301 Cross Sections Ploton Color Map 256 sD Define Observation Wells 382 E Export views to image 216 sF Flow Properties Edit Colors 363 Edit Contours 363 me Howtobuy 4 Import Data 157 Maps 185 Points 157 Surfaces 169 Wells 171 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services N Numerical Grid Edit 59 View 59 Numerical Properties Edit 41 View 41 O OpenGL Driver Settings 14 P Project Color Palette 15 Pumping Wells 301 V Virtual Grid 14
137. B layer2 bottom O boundary G chd west G chd east OG river MAL Pumping Wells Obswells Z pathlines pth 23 pathiines tim O cone contours O 2cone contours 2cone polayons_L1 E igid 4 Polylinet lt Model Explorer Property Zone 1 a Property Zone 2 Gi Initial Heads L C Property Zone 3 ly Simulation Domain 5 C Model Domain iy Boundary Conditions H 0 Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 River 1 Pumping Well 1 5 C NumericalGrid1 S E Run S O Inputs Properties L Flow i 2 Cone C Stor Y Initia y undary Ce ee Constan 0 Cons Con D Rivers O Rive a a a Miran M gidi Exaggeration SAM a u i gt Conceptual Model NumericalGridi Run 3D Viewer 1 3D Viewer 2 3D Viewer 3 cae OOP cos am ar ny wy ae a EE Jas awlar ew oz ew OSLA Ba 10 43am Figure 14 Concentrations as 3D Grid rendered as an Isosurface Fence Diagrams represent the conductivity zones 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services soo VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex cm sample project 3D Viewer 2 el x File Tools Window Workflow Hel
138. CO grid Run e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Property Groups For flow models the groups include Conductivity Initial Heads and Storage When transport is included with your model the additional groups include Bulk Density Initial Concentration for each Species Longitudinal Dispersion and Species Parameters for each Species the required parameters depend on what Sorption and Reaction options you have defined in the modeling objectives For more details on the required flow and transport parameters for each category please see section Background on Flow and Transport Properties se For each parameter group you can choose to render by Zones or by a selected attribute Based on your selection the color rendering in the views will change Click Database button to see the conductivity zones that exist in your model Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views The display tools will allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours Render as cells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services sss VMOD Flex Help E Show color shading E Show hide contour lines i Show hide grid lines e At the bottom of the display you will see in the status bar the position of your mouse cursor in the current view XY grid position Layer Row Column and the Zone ID or attribute value for the selected cell The different property zones a
139. Color Zones es Zone1 k Zone2 2 Zone3 es iductivity Conductivity Property Zone 2 on Domain jel Domain Boundary Conditions Numerical grid 2 Run 5 E Inputs 5 C Properties Fow M Conducti Storage InitialHez Transpot Initial Cov Conc Species Conc Bulk Der D anette ML t Layer 2 Row 18 Column 2 X 99 12 Y 1469 79 Zone 2 0000 e Next you must assign the appropriate conductivity values to the discontinuous region Although the region where the aquitard pinches out is very thin the conductivity values of these grid cells should be set equal to the Conductivity values of either the upper or lower aquifers In this particular example the zone of discontinuous aquitard is indicated on a shapefile We will import this shapefile into the project e File Import e For the Data Type select Polygon from the drop down list e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles discontinuous aquitard shp and click Open e Click Next gt gt e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Finish You should now see a new data object discontinuous aquitard appear in the data tree in the top left corner of the window e Click on the box beside this data object in
140. Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 River 1 Pumping Well 1 i Conceptual model to numerical model conversion has completed IritialHeads2 Conductivity Child or _ aM Garana Child mrid1 altel e Note that the new tab is titled with the name of the new grid you provided This new tab will appear in the active list of workflows and viewers at the bottom of the main parent window Conceptual Model1 X NumericalGridi Run1 7 NumericalGrid2 refined Numerical Model x EJ Convert conceptual model to nun i Define Properties pe Define Boundary Conditions Converting Properties Select the Next Step Converting property for conductivity the layer number is 1 de re Define Observation Wells Converting property for conductivity the layer number is 2 Define Zone Budget Zones Converting property for storage the layer number is 1 Converting conceptual model to numerical model 2 Define ere Converting property for initial_heads the layer number is 1 1e pagar Converting property for initial_heads the layer number is 2 ST Run Conductivity i in Single Run ed fee Translate TAN Converting Boundary Conditions peee Z Run Numerical Engines Constant Head 1 dey View Results Constant Head 2 i View Charts River 1 i View Maps Pumping Well 1 La Conceptual model to numerical mode conversion
141. Ctrl V gue OK Cance Hep To view the attributes for Recharge or Evapotranspiration zones see the Database section below Assign Assign gt e Polygon or Polyline Use this option to digitize one or more shapes and assign Boundary Condition attributes to the respective shapes Use the left mouse button to start drawing and add attributes at the desired locations Once you have finished digitizing right click with the mouse to close the shape and select Define Attributes as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 375 Inspect Define Boundary Conditions Database Layer 1 Row 12 Column 19 X 980 09 Jv 1438 01 Atrribute The Define Boundary Condition attributes window will appear as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 376 VMOD Flex Help s Define Boundary Condition Constant Head Type 1 Constant Head 1 Description Select the Sides option if you wish to Geometry define a boundary condition to the Select a polyline or polygon from Data Explorer wade Faces of the raison modal polygon Provide the desired Name and Description Select Next to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 377 Define Boundary Condition Select haw the attributes are defined Define forthe entire zone Define values at v
142. DAMP lt 1 0 may be necessary to achieve convergence and values of DAMP between 0 5 and 1 0 are generally sufficient For some nonlinear problems imposing a fixed value of DAMP for every iteration can hinder convergence One remedy for this condition is to adjust the amount of damping depending on how the head solution progresses The AMG Package provides two adaptive damping strategies 1 Cooley s method with Huyakorn s modification and 2 the relative reduced residual method These methods are described in detail in the U S Geological Open File Report 01 177 ADAMP value of 1 will utilize the first method and a DAMP value of 2 will utilize the second method Max Damping Factor DUP Default 1 The upper limit for DAMP when an adaptive damping strategy is used Min Damping Factor DLOW Default 0 2 The lower limit for DAMP when an adaptive damping strategy is used Head Change Convergence Criterion HCLOSE similar as described for previous solvers Perform Conjugate Gradient Iterations ICG Default checked In some cases AMG can perform poorly as a result of a small number of error components that are not reduced during the AMG cycling A few iterations of a conjugate gradient solver can 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 401 often reduce these error components and thus help convergence Cleary and others 2000 In these cases the parameter ICG can be set to 1 to perform
143. Data Import 0 x Source dimension Number of rows Number of layers Number of columns Number of time steps Cell top elevation attribute me 4 lt Back Einish Cancel Help The Source Dimensions frame displays the Number of Rows Number of Layers Number of Columns and Number of Time Steps in the source data Finally click the Finish button to import the 3D Gridded data 4 1 7 Cross Sections VMOD Flex is capable of importing 3D cross sections generated by Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA data management software For information on how to create 3D cross section in HGA please refer to the HGA User s Manual For HGA product information please visit our website www swstechnology com or contact your Schlumberger Water Services sales representative 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 184 VMOD Flex Help When across section is created in HGA s 3D Explorer a file 3XS is saved in the v3D folder located in the HGA project folder By default the location of this folder is C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Project Name v3D A 3XS file contains information on the wells and layers of each cross section The cross section can contain geology hydrogeology and model layer interpretation layers When imported into VMOD Flex this data can be used for generating surfaces and horizons from interpretation layers or simply for visualization purposes To import a cross section file in VMOD Flex follow the
144. Define Particles ae E Select Run Type oo and EVT PEST Run i E Single Run Layag J Translate Rewetiing Run Numencal Engines Initial Heads G View R Anisotropy e aw Cha Output Control View Map gt Translate e Click to create the MODFLOW 2005 packages e Click Next Step to proceed Run MODFLOW 2005 gt Run e Click the button to run MODFLOW 2005 e The model run should complete in a few seconds Once finished you should see Normal termination of simulation in the engine progress window In addition you will see Heads and Drawdown items will be added to the model tree under Output e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed View Maps Heads and Drawdown e The following View Results window will then appear you have the option to View 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Maps or View Charts We will start by viewing maps of heads 9 OF Define Modeling Objectives E Define Numerical Model Wie Results EJ Create Grid E Import Model View Edit Grd EJ Define Properties EJ Define Boundary Conditions I Select the Next Step Define Observation Wells IJ Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Select Run Type I PEST Run Ej Single Run EJ Translate EJ Run Numerical Engines Results View Maps View Charts e Click View Maps button to proceed You will then
145. EST Parameter Estimation Workflow 471 EJ Define Observations Create SVD Assist Run i Define Property Paramet Ey Dare Pie Ponts SS PEST conto fie J Select Run Type control data i Sensitivity Analysis 10 433102 oi PEST Select Regularization 1 2 double point 100 i ED SVD Assis 5 0 2 0 0 3 0 03 10 W Tikhonov Regularisation 0 1 10 0 0 001 No Regularization 1 ee 25 0 005 4 4 0 005 4 Parameter Estimation 111 Analyze Results svd assist I Update Model Inputs pest_jac pst pest_jacjco 0201 parameter groups pargp absolute 0 015 0 0 switch 2 0 parabolic parameter data parl none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 0 1 par2 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 01 par3 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 parap 1 0 10 01 par4 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 0 1 par5 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 01 par6 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 0 1 par7 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 01 par8 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 01 par9 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 0 1 par10 none relative 10 1E 20 1E 20 pargp 1 0 10 0 1 observation groups regul1 OH11 09 201600000021 22 94001 1 0 og000001 When you are finished proceed to the Run PEST step to begin the PEST run 11 8 Run PEST At this step you can run PEST Check and start stop the PEST run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 472 VMOD Flex Help Es Run PEST Stop
146. EST Run The pest exe will load in a DOS command window and show the progress as seen below E Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutorial PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run File Tools Window Workflow Help 2 EUo T Dae le gt Ba B Run PEST fStop of PEST Check amp amp Data Y E og sample2 Bevation Define Observations Li sample2 Hlevation 2 Define Property Parameters i VMod Imported Well Define Pilot Points PEST Run Log a Imported Observatioi S Define Kriging Veriograms OF a i a ss rhe aes cs C Windows system32 cmd exe SE i on j ss i aes Ansan ari PEST is running in parameter estimation 0 PEST run record case pest_run lt See file pest_run rec for full details odel command line model bat Running model Running model 1 time Could Not Find D SmokeTest PEST Final pest tutorial idata MODFLOW SAMPLE2 grid Run MODFLOW 28GG pest hds imcould Not Find D Seppie Lose SESE SR Ae IADS Es tutorial data MODFLOW SAMPLE2 grid R un MODFLOW 2696 pes id Sum of squared weighted residuals Cie phi 1205 4 OPTIMISATION ITERATION NO 241 Model calls so far z Starting phi for this iter ation 1205 4 Calculating Jacobian matrix running model 35 times Model Explorer i runs completed initial Heads a sie Conditions Recharge E Constant Heads i C Constant Head 0 Depending on the speed of your computer
147. Exaggeration is the ratio of the scale of the Y axis to the scale of the X axis Vertical exaggeration can be used for discerning subtle topographic features or when the data covers a large horizontal distance miles relative to the relief feet By default the vertical exaggeration is set to 0 You can change the vertical exaggeration using the Exaggeration text box located at the bottom of the 3D Viewer shown below e Resetting the Viewer To zoom out to the full extents of your data click the Reset 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 212 VMOD Flex Help Scene Position button located at the bottom of the viewer Please note that clicking this button will reset the rotation and zoom level back to the original view configuration 3D Viewer Creating Cutaways VMOD Flex allows you to remove portions of the model from the 3D Viewer by creating cutaways To create a cutaway in a 3D Viewer follow the steps below Cutaway Properties d D CutOffs Active YZ Slice IV Active left x Position min max Fraction a 574695 6743 574366 6799 575150 042 m XZ Slice 7 Active before YPoston Ymin Ymax Fraction C afte 14883008591 4862849 399 4863350 fos2 00 atter m xY Slice I Active above Z Position Zmin Zmax Fraction G under 20 1484 ho 22 77 0 92 w x e Right click anywhere inside the 3D Viewer and select CutAway Properties from the pop up menu The following dialog box will display on your
148. FLOW and associated packages MODFLOW 2005 hitto water usgs gov nrp qwsoftware modflow2005 Guide index htm MODFLOW LGR _http water usgs gov nrp qwsoftware modflow2005_Igr Guide index htm MODFLOW 2000 http water usgs gov nrp qwsoftware modflow2000 Guide index htm Anderson M P and Woessner W W 1992 Applied Groundwater Modeling Simulation of Flow and Advective Transport Academic Press Inc San Diego CA 381 pp ASTM 1996 ASTM Standards on Analysis of Hydrologic Parameters and Ground Water Modeling Publication Code Number PCN 03 418096 38 West Conshohocken PA Ph 610 8329585 146 pp Bard J 1974 Nonlinear parameter estimation Academic Press NY 341 pp Bear J 1979 Hydraulics of Groundwater McGraw Hill New York NY 567 pp Brooks R H and Corey A T 1966 Properties of porous media affecting fluid flow ASCE J Irrig Drain Div 92 IR2 p 61 88 Carsel R F and Parrish R S 1988 Developing joint probability distribution of soil water retention characteristics Water Resour Res htip water usgs gov nrp gwsoftware modflow2005 Guide index htm 24 p 755 769 D N Graham S Chmakov A Sapozhnikov and J B Gregersen OpenMI Coupling of MODFLOW and MIKE 11 MODFLOW and More 2006 Managing Ground Water Systems Conference Proceedings May 21 24 v2 p727 731 Cleary A J Falgout R D Henson V E Jones J E Manteuffel T A McCormick S F Miranda G N and Rug
149. Flex sample T E E feco Jamul File Tools Workflow Window Help PEES EE Data Numerical Model x X gt g E Data e E z 2 i Define Modeling Objectives gi EJ Define Numerical Model Create a New Grid J Create Grid g A import Model Name Gdpews NumericGrid1 Create Grid Define os Define Horizontal Grid e Grid Size Columns Rows de 20 20 IO Grid Extents Ta Xmin Xmax Cell Width Fu 0 1000 50 000 Add Data Object gt aid s Ymin Ymax Cell Height Z 1 1000 50 000 Model Expk Calculate extents from a polygon object lodel Explorer Define Vertical Grid Number of Layers 2 Layer Name Elevation Use Surface Surfaces Layer 2 Top 50 S Layer2 Bottom 0 S At this step you can define the Horizontal Grid grid size and the extents and the Vertical Grid number of layers and the layer elevations Define Horizontal Grid Define the Grid size number of Columns and Rows and the Grid Extents There is no limit on the grid size you can use however if you design a grid that exceeds approximately 500 000 cells it is strongly recommended that you use the 64 bit version as more memory will be required to accommodate these model sizes With the 64 bit version of VMOD Flex running on 64 bit Windows and having at least 10 GB RAM you should be able to create grids in excess of 5 million cells The grid extents can be defined manually enter the min an
150. For post processing VMOD Flex supports e ZONEBUDGET and e MODPATH 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services File Tools Workflow Window Help DEH Data Numerical Modeling Workflow 347 E Data Numerical Model x GOFF Numerical Model Define Mo Jbjec fl Define Create Grid impot Model View Edit Grid Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions i Select the Next Step b Define Observation Zones Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles B Select Run Type PEST Run Transport Active Somption No sorption simulated Reaction Available Engines USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS No kinetic reactions Availatils Engines l USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS Single Run ZONEBUDGET Translate MODPATH Run Numencal Engines B View Results bo View Charts View Maps Model Explorer Flow Objectives Under the left panel of Define Modeling Objectives you can specify a Start Date for the project Pumping well data and calibration data head and concentration observation wells are entered and save as absolute calendar dates Therefore it is important to choose a relevant start date at this step that coincides with the start time
151. Next Step S E Define Boundary Conditions I Define Surface Water Ne Define Pumping Wells EJ Define Boundary Condit 5 EJ Select Grid Type View Finite Element Mesh E View Finite Difference Grid bd a EF d Convert to MODFLOW Model Define Property Zones Name Property Zone 2 Description Create New Property Zone Method Define Horizontal Extent Select Polygon Data EE boundary Define Volume Une Sucve Zone Use Polygon Data Object Select the structural zone E Zone2 Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz Parameter Unt Method Value Object Mapping E m s Constant 0 0001 KY m s Constant 0 0001 Kz ms Constat 16 05 a Polygons foana Just in time help for this step is unavailable e Select a polygon data object from the Data Explorer and click the button to insert the data object in the Select Polygon Data field e Note The selected polygon cannot contain multiple parts overlapping shapes or holes These features are currently not supported for property zone creation If your polygon does not meet this criteria it can be edited using the 2D Viewer editing tools For more information on this topic please see Creating New Data Objects kot e Next select a structural zone from the Conceptual Model tree and click the button to insert the
152. ODFLOW Fiex Exar de unl u9 File Tools Window Help Workflow ox ERSA EE O l E Data sm p gt amp ground Define Modeling Objectives Define Property Zones layer2 op EJ Collect Data Objects tayer2 bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model O boundary EJ Define Model Structure Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones MZ chd east J Define Property Zones eal MZ chd west 0 F Use Structural Zone s e ja We rivers H O Sel Structural Z fr e Use Polygon Data Object Sa Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Model Explorer E E Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary S Structure Horizons Horizon1 Horizon2 Horizon3 Zones M Zone1 M Zone2 CB Properties 3 Simulation Domain Model Domain CH Boundary Conditions i T Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Using Structural Zone s This method allows you to create a property zone from existing structural zones in your conceptual model i e zones generated from horizons e Click on the Use Structural Zone button as shown below Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones Structural Z Use Polygon Data Object sector Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define 2013 by S
153. Object Using Structural Zone s This method allows you to create a property zone from existing structural zones in your conceptual model i e Zones generated from horizons 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 282 VMOD Flex Help Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones b L a Date Ob Structural Zones Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Click on the Use Structural Zone button as shown above e Select a zone from the conceptual model tree under the Zones node and then click the gt button to insert the zone in the Structural Zones field e Click the Add button to add and combine structural zones e Proceed to Defining Property Zoneske3 Using Polygon Data Object This method allows you to define a property zone using both a structural zone and a polygon data object The polygon data object is used to define the horizontal extent of the property zone and therefore must be fully contained within the conceptual model boundary The structural zone is used to define the volume i e the vertical extent of the property zone 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 283 Conceptual Model GOBR EJ Define Modeling Objectives EJ Collect Data Objects EJ Define Conceptual Model EJ Define Model Structure Define Property Zones I Select the
154. Property Zone 3 imulation Domain Model Domain E Boundary Conditions Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 River 1 Pumping Well 1 JumericalGrid1 I Inbo ee curr GH Exch vu Gav Emon B star Evisu H Total OHEA PIAI Ses 3 16PM Figure 13 Concentration contours shown in Layer 1 Concentrations as 3D Gridded Data Object TecPlot DAT The Concentration results from VMOD Classic can also be imported as a 3D Gridded Data objects this format provides a richer set of visualization options such as 3D Isosurface colormap along specific row column or layer or arbitrary cross section line In order to use this option you must export your concentration results to a TecPot DAT file as explained above Select File Import and choose 3D Gridded Data as the object type Select the DAT file that was generated from VMOD Classic and proceed through the default import settings After the file is imported visualize ina 3D Viewer Refer to Style Settings 3D Gridded Data in the webhelp for assistance in setting up color maps or isosurfaces 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 499 Visual MODFLOW Flex cm sample project 3D Viewer 3 aax Fie Toos Window Workflow Help 8X LOG M aun Data ALO 2F gt Data og aground layer2 top
155. Recharge e Evapotranspiration e Lake e Specified Flux e Streams e For linear boundary conditions define local zones from line segments using an interactive 2D Viewer window e For linear boundary conditions define parameters at start end or intermediate vertices along a line and interpolate values between each vertex e Set each boundary condition parameter as static or transient e Define boundary condition parameters using one or more of the following methods e Use aconstant value 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction e Map to imported shapefile attributes e Use a surface data object e Use atime schedule data object for transient boundary conditions e Use attributes from 3D Gridded data objects Model Discretization e Discretize your model using the finite difference method or the finite element method e When working with finite difference grids Specify the number of rows and columns grid origin and the angle of rotation Choose from the following finite difference grid types Deformed Uniform Semi Uniform Perform horizontal grid refinement coarsening within a user defined row column interval Define a child grid within a numerical grid for running Local Grid Refinement LGR simulations using the MODFLOW LGR package e When working with finite elements meshes Use imported shape data objects to define the superelement mesh Choose from various Delaunay triangulation methods including cons
156. Run After PEST has been run to completion you may need to make changes to the defined PEST inputs and or the numerical model Please follow the steps below in the case of these changes Numerical Model If you change the model engine you must go back to the start of the PEST workflow and click Apply and Next at each step right up to the Run PEST step If you change the Translation settings eg Solver Package settings and or the property package LPF vs BCF just go back to the Define Kriging parameters step click Apply button then you can go directly to Run PEST If you need to change the parameter zonation eg add or remove Conductivity zones this is something that is not yet updated in the PEST workflow Please make a clone of the model run change the parameter zonation in this clone then launch a PEST run from this model clone PEST Inputs If you change the Observations and or Weights e Return to this step in the PEST workflow and make the necessary changes e Click Apply button at the top of the workflow toolbar e Go to the Run PEST step If you change the Property Zone parameter min max values 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 477 e Make the changes at this step in the workflow e Click Apply button e Go to Define Kriging Variograms and click Apply to re generate these PEST input files e Go to the desired regularization step and Regenerate the PEST Control
157. Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 33 i Define Boundary Condition oe Constant Head Type 1 Help Choose the desired boundary Name condition type from the list and define Constant Head a name and optionally a description ER Define where the boundary condition Description object should be connected on the simulation model domain this will determine to what model layer the boundary condition will be translated Top Bottom Intermediate You must then select a polygon or polyline to Where to connect on the Simulation Model Domain define the boundary condition Te geometry Select the Sides option if you wish to Geometry define a boundary condition to the Select a polyline or polygon from Data Explorer chd east e From the Data Explorer select the chd east polyline that represents this constant head e Click the button in the Define Boundary Condition dialog to add this polyline to the input e Click the Next button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 3 VMOD Flex Help C Edit Boundary Condition ete Show gt gt 7 Select how the attributes are defined Define for the entire zone D fi l at ti Li t ti Just start and end points All vertices From 3D added From shapefile Fram time schenule e The next dialog allows us to define the constant head value VMOD Flex provides various options for defining boundary co
158. Select Run Type IS PEST Run i Single Run 3D EI Translate E Run Numerical Engines 5 8 View Results Toolbox E View Charts Legend J View Maps Color Concentration 5 04E 08 377 8742 755 7483 1133 6225 1511 4967 1889 3709 2267 2450 2645 1192 HECO oy n m KF FROOF JLayer 1 Row 32 Column 35 X 963 98 1100 47 Concentration 102 0541 You can determine the risk that the contaminant front poses to the discontinuous aquitard by doing the following Locate the data object discontinuous aquitard from the tree and turn it on It should appear in the layer view Take a moment to navigate through the other layers to see the calculated concentrations Move your mouse cursor to specific areas of the interest such as in the discontinous aquitard region and note in the status bar the calculated concentrations for the selected cell After 7300 days 20 years of simulation time it is clear that the plume has migrated to the hole in the aquitard To see how the plume looks in cross section turn on the Column view and enter column 25 Advance the times to see the plume migrating the upper layers down to the lower layers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 131 View Charts Concentrations In this section you will learn how to compare the observed concentration data to the concentration values calculated by the model e Click Next St
159. Series 7 y Tes eres 10932 Calc 10932 Obs 12957 Calc 12957 Obs 12964 Calc 12964 Obs 13082 Calc A 13082 Obs 13662 Calc x 13662 Obs 13673 Calc 13673 Obs 14211 Calc 714211 Obs 18364 Calc 18364 Obs 382 F Show All Observation 360 4 P Layer 1 moe E Layer 3 E Layer 4 E Layer 5 E Layer 6 p 3388 E 10885 Hy 10886 E 10897 E 10904 E 10906 E 10914 B 10915 A 10917 E 10918 Heads m eo E 10922 7 10932 E 10938 E 10946 E 10947 E 10949 295 6 E 10950 E 10951 PP 10952 E 10953 B 10957 E 10958 E 10975 E 11014 27454 E 12162 0 365 730 1095 1460 1825 2190 2555 2920 3285 3650 4015 Time day Working with HydroGeoBuilder projects If you have a conceptual model project built in Hydro GeoBuilder these projects can be opened in VMOD Flex Please follow the instructions below e Make a backup copy of your Hydro GeoBuilder project and corresponding data repository folder e Download the Hydro GeoBuilder to VMOD Flex project conversion utility http trials swstechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 HGB_fix HGB to VMODFlex zip e Unzip this to a temporary location on your computer e Run the HGB2Flex exe program and follow the on screen instructions e Start VMOD Flex and open this project e Ensure that you have your conceptu
160. The default mode Allows you to zoom rotate and pan the displayed data objects le Pick Mode 2D Viewer Only Allows you to select individual data object elements currently displayed in the viewer When in Pick Mode the Edit button will be shown in the sidebar allowing you to edit the selected data object element Rotate Allows you to rotate the displayed data objects using your mouse Click and hold on the displayed data and move the mouse in a direction to rotate the data Available in 3D Viewer only Move Pan Allows you to move pan the displayed data objects in the viewer Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the displayed data objects Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out of the displayed data objects Zoom Into box Use the mouse cursor to draw a box around an area of interest and automatically zoom into this area Modifying Viewer Settings The following settings are available in both 3D and 2D Viewers e Changing the Background Color To change the background color of a 2D or 3D Viewer right click anywhere within the viewer and select Background Color from the pop up menu The Color combo box will display on your screen Select a new color and then click the OK button e Showing the Viewer Axis To show or hide the viewer axis right click anywhere within the viewer and select Axis from the pop up menu The following settings only apply to 3D Viewers e Setting the Vertical Exaggeration The Vertical
161. Time Series To the left of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select individual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 437 2D Viewer 1 X Numerical grid Run x OB Transport View Charts 7 e Time Series Parameter or 5 2157 OW1 A CONCD01 Cale a OW1 A CONC001 Obs Sh oia OWZJACONC001 Calc Time Series x OWZALCONCO01 Obs Hapa ne m aT OW3IA CONCOO1 Cale OW3IA CONCO01 Obs T All Obs I concor 1725 6 E 1294 2 E 5 V OW1 A T Ow2 A Z m OW3 A A 5 862 8 431 4 y 0 0 1460 2920 4380 5840 7300 Apply Time day 10 12 3 Compare Heads and Drawdown VMOD Flex allows you to compare Heads or Drawdown between several model runs This is useful to determining differences in pre and post pumping heads or comparing impacts to heads or drawdown when adjusting property or boundary condition parameters Follow the steps below e Right click on the Heads node of any model run and select the Compare option The following dialog will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ss VMOD Flex Help Compare Heads leal Heads from Numerical Model O MODFLOW HDS File There a
162. Type I Sensitivity Analysis PEST Select Regularization IE SVD Assist I Tikhonov Regularisation B No Regularization BI Parameter Estimation Analyze Results Wi Update Model Inputs Update Model Inputs Update model with PEST results Click on the Update Model with PEST Results button VMOD Flex will save the adjusted model parameters in a new model run within the same project This new model run will appear in the Model Explorer below the most recent model run You must Translate and Run this new model run in order to see the updated MODFLOW results In the past you would need to do a Save Project As if you wanted to keep the original model separate from the PEST updated model With VMOD Flex you can have all these model scenarios runs accessible within a single project allowing you to efficiently compare the original model to the PEST adjusted model run where you can make comparisons between calculated heads property zone parameters etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 476 11 11 VMOD Flex Help BB Vous MOOFLOW Flee TVelleyVeriehloKx iM Sl Bie Iools Window Workflow Help iad Er D nerenvale evvaria Inspect Define Properties Rend 3 52 OB REFINEDVALLEVVARIABLERK grid Rum Ss fen BLEKK gr P Layer ews EE KrF QOU Eyen 1 Row 10 Column 1 X 3678 V 6537 Ku 116605 Making Changes after a PEST
163. User s Manual Visual MODFLOW Flex Integrated Conceptual amp Numerical Groundwater Modeling Contents 3 Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part 1 Introduction 1 1 Installation and Licensing secciescsetsiczescscctes a aae E EA a es a E OE E coacesentassossotessvescbeese 2 Zr Howto buy O o yl a A a A A A E E R 4 3 Features o A raeinnndedesceeddeasavenssedaseaesssencssscuesadessoucsssceeceacesdeutoouseesenacaveseceosesssaacebssuadeceassseussdoccdenseceonses 4 Part2 Program Overview 8 Te MaimMenu o a saaana a oos a Sao oS ES O ceuse csssnccdssceedcessedazscccenssuascecssedsueiescoussececscoedeeceecee 12 Part 3 Quick Start Tutorials 17 1 C nc pt al Modeling tassonas a R EE ERE ER ai E 18 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW ModelS s ssesosessessessessessessessessesresrssnosseseesseseesresnosrossoseesseseesesseosnostostoseeseesesseossosessese 55 3 Working with HydroGeoBuilder projectS s esssessosseseseseesonsessesesosseesescsesssesesesosesesescessesesescssseossesnsssresosssssesesosssesee 72 4 Airport Numerical Model with TranSport s sessesossuseesesososesescsesosesesescsnsesescsssnseeesesssseeceossessesesosssesesesosesesceesessseseee 73 Bi PEST With Pilot P intsi aecscedsasccseciecssciscssassassaidacsssdsosssssvansiasciscebsnscescadsnsssdanasedeeions ved oso osised asosida setos a ossai 132 Part 4 Working with Your Data 156 1 impoiting Data aik sissssccansassdacasecdesiscsscsaeedcessluc
164. Water Services Data Settings 255 Under Slice Settings specify the desired Layer Row or Column Number Under Fill Settings the ByAttribute option is default and recommended for most cases Show Legend check box at the bottom of the window will add a color legend to the current 3d view Show Wireframe will render with wireframe instead of filled in cells The example below illustrates this Filled Slice Wireframe Seeeueeee i woe Pg In the Settings tree under Slice Colors you can access the color page where you can choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recharge rate nea more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attributel2s6l section Colormap 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 256 VMOD Flex Help Settings mA s General Cells E E E E cr V Use virtual grid E AutoApply Fill Settings Transparency E Show Legend 1 E Wireframe Settings for the Colormap are identical to those explained above for Slice Plot Color Map on Cross Sections Color map has an additional Slice Type which is Cross Section which is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings rF Settings lola
165. Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 103 Next you need to add these wells to the Numerical Model e At the Define Boundary Conditions step in the workflow under Toolbox choose Wells from the list of Available Boundary Conditions e Click on the Assign button A Pumping Wells Boundary Condition dialog will appear e Select highlight the Pumping_Wells data object from the Data tree you may need to move the Pumping Wells Boundary Condition dialog to the right in order to see this button located in the middle of the Define Well Boundary Condition under Select Wells Data Object Once completed you display should appear as shown below Visual MODFLOW Flex Airport IT a sess sts li File Tools Workflow Window Help ead e Data Data LJ aimport ground surface C aimortdayer24op g aimortdayer34op C aimortdayer3 bottom MO discontinuous aquitard WG riverl WCQ refuelling area O 4 FEE Jasojdxq japoyy Model Explorer charge 2 zal grid 1 Inputs B Properties 5 a Aow i O Conductivity I F Storage ioo L0 InitialHeads e Next gt gt Oo a ij EJ Define Modeling Objectives can 5 Define EA Model Inspect Define Boundary Conditions 2D Viewer 1 X Numericalgrid Run X Con EJ Create Grid Import Model View Edit Grid Define Properties 7J Define Boundary Conditions EI Sel
166. You must make the Recharge zones visible In the model tree locate the Recharge node under Inputs Boundary Conditions as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 118 VMOD Flex Help e Click on the box beside Recharge in the tree Mi S E Select Run Type k x 5 PEST Run 3D Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines Toolbox View Results TT EJ View Charts Rechege View Maps X Assign X E 3 Y Flow C Conductivity Storage InitialHeads Transport 3 Initial Concentratic HO Conc001 3 Species Paramete bC Conc001 Bulk Density C Longitudinal Dispe lary Conditions nstant Heads Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 Constant Head 3 i M PumpingWell1 B A Observations i i C Heads Observations Outputs Layer 1 Row 22 Colt 4 m r e The recharge cells should now appear in the Layer View of the grid e Database buton and the following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials u When the recharge zones were previously created the values for the chemical species Conc001 were left as undefined indicated by 1 You will modify this for the smaller recharge area e Locate Zone3 the second row in the table e Enter 5000 for Conc001 thereby replacing the 1 value OK to cl
167. Z ne Budget Zones cmnenie sesei e E A a a tun a E ara E AE AE ie as 383 Define ParticlgS O a Ear O EL eae aa Ae a eaS E Te Aaa Taaa E EREN E aitai 383 S lectE gin s O a a E RRE 384 Translation Settings cisisscscssSecsscecdecsscqueceschse aescdecsscastecssasesdessssesusseasnscescutedessesueudssdeus casescdacguetesapsesedocaveecees 385 MODFLOW caeso kestsotoreoneares oet oeoo t onein ores anosu davies nova veod suv edvvscsused detox ubiunvsv sawp sdunndeussdteinotedeavaavvaseuliruiddhesAvelaadpiasvs 386 General eorne e e semen I ck caveat ee A cue ie eee ee A E ates E en E E a 387 MODELOW Setting Sorra a eiuedindneiss tie aoaaa a a a a tn a e a iad ea E aA 387 AANER T A E E E E be Saw eS E A NCE E E AA AE T 389 SOIVeEnSa amana nna eane ET rh Os eaux sds devs sa dais E A AE EEE a E sex E A eaa e Na 390 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Contents 5 PEG i y Eana AS SE E a o aa are a a Aaa AE e E A a o aTe Serda eiaa 391 GMGi E E SE A A ieee RTT 393 WHS onaards taies aa Tea Na KSEE A T aves RE AEE aden AEV AE SANE aaa terete 395 SIP e i ONNE ESAE EAE a AO NESE EONS pa Eea iave aie cine nen ea rasia iE 397 SOR oA nA A E a Aa eis och decode AaS E Ea beads hotline SENEE S PAEAS 398 SAMG e eaa a AEO ER EEEn didnt iin oS ANERE AOT tiie ee EDT NL EESE EET 399 Recharge and Evapotrans piration essct E E A a e a aaa 402 Lakes we Layer Types Gell RE Wetting E E A E A E E T aed 407 Initial Heads drsna orea r eai e ni
168. a 169 The remaining workflow for importing polygon data is very similar to that of importing Polylines For more information on how to import polygons please see Importing Polylines he 4 1 4 Surfaces Surface data consists of an ordered array of interpolated values at regularly spaced intervals that represent the spatial distribution of an attribute e g digital elevation models Surface data can be used in VMOD Flex in the following ways e To define the horizons structural zone vertical boundaries of a conceptual model e To define the spatial distribution of a boundary condition attribute e To define the spatial distribution of a property zone attribute e g conductivity initial heads e To visualize the spatial variation of model features e g surface topography water table elevation etc VMOD Flex supports the following surface file types e ESRI ASCII Grid ASC TXT e Surfer Grid GRD e USGS Digital Elevation Model DEM To import surface data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Surface from the Data Type drop down list box e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue Note Surface files that contain a large quantity of data points may require substantial time to import into VMOD Flex Next select the Coordinate System of th
169. a 10 interval spacing 10 classes will be created As the number of intervals classes is modified rows are removed or added to the color table The maximum value will always be Red and the minimum value will always be Blue but the gradient between will change automatically depending on the specified number of classes Click the Apply button to view the changes in an active 2D or 3D Window Contour Lines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 251 EB settinos General Operations Style Color m M Show Contour Lines M Show Contour Labels M Interval options Number of contour 10 Contour Interval fo Lines style settings Label settings Line Style Label Spacing fi oo Line width Label Margin 1 1 Number of decimals Color 0 Specified Label Font The Contour Lines node provides options for showing contour lines on the surface layer The following options are available Show Contour Lines Show Hide the contour lines Show Contour Labels Show Hide the contour labels Number of Contours Specify the number of contours to display on the surface Contour Interval Set the contour increment value When this option is used VMOD Flex automatically calculates the number of contours used Line Style Select the contour line style from the combo box Choose between solid line or dashed line Line Width Set
170. able can be accessed from the General settings in the Settings dialog or it can be launched by right clicking on the data object in the Data Explorer and selecting Spreadsheet Note Map and Cross Section data objects do not have a data table I E E rooier O OOO T j Attribute Geometry 4862900 574366 679 4863050 574366 679 4863349 39 574520 4863349 39 574666 4862849 39 574666 4863000 574666 4863349 39 574720 4862849 39 574800 4863050 574850 4862849 39 574850 4862999 574850 4863050 574850 4863349 39 574900 4963120 The Attribute tab contains the attribute data of the selected data object Each column in the attribute tab represents an attribute The Geometry tab contains the geometry X Y Z values of the data object In both tabs the FID column uniquely identifies each feature in the data 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services zo VMOD Flex Help object To copy data to the Windows clipboard highlight the data to be copied and then click the Copy button d or press CTRL C on your keyboard Tip When a data object is shown in 2D Viewer and the viewer is set to Pick Mode you can select a row from the attribute or geometry table and the corresponding feature will be highlighted in the 2D Viewer Modifying Attribute and Geometry Data Imported geometry and attribute data can be modified in the Data Table To make changes to data click the Begin Edit button
171. above 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 134 VMOD Flex Help O O El D Eala H 8 Define Modeling Objectives O El ow MODFPATH ZoneBudget MT3DMS Single Run E Define Observations Define Property Parameters Tikhonov Ri No Regularization 7 m J jansation Type Heads I BHIO Observation Wells Heads E BH11 Observation Wells Heads E BHI2 Observation Wells Heads FI BH13 Observation Wels Heads T BHI4 Observation Wels Heads z BHI5 Observation Wels Heads Fl BHIe Observation Wells Heads v BHI7 Observation Wells Heads 7 BHIB Observation Wels Heads FA BHIS Observation Wels Heads A BH2 Observation Wels Heads v BH20 Observation Wels Heads a BH21 Observation Wells Heads i BH3 Observation Wels Heads E BH4 Observation Wels Heads a Observation Wels Heads 5 v me Observation Wels Heads v 7 Observation Wels Heads wl BHE Observation Wels Heads v BHI Observation Wels Heads SAMPLE go Run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 135 Define Observations e The first step is to define the observations you want
172. ad When a dry cell is wetted the new head may be calculated using one of two methods Calculated from neighbors Head Zbot Wetting factor Neighboring head Zbot Calculated from threshold Head Zbot Wetting factor Wetting threshold Where Zbot is the elevation of the bottom of the current cell Generally the first equation is thought to be more reasonable since the cell s new head is varied according to the head in the neighboring cell which caused it to become wet However in situations where MODFLOW is over estimating head changes during iterations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow s this equation may cause non convergence The second equation can then be used to attempt a more stable solution Setting Head Values in Dry Cells Each dry cell is assigned a default head value as a flag to indicate it is dry This value is typically a very large negative number e g 1 0e30 However the presence of large negative head values in dry cells may cause problems for parameter estimation simulations because this large negative value may be used to calculate the calibration residual calculated head observed head at a grid cell that has become dry during one of the PEST iterations In this case itis more appropriate to assign the head value in dry cells equal to the cell bottom elevation to avoid this problem Setting Minimum Saturated Thickness When PEST runs with varied mo
173. ailable numeric engines and the Run column indicates which numeric engines will be run during the simulation Any or all of the available numeric engines can be run for the simulation provided the required data files are present in the model project folder The MODFLOW engine can be run by itself without any requirements from any of the other engines The MODPATH engine requires a valid BGT file to be present in the project folder This file will be automatically created if MODFLOW and MODPATH are mutually selected The Zone Budget engine requires a valid BGT file to be present in the project folder This file will be automatically created if MODFLOW and Zone Budget are mutually selected P Run The button will run the selected numeric engines using the required translated data files already present in the project folder If the required files are not present in the project folder the numeric engines will not run A warning message will appear indicating that the Visual MODFLOW files will not be translated prior to running the model P Run Press the button to start the simulation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow za Visual MODFLOW Flex demo Fie Tools Window Workflow Help 8X ER A EL
174. al Modeling Workflow 373 Edit Boundary Condition Attributes Eh Parameter Unit Transient Method Value Object Mapping Ee m Al Constant 7 13 EHead m F Constant x18 The attributes for each boundary condition are listed in the upper part of the grid Each attribute can be steady state or Transient Transient attributes will have a corresponding time schedule shown in the lower part of the window example below f E Edit Boundary Condition Attributes or Parameter Unit Transient Method Value Object Mapping gt S m a Constant 18 22 EHead m Fd Constant 18 19 98 OK Ganesh Helo If the selected group of cells has values that change along a linear gradient then for each attribute you will see a range of values with the min value and max value separated by eg 18 20 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 374 VMOD Flex Help A Copy and Paste feature is available in the transient attributes grid through selecting the desired cells and right clicking The values can be copied to an Excel worksheet modified then pasted back into this grid This option is shown below Edit Boundary Condition Attributes o Parameter Unit Transient Method Value r Object nN Mapping gt S 7 Constant z 18 22 z EHead m El Constant z 18 19 98 7 Bee Start 2 Copy Ctrl C Paste
175. al model created and at least one numerical grid e Right click on the numerical grid node in the tree and select Convert to Numerical Model e This will launch a new numerical model workflow window that contains the steps for navigating the inputs run and outputs for the numerical grid the conversion may take a few minutes depending on the size and complexity of the grid and your model e Use the workflow to navigate and see the resulting properties and boundary conditions For 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials more details on the numerical modeling workflow see the Numerical Modelingl45 Workflow section e If you run into difficulties please contact SWS Technical Support sws support slb com A Backwards Compatibility Please note that Hydro GeoBuilder cannot open projects that have been modified and saved in VMOD Flex For more details please contact SWS Technical Support sws support slb com For more details refer to the Convert to Numerical Modells34 section 3 4 Airport Numerical Model with Transport The following example is a walk through of creating a numerical model with groundwater flow using MODFLOW 2005 and basic contaminant transport using MT3DMS The exercise is based on the well known Airport example from Visual MODFLOW Classic Objectives e Learn how to create a project and create a numerical grid e Become familiar with navigating the GUI and steps for numerical m
176. alculate the Kx or Ky values for each grid cell Selecting Anisotropy by layer will not replace the original modeled values for Ky but will instead calculate values during the translation of Visual MODFLOW file formats to MODFLOW input data file formats to be used for the run By default each new simulation will be set to use the Anisotropy by layer option The Anisotropy as specified option will use the Kx and Ky values defined for each property zone This feature allows spatially variable anisotropy within a layer as opposed to the Anisotropy by layer option which applies a single anisotropy ratio Ky Kx Factor for the entire layer Amore in depth discussion of spatially variable anisotropy can be found in Kladias 1997 Note MODFLOW 2000 does not support running the BCF package with Anisotropy as Specified Translate 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow as 10 10 1 110utput Control The Output Control run options set the information and frequency of information written and saved to the various MODFLOW output files see following figure Translate General Settings Save to Binary Print to LST MODFLOW 2005 Settings Each Nth steps Time Steps i and EVT End Se le Heads DDown F Tem Heads DDown F Tem Budget inte 14 0608 1 1 cue 30 9338 1 2 F F F Initial Heads 51 1813 1 3 Anisotropy 75474 h 4 q Settings Anisotropy By Layer 104 6349 1 5 Outp
177. also change the cross section view change the Column number up down or enter a new value and use the zoom and pan tools on the Column view to improve the display Note that you can repeat the same steps above for Rows instead of Columns in order to see cross sections along the X axis e When you are finished turn the Column View off by removing the check box beside Column under Views e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click gt Next Step to proceed Define Boundary Conditions The next step is to define the flow boundaries for the model In this example you will define constant heads along the north in layer 1 and 3 and the Waterloo River along the southern edge in layer 1 and a constant head along the south in layer 3 Constant Heads The first Constant Head boundary condition to assign will be for the upper unconfined aquifer along the northern boundary of the model domain To do this you will use the Assign gt Polyline tool e First you need to go back to Layer 1 e Assign Polyline from the toolbox Move the mouse pointer to the north west corner of the grid top left grid cell and left click on this location to anchor the starting point of the line Now move the mouse pointer to the north east corner of the grid top right grid cell and Right Click on this location to indicate the end point of the line You should then see a small menu appear Define Attribut
178. ame With the Specified option select the adjacent color swatch and select the desired color to fill the cells If you select Color by Attribute you can color each cell according to a specified attribute e g heads Color by attribute settings can be defined by selecting the Color node located under the Cells node For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attribute bse section The Show only Active Zone check box allows you to show hide inactive grid cells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 254 VMOD Flex Help Vertices Lines For information on the settings available in the Vertices and Lines nodes please refer the Points Vertices bss and Lines zs5 respectively Slice Settings bha F General General Style Cells t Vertices Lines Slice E Show Slice 7 Use virtual grid lsolines Row lsosurfaces Row Number 1 75 1 p Fill Settings By Attribute H Transparency 0 F Show Legend Wireframe Show Slice will control the display status in the 3D Viewer Use Virtual Grid option allows you to use a coarsened version of the true 3d grid dimensions This option is recommended when you have moderate to large size grids exceeding a few hundred thousand cells If you have a small grid then this option can be turned off For more details see Virtual Grid Settings 141 2013 by Schlumberger
179. and polygons e Rotate scale and delete shapes e Undo all edits and revert back to original shape 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 6 VMOD Flex Help Define Multiple Conceptual Models e Create multiple conceptual models with different interpretations or copy existing conceptual models e Define conceptual model geometry using imported data objects e Define the horizontal model boundary using an imported or digitized polygon data object e Create vertical horizons from surfaces that are either imported or created by interpolating raw XYZ points e Select from different horizon types to accommodate various geological conditions pinchouts discontinuous layers etc e Automatically create 3D structural zones from defined horizons Property Modeling e Create property zones from imported or digitized polygon data objects or from generated structural zones e Assign property values for conductivity storage and initial heads using various methods Use a constant value Map to imported polygon shapefile attributes Map to imported 3D Gridded data attributes Use surface data object Boundary Modeling Automatically generate the simulation domain using the boundaries defined for the conceptual model Apply boundary conditions to the top bottom sides or an intermediate layer of the simulation model domain Support for the following boundary conditions e Pumping Wells e Specified Head e River e General Head e Drain e
180. ar B Dispersion Parameters These parameters can be modified on a per layer basis For this example you will not need to modify the defaults e Click Cancel to close this window e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed Define Transport Boundaries Sinks Sources In this section you will define the location and concentration of the contaminant source The source of contamination will be designated at the refueling area as a Recharge Concentration that serves as a source of contamination to infiltrating precipitation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 9 Transport Boundary Conditions VMOD Flex vs VMOD Classic If you are used to working with Visual MODFLOW Classic you will notice a difference in how transport boundary conditions are handled in Visual MODFLOW Flex In VMOD Classic transport boundary conditions were defined separately from the flow boundary conditions using the types Constant Concentration Recharge Concentration Evapotranspiration Concentration and Point Source In Visual MODFLOW Flex the sink source parameters for transport models which are time and species concentrations are defined as part of flow boundary conditions which is a more natural representation This means you do not define separate cell geometries for transport boundaries you simply define species concentrations while de
181. art date The start date will be the same as that which you specified in the Define Modeling Objectives step if you see that the start date is incorrect return to this step and make the necessary change A Start Date The start date will be used to retrieve pumping well and head concentration observation data for the model run Since well data at defined with absolute calendar dates it is important that your start date reflects the actual start time for the model run Otherwise this data may not be included in the simulation Es X P Translate Define Modeling Objectives Define Numerical Mode E Create Grid IE import Model View Edit Grid E Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles Select Run Type I PEST Run E Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines 5 View Results EJ View Charts View Maps 10 10 1 2 MODFLOW Settings Translate General 4 General Settings D MODFLOW 2005 Start Date 171 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MT3DMS Settings Solution Method l Output Control F Specify the property package LPF or BCF Run Type Steady State or Transient 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 388 VMOD Flex Help If the Steady State Flow option is select
182. as you have computing resources to estimate Through the use of super parameters you can get all of the benefits of highly parameterized inversion with a comparatively small run time burden Your model can have hundreds or even thousands of parameters but these may be accommodated with a computational burden of only a few tens of runs per iteration Click on the Create SVD Assist Run button on the toolbar as shown below Define Observations Define Property Parameters E Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms 3 5 Select Run Type Sensitivity Analysis PEST Select Regularization 7J SVD Assist I Tikhonov Regularisation E No Regularization Parameter Estimation Analyze Results E Update Model Inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 470 VMOD Flex Help The following Settings dialog will appear For SVD Assist you must provide the number of Super Parameters to use Please consult the PEST manual for a recommended set of parameter values SVD Assist Settings Number of Super Parameters 4 Number of Optimization iterations 25 Upper level of modelto measurement misfit PHIMLIM 20 Acceptable level of measurement objective function PHIMACCEPT 21 LOK Cre After clicking OK in the settings window the PEST Control file customized for an SVD Assist run will be populated as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services P
183. at controls the type of smoother used in the multigrid preconditioner The possible values for ISM and their meanings are as 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow ss follows If ISM 0 then ILU 0 smoothing is implemented in the multigrid preconditioner This smoothing requires an additional vector on each multigrid level to store the pivots in the ILU factorization If ISM 1 then Symmetric Gauss Seidel SGS smoothing is implemented in the multigrid preconditioner No additional storage is required for this smoother users may want to use this option if available memory is exceeded or nearly exceeded when using ISM 0 Using SGS smoothing is not as robust as ILU smoothing additional iterations are likely to be required in reducing the residuals In extreme cases the solver may fail to converge as the residuals cannot be reduced sufficiently e Semicoarsening Control in the Multigrid Preconditioner ISC A flag that controls semicoarsening in the multigrid preconditioner The possible values of ISC and their meanings are given as follows If ISC 0 then the rows columns and layers are all coarsened If ISC 1 then the rows and columns are coarsened but the layers are not If ISC 2 then the columns and layers are coarsened but the rows are not If ISC 3 then the rows and layers are coarsened but the columns are not If ISC 4 then there is no coarsening Typically the value of ISC should be
184. at the Import Grid screen Note The NAM file or MODFLOW IN file is an ASCII file containing a list of the input and output data files for the model and their location folder and pathname on the computer If the model files have been moved to a new location the file must be manually updated to reflect the new file location s Once you have selected the desired model data file click on the Open button to continue For more details on the Import MODFLOW process and limitations please refer to s 2 2 of 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help 4 3 the Visual MODFLOW User Documentation Creating Surfaces In VMOD Flex a surface refer to an attribute e g elevation conductivity heads represented as a set of continuous data over an area Surfaces can either be imported directly see Importing Surfaces t63I from various file types using the import utility or created by interpolating one or more points data objects This chapter describes the process of creating surfaces from points data objects Surfaces are required in VMOD Flex for defining the vertical boundaries of structural zones i e horizons in a conceptual model However surfaces can also be used to assign spatially variable attributes to property zones and boundary conditions or for simply visualizing spatial variation using the 2D or 3D Viewers The create surface process allows you to generate surfaces using any numeric attribute
185. ate Child Grid Description yes folow the hotizons elevatona You can refine fhe model lO layers by dividing the zones into proportionately thick layers Zmin 184 170855920891 Min Cell Thickness Zmax 0 1 363 466310940812 Layer Refinement App Exaggeration 0 The first step in defining the vertical grid is selecting the Grid Type There are three different grid types Deformed Uniform and Deformed Uniform Each grid type is described in the following sections Grid Types Deformed In a deformed grid the tops and bottoms of the model layers conform to the horizons elevation You can refine the model layers by diving the structural zones into proportionately thick layers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes ss n AAA Ww i R Mh 57 I 43 29 4 22 118 214 Cross sectional view of deformed grid from Visual MODFLOW Flex A Minimum Cell Thickness must be specified as MODFLOW does not permit lateral discontinuity of layers i e a layer cannot have a thickness of 0 at any point in the layer When horizons are on lapping one another resulting in a zero cell thickness the minimum cell thickness is applied and the horizons are shifted based on the horizon types defined in the Horizon settings See Horizon Typeskz4 section For deformed grids you have the option of refining subdividing each layer into a specified number of equally
186. ate Gradient Solver PCG MODFLOW 2005 Settings Time Steps Solvers 4 PCG Settings Recharge and EVT Max outer iteration MXITER 50 Lake Max inner iteration ITER1 25 Layers Head change criterion HCLOSE 0 01 Rewetting Residual criterion RCLOSE 0 01 Initial Heads Damping factor DAMP DUMPPCG 1 Anisotropy Damping factor for transient stress period DUMF 1 Output Control Relaxation parameter RELAX 1 MODPATH The printout interval IPRPCG 10 Discharge Options Pre conditioning method NPCOND Modified Incomplete Cholesky NPCONG 1 Time Format Estimate of the upper bound NBPOL Calculate esimate Convergence output control MUTPCG Print only the number of iterations MUTPCG 1 Max outer iteration MXITER Max outer iteration e Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Package PCG2 be e Strongly Implicit Procedure Package SIP Is971 e Slice Successive Overrelaxation Package SOR bal e WHS Solver for VMOD Flex WHS s95 e Geometric Multigrid Solver GMG bss e Algebraic Multigrid Methods for Systems SAMG b99 and Algebraic Multigrid Solver AMG only available with MODFLOW 2000 2005 and MODFLOW LGR These solvers and their individual settings can be accessed by selecting MODFLOW Solver from the Run section of VMOD Flex A Solver Setting window will appear similar to the image shown in the following figure with a list for choosing the desired Solver and a listing of the settings for the selected Solver Each new mode
187. ater Services Defining Grids Meshes 331 Once the above settings have been defined click the Generate button to generate the horizontal mesh Once generated the Triangle output results e g number of mesh vertices triangles edges etc are displayed in the text box above the Generate button These results may be copied to the clipboard by right clicking anywhere inside the box and selecting Copy to Clipboard from the pop up menu Polygons Refinement Mesh vertices 1047 Mesh triangles 1813 Mesh edges 2859 Mesh exterior boundary edges 279 x Generate The generated mesh will also display in the adjacent 2D Viewer window If you are not satisfied with the mesh you can modify the settings and regenerate the mesh by selecting the Generate button again If you have selected polygon refinement the mesh may look something similar to below e Define Finite Element Mesh Name Generate Finite Bement Mesh Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch Constrained conforming X Meshing Algorithm i switch Divide and conquer x V Total number of elements Approx 1000 Quality mesh q switch minimum angle 0 30 degrees 20 Refinement V Refinement along all superelement border edges Target element edge length 180 v Refinement along line addins Target element edge length 180 763 Bs V Refinement around point well addins Number of triangles around points 10 Space
188. ater Services Quick Start Tutorials 53 r Conceptual Model 9 OF Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Select Grid EJ Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid2 F Define Model Structure Define Property Zones E Select the Next Step B E Define Boundary Conditions Define Surface Water Network Define Pumping Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions B E Select Grid Type View Finite Hement Mesh EJ View Finite Difference Grid Translate to FEFLOW Model f Convert to MODFLOW Model Convert To Numerical e After clicking on the conversion button a new workflow window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model for this new grid In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on the size and type of grid you used and the complexity of the conceptual model inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help E Visual MODFLOW Fiex conceptual mode TT a TT _e File Tools Workflow Window Help PETA EE Conceptual Modeli gt NumericalGridi Numerical Model x OF g Seat wes Converting conceptual model to numerical model 10100x japoy PWO property p Konatng propery for initial heads the layer number is 2 para Initial Heads Converting Boundary Conditions
189. ation observed vs calculated charts Click on View Charts from the workflow tree and the following window will appear Flow 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services aa VMOD Flex Help Calculated vs Observed Heads Calculated vs Observed Heads Time 1 374 p4 Pa i Z 354 1 e 334 E 1319219 pa 14096 3 14228 a 18297 14211 314 Sepo 13673 7 wi e 15838 A 294 _ 14 Ww 4 rm if 2744 274 294 314 334 354 374 Observed Head m Min Residual 2 7 m at 10897 Standard Error of the Estimate 0 69 m Max Residual 2 23 m at 18364 Root Mean Squared 3 8 m Residual Mean 1 4 m Normalized RMS 4 9 Abs Residual Mean 2 89 m Correlation Coefficient 0 99 To the left of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select individual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart Time Series e In the Charts toolbox under Chart Type select Time Series and the following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 435 View Charts i ra Apply Chart Type Time Series Time Series 382 10932 Calc 10932 Obs 12957 Calc 12957 Obs 12964 Calc a 12964 Obs 13082 Calc A 13082 O
190. ay need to re select this from the combo box e Once you are finished click OK and the new property zone will be created e You can view the Initial Concentration rendering for the full 3D grid by changing the rendering type from Zone to Initial Concentration note when you view the Database values for this new property zone it will show Distributed Values since it contains a range of values for this zone not just a single value Adjusting Style Settings The style settings of either the 2D or 3D views can be adjusted First make the desired property group selected and visible in the Flex Viewer Make the desired 2D viewer active Then right click on the desired property group in the tree as shown below and select Settings 5 C AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid 5 E Run S E Inputs i C Properties Aow O Soeg Settings C Initial He Composite View C Boundary Cong Delete be _ Recharge C Evapotrang Export 5 g H 3D Viewer z C River q Expand to selection ae acta Expand all child nodes C Particles Collapse all i C Forward P i i C Backward Particles i MA Chass The 2D Colors and Contour line settings can be adjusted For more details see Color and Contour settings b43 T 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s64 VMOD Flex Help 10 4 1 Export Properties Any of the model properties can be exported to shapefile see Exportl441 for
191. be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of inner iterations was used for all outer iterations and an appropriate mass balance error was not achieved this value can be increased e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After every outer iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the modeled domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations is within the maximums this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Residual Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 While the head change criterion is used to judge the overall solver convergence the residual criterion is used to judge the convergence of the inner iterations of the solver If the change in successive inner iterations is less than the tolerance specified here in working units of feet or metres then the solver will proceed with the next outer iteration The residual criterion for convergence of 0 001 should be appropriate for most problems However if you notice that on
192. be placed anywhere within the parent grid as long as it does not overlap another child grid Note The child grid cannot be rotated it must be in the same orientation as the parent grid 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 325 Click the Preview button to preview the child grid in the adjacent 2D Viewer Click the Next button to proceed to the next step Vertical Grid Refinement Vertical grid refinement involves selecting which model layers to refine and specifying the refinement ratio for the selected layers amp Define Numerical Grid E m je Define Vertical Grid Refinement Specify End Layer Stat End 2 Refinement ratio Globally for all layers faa _ lt lt Back Cance The top of the child grid must always coincide with the parent grid and therefore the Start layer will always be 1 However the End layer can be any model layer below the top model layer in the simulation domain There are two options for defining the refinement ratio Select Globally for all layers to assign a single refinement ratio to all layers Alternatively select Specify each layer to assign a refinement ratio layer by layer Note Although the top layer must be the start layer vertical refinement does not have to start at the top Assign a refinement ratio of 1 1 to the top layer and it will not be refined Click the Finish button to create the
193. ble amount of memory Detailed information about the GMG solver including comparisons with the AMG solver can be found in the GMG Linear Equation Solver Package PDF documentation located in the Manual folder of your VMOD Flex installation media The solver parameters for the Geometric Multigrid Solver are described below using excerpts from the GMG Linear Equation Solver Package PDF documentation located in the Manual folder of your VMOD Flex installation media e Max outer iterations MXITER The maximum number of outer iterations For linear problems MXITER can be set to 1 For nonlinear problems MXITER needs to be larger but rarely more than 100 The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand e Max inner iterations ITER The maximum number of PCG iterations for each linear solution A value of 100 is typically sufficient It is frequently useful to specify a smaller 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 304 VMOD Flex Help number for nonlinear problems so as to prevent an excessive number of inner iterations This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the current set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand e Adaptive Damping Control IADAMP IADAMP is a flag that controls adaptive damping f ADAMP 0 then the value assigned to DAMP is used as a constant damping parameter If IADAMP 0 then the value of DAMP
194. bs E Show All Observation 360 4 bene poe Hade x1 bs oe raph na 7 o Layer 3 14211 Calc C Layer 4 14211 Obs E Layer 5 18364 Calc Layer 6 18364 Obs S 338 ot E 10885 E 10886 E 10897 E 10904 7 4 E 10906 7 z E 10914 te o 10915 E 10917 317 2 F 10918 E 10922 7 10932 E 10938 E 10946 4 E 10947 E 10949 295 6 E 10950 E 10951 m 10952 10953 10957 E 10958 E 10975 E 11014 274 4 E 12162 0 365 730 1095 1460 1825 2190 2555 2920 3285 3650 4015 Time day Mass Balance e Click on the Mass Balance button to launch Mass Balance charts e The features of the Mass Balance graphs are described in the VMOD Classic Interface documentation Please see section 9 3 3 Mass Balance Graphs Zone Budget e Click on the Zone Budget button to launch Zone Budget charts this option is only available if you have run Zone Budget see Select Engines se for more details e The features of the Zone Budget graphs are described in the VMOD Classic Interface documentation Please see section 9 3 4 Zone Budget Graphs Transport Calculated vs Observed Concentrations If your model included a transport run you need to choose what chart types to view at the top of the View Charts window select Transport from the Parameter combo box 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 436 VMOD Flex Help To the left of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select ind
195. by MODFLOW and the other engines The files will be created in the directory defined in the previous step aa VMOD Flex Help Veas MODFLOW Pex domol AIRPORT grit Runi E Vew Ean Gid E Dedna Procanes E Dera Boundary Condtons 5 E Ssa the Not Stes I Define Observation Zones E Define Observation Wels I Define Zine Budget Zones E Define Patices d g Select Fun Type Basa B rgan O Tanase B Aan Namea Enges AO avat 42328 PM STR Package EEEN Sdimbege Water Services 4 6 jae 423 28 PM Translate Sat 4 23 28 PM Transite Boundary for ied 423 28 PM Translate Boundary for Layer 3 4 23 28 PM Tranwiate intial Heads for Layer 1 4 23 28 PM Transiste intial Heads for Laver M2 4 23 28 PM Translate intial Heads for Layer 3 4 23 28 PM Base Package trewater ratio 4 23 28 PM BAS Package 423 28 PM Nex naded 423 28 PM OC Package 42229 PM NOC Py 42329 PM No Dey Cot transistor newize 42929 PM No Dry Cal Package beneter Free 4 72 73 PM NAM Package 42029 PM shana Fie vandster heute 422 29 PM theme Fie transistor Fraize 42 90M ZNRINEITZIENISUTAN Trasee feted ETENTINEITEIENNSND Tieralstion inched succeishdly e Click the Next step button to proceed You will arrive at the Run Engines Step Run Engines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials O OF gt j Stop EA Define Modeling Objectives Run Numer
196. cal parameter representing the resistance to flow between the surface water body and the aquifer this field is read only and is calculated using the formula described below e Riverbed Kz Vertical hydraulic conductivity of the riverbed material e River Width Width of the river When a polyline is used to define the river geometry the default leakance formula is as follows RCHLNG x WIDTH x K x UCTOCOND COND RBTHICK When a polygon is used to define the river geometry the default leakance formula is as follows RCHLNG x WIDTH x K x UCTOCOND COND RBTHICK where COND is the Leakance RCHLNG is the reach length of the river line in each grid cell WIDTH is the River Width in each grid cell K is the Riverbed Kz UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same L and T units used by COND RBTHICK is the Riverbed Thickness DX is the length of each grid cell in the X direction 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 305 DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default Leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the River Leakance value Riverbed Thickness Riverbed Kz and River Width are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for River boundary conditions can be specified using polylines or p
197. cannot refine coarsen areas of a grid that overlap a child grid It is recommended that you refine coarsen the parent grid before creating a child grid To edit the grid lines in a numerical grid follow the steps below From the Conceptual Model Tree right click on the Numerical Grid and select Edit from the pop up menu Horizontal Grid Refinement 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 322 VMOD Flex Help The Grid Refinement dialog provides options for refining coarsening a numerical grid These options are described below B Grid refinement Define grid refinement Edit rows Edit columns Select editing options Refine in an interval v Settings Start End Refine by lt 1O eee Add datato view Tip You can add data objects e g boundaries wells site maps from the data explorer to the 2D Viewer preview to assist you in determining the areas in which horizontal refinement coarsening should be applied Select the desired data objects from the Data Explorer and the data will be displayed in the 2D Viewer preview Select the Edit Rows radio button to add remove grid lines rows along the Y direction of the numerical grid or select the Edit column radio button to add remove grid lines columns along the X direction of the numerical grid From the Select Editing Options combo box select either Refine in an interval or Coarsen in an interval Refining in an interval will add rows columns within a specif
198. ce Excel file has the map names pre defined Take a moment to review the required fields for the Wells import 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Well heads Well ID XY Coordinates Elevation and Bottom e Observation points Logger Id Logger Z Head observation date Observed head e Next gt gt The Data Import preview will appear e Finish The Heads_ Observations will now appear as a new data object in the Data tree Take a moment and visualize this in the 3D Viewer Next you need to add these raw observation wells as observation points for the numerical model e Be sure that the Head_Observations data object is selected in the Data tree e Click on the button located under the toolbox in the Define Observation Wells workflow step e The observation wells will be added to the display and the numerical model tree You should see several green points in the model domain that represent the locations where head measurements were taken in this example all the head observations are in layer 1 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 18 VMOD Flex Help Inspect Define Observation Wells Views gt Head_Observations1 Update Method Add Replace Merge Ee XP PROF 7 Layer 1 G3 Row 1 B Column 1 gt 3D Toolbox Select Observation Object Layer 1 Row 30 Column 21 X 602 94 1155 29 Atrribute e Now is a goo
199. ce layers e Add remove and modify wells and associated well data including screens intervals diver observation points well tops well paths for horizontal only and pumping schedules Create surfaces from points data objects e Using one or more points data objects generate surface layers using Inverse Distance Kriging or Natural Neighbor interpolation methods e Configure the interpolation method by modifying various interpolation settings e Clip the generated surface to the horizontal extents of a specified polygon data object Digitize new data objects using 2D Viewer Using the 2D Viewer editing tools digitize a new polyline polygon or points data object 2D amp 3D Visualization e Visualize data objects and conceptual model features using interactive 2D and 3D Viewers e Use various screen configurations to display multiple 3D or 2D Viewers simultaneously e g cascade tile horizontally vertically e Zoom rotate and move data within the viewer using your mouse e Modify viewer settings including the background color and vertical exaggeration 3D Viewer only e In 3D Viewers remove parts of the displayed data by creating cutaways along the X Y and Z axis e In 2D Viewers select individual data object features points line shapes and then view the corresponding attribute data in spreadsheet view and vice versa Edit data object geometry in 2D Viewer e Modify existing data objects by manually digitizing points polylines
200. ce value Lakebed Thickness Lakebed Kz are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for Lake boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Specified Flux 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 313 For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Specified Flux FHB1 package for MODFLOW After translation the specified flux input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname FHB file Currently translation of this boundary condition is not supported for finite element models The Specified Flux boundary condition allows you to specify flow as a function of time at selected model cells FHB1 is an alternative and or supplement to the recharge RCH package for simulating specified flow boundary conditions The main differences between the FHB1 package and the recharge package are as follows e FHB1 package can simulate specified flux on the top side bottom or intermediate layers in the simulation domain whereas the recharge package can only be applied to the top and intermediate layers e FHB1 package allows you to specify a starting flux and an ending flux for each stress period if transient The package then uses linear interpolation to compute values of flow at each model time step For more information on the Specified Flow FHB1 package please refer to Documentation of a Co
201. ces VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 493 Visual MODFLOW D SampleProject cm sample project data MODFLOW NumericalGrid1 Run MODFLOW 2005 sample project wmf ar001 m x File Maps Graphs Tools Help 13000 12900 10900 80p0 6090 a 8J a Xs ya Z b T T T T T T Row I o 2000_ p 4000 6000 000 10000 12000 13000 Colom Alife Je ert F over E tain Layer Q 1 2 Help 30 Ie save nap erao Aray Balen MT3D RT3D Overlay C O Conc001 Time 1000 00000 day Stress period 2 Time step 1 Bw YL BORO FOG Bas sm Figure 9 Pathlines in VMOD Classic 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW D SampleProject cm sample project data MODFLOW NumericalGrid1 Run MODFLOW 2005 sampleproject vmf Var002 Bex File Maps Graphs Tools Help View Column View Row view Layer oto revos Next Concentratio 12900 13000 0 5 10900 sopo PLS y E a 3 PUZ i Pilt A 2 a 8 e a 8 g F X 4708 2 a 3 Y 6702 4 S B Z 333 6 r r L r 1_ 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 13000 Row Di 39 Column J 29 i Fl Fo FS FA FS gt NFO NED NFS yore FS Quer lO mai Zoon E zoon Fe vert E3 over F10 n oro Palin Erer MT3D AT3D Ov
202. ces 204 VMOD Flex Help 4 4 Defining an Interpolation Domain using a Polygon When creating a surface the interpolation domain is automatically calculated from the X and Y extents of the specified point s data set There may be times when you do not want to use the entire points data set to generate a surface In this case you can manually define the interpolation domain Xmax Ymax Xmin Ymin by specifying new values in the interpolation settings grid or you can use an imported or digitized polygon data object To define the interpolation domain using a polygon data object follow the steps below In the Create Surface dialog box select the Use a polygon extent check box Select a polygon data object from the Data Explorer and then click the button E Interpolation Domain x Max 574438 89028680592 Y Max 4863746 207869472 x Min 573851 95385850687 Y Min 4863459 610148631 E Advanced Settings Number of Neighbors 10 Grid Settings It Defines the number of data nodes along axis M Interpolation Domain MV Use a polygon extent Pobgon_boundary OK Cancel Help When the polygon data object is selected the interpolation domain values in the settings grid will update with the X Y extents of the selected polygon data object Creating New Data Objects The 2D Viewer provides interactive drawing tools which allow you to create your own polygon polyline and point data objects Thi
203. ched beforehand 50 iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Acceleration Factor Default 1 The acceleration factor controls the magnitude of head changes between iterations The acceleration factor must be positive Values larger than one will result in larger head changes between iterations the solution may be approached faster but it may also overshoot the solution more easily Values less than one will result in smaller head changes thus requiring more iterations to reach a solution 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 399 e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the model domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of iterations is less than the maximum this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Printout Interval
204. child grid 8 2 Create Finite Element Mesh Quick Overview 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 326 VMOD Flex Help Instructions Create the superelement mesh define the mesh size and define vertical layering type and resolution Pre requisites The Conceptual Model has been defined 263 Result A finite element mesh is created Next Steps Convert Conceptual Model to FEFLOW finite element modelbss From the Select Grid Type step in the Conceptual Model workflow click on the Define Finite Element Mesh button file J Window Help Werkdlow Po g 25d o Define Finite Difference Grid Define Finite Element Mesh Conceptual Model 20 Viewer 1 The Define Finite Element Mesh wizard will appear on your screen where you can configure the properties of the finite element mesh 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 327 e Define Finite Element Mesh yenida Name FinteElementMesh1 Design Superelement Mesh Add In Lines Points Polygons V Model Boundary 7 e e OOo V Polygon1 V river2 Add In Lines Points Polygons Specify a unique name for the finite element mesh in the Name text field Defining the Superelement Mesh The Superelement Mesh represents the main geometry points and segments of the model region from which finite elements are generated A superelement mesh is defined using the model boundary polygo
205. chlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Select Zone1 structural zone from the conceptual model tree under the Structure Zones node as shown below Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method eee Property Zone 1 Name Property Zone 1 Descripti Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz e Select the Group of parameters that will be defined e g Conductivity Storage or Initial heads The data input grid below will display the appropriate parameters based on which 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help parameter group is selected For example if conductivity is selected the data input grid will show the parameters Kx Ky and Kz The data input grid will already be populated with the default values specified in the Project Settings File gt Project Settings Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping d m s Constant z 4E 06 Ky m s Constant z 4E 06 Kz m s Constant x 4E 07 ui e Type the desired values for the property zone Kx 4E 6 Ky 4E 6 Kz 4E 7 e Click on the Save button located on the right side of the window e Repeat these steps for the other property zone e Click on the Use Structural Zone button e Select Zone2
206. classes is modified rows are automatically removed or added to the color table For the Elevation color scheme the maximum value will always be Red and the minimum value will always be Blue but the gradient between will change automatically depending on the specified number of classes e VMOD Flex automatically calculates the intervals based on the defined specified number of classes or equal intervals e Once the settings have been defined click the Apply button to show the changes in an active 2D or 3D Viewer Area General Operations Style M Show Area Fill Labels Colors m Fill Settings Lines Vertices Pattern WME AM EE MZ Diagonal Transparency D Preview Select the Show Area Fill check box to show hide the area file If unchecked only the shape boundary will be visible in 2D and 3D Viewers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 240 VMOD Flex Help Select the color method and fill pattern symbology from the appropriate combo boxes Choose from the following color methods e Specified Shape is colored using the color specified in the General node e By Attribute Shape is colored based on an attribute See Color By Attribute section for more information on color rendering e Custom Specify a color for the area fill This color will overwrite the default color defined in the general settings for thi
207. comes desaturated The LAYAVG value determines the method of computing interblock transmissivity Following are the five methods used in assigning the LAYAVG value e 0 Harmonic mean interblock transmissivity Default setting for MODFLOW 96 and MODFLOW 2000 e 10 Arithmetic mean interblock transmissivity e 20 Logarithmic mean interblock transmissivity e 30 Arithmetic mean saturated thickness times logarithmic mean hydraulic conductivity e 40 Harmonic mean interblock hydraulic conductivity introduced in BCF4 package Default Required setting for MODFLOW SURFACT Note that the LAYAVG values are two digits with a factor of ten For example a LAYCON value of 21 represents an unconfined layer where the interblock transmissivity is calculated using a logarithmic mean The Layer column in the Layer Settings window see following figure is the layer number which is automatically numbered as one row for each layer of the model grid The LAYCON column is the Input LAYCON value which includes the first digit tens stored as the LAYAVG value Interblock transmissivity and the second digit ones stored as the LAYCON value Layer type Thus the one Input LAYCON value holds the identification for each layer of the model grid The Interblock transmissivity column displays the LAYAVG value and descriptive name associated with each layer of the model The available LAYAVG settings can be chosen from a picklist by clicking the down
208. conjugate gradient iterations at the end of each multigrid cycle Activating this option can decrease execution times for some problems but it will also increase the amount of memory used by the solver e The Print Flag OUTAMG frame allows you to select between various print options e CONTROL Parameter Default 2 e 1 reuse of the setup phase is not used e 2 reuse of the setup phase will be used Recommended e 3 reuse of the setup phase will be used and SSC will be used 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 402 VMOD Flex Help 10 10 1 5 Recharge and Evapotranspiration Translate General 4 General Settings Recharge options NRCHOP Recharge is only applied to the uppermost active layer NRCHOP 3 MODFLOW 2005 Evapotrenspiration options NEVTOP EVT is only applied to the uppermost active layer NEVTOP 3 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Recharge options NRCHOP NRCHOP is the recharge option code Recharge The Recharge zone distribution can be applied to any of the user specified model Layers If the recharge is assigned to the top grid layer and some cells in the top layer become dry during the course of the simulation or if some cells in the top layer are designated as no flow cells the MODFLOW program allows the recharge to be applied to the grid cells in the upper most act
209. crease the new head in cells which are wetted e Change the Wetting method that controls cell wetting e Change the Wetting head option that calculates the new head in the wetted cell e Try using the SIP or PCG solver and modifying the solver parameters e For steady state solutions start with good initial head estimates This will provide good indications of which cells should be wet and dry and therefore conversions of cells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ao VMOD Flex Help between wet and dry will be minimized 10 10 1 9 Initial Heads In VMOD Flex the Initial Heads are defined at the stage of Defining the Properties For more details please see the section Define Property Zones Initial Heads sea Translate General 4 General Settings Initial head options Use Specified Heads 5 MODFLOW 2005 Previous MODFLOW Run HDS file Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control 5 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Initial head options Initial haad options e Use Specified Heads will use the values that are defined for Initial Heads at the Define Properties step e Use Ground Elevation will use the elevation values for the of layer 1 e Use Previous MODFLOW Run requires you to select a HDS file from a previous MODFLOW Run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow A Caution Heads fr
210. ct Kx as shown below you should then see a color flood of the Kx values 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 155 Visual MODFLOW Flex pest tutorial SAMPLE2 grid Run1 File Tools Window Workflow Help D Salo oor jo amp Data i sample2 Elevation SE Define Modeling Objectives Inspect Define Properti i jperties amp sample2 Elevation 2 5 Define Numerical Model I VMod Imported Well Create Grid Nees Imported Observatiol S Import Model T Layer P gt pilot points zone1 a View Edit Grid J ps pilot points zone2 J Define Properties 1 0 e pilot points zone3 Define Boundary Conditions pilot points zone4 Ef Select the Next Step How II Define Observation Zones 1 I Define Observation Wells II Define Zone Budget Zones Column IJ Define Particles 7 D 5 Select Run Type PEST Run 3D Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines Todhar 5 EJ View Results Conductivity View Charts View Maps Database lt Mm r e Assign Z Model Explorer nd pilot points zone e pilot points zonez Color Kx m d pilot points zone 12 1609 k ea 44 0243 Outputs 75 8878 107 7513 Drawdown M1 139 6148 Inputs 1
211. ct Run Type J a E PEST Run 30 Single Run 3D Translate Run Numerical Engines 5 EJ View Results Toolbox View Charts Legend J View Maps Color Concentration 0 0 2172 Model Explorer 6 0 6517 S E Initial Concentrations Conc001 0 8689 ity Species Parameters 1 0861 Conc001 Bulk Density kicuas Longitudinal Dispersion 1 5206 5 Boundary Conditions iy Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 Constant Head 3 PumpingWell1 S Observations Heads Observations Concentration Observations Outputs 2 Flow f Heads Drawdown S Transport VE Conc001 iim ii Layer 1 Row 26 Column 26 X 736 49 Y 1274 88 Concentration 0 e The concentration contours will be plotted for the first transport output time in this case the first transport output time is 1 day e In order to see the concentration results at the other output times you need to advance the output time Click on the Next Time Step button located on the toolbar above the Layer view as shown below Alternately you can expand the list of output times and navigate directly to the desired output time e This display will then update with a plot of plot of concentration contours for selected output time 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help e Advanced to the last output time 7300 days and the concent
212. d The advantages of multigrid methods over the other iterative solvers mentioned are 1 the effectiveness of the multigrid solver is not dependent on the initial head distribution and 2 for many problems of interest the rate of convergence scales approximately linearly with the size of the domain unlike the other solvers where the rate of convergence increases nonlinearly Demmel 1997 The Solver settings window contains a number of user defined solver settings which can influence the speed and effectiveness of the AMG solver e Max Iterations MXITER Default 50 MXITER is the maximum number of times that the AMG routines will be called to obtain a solution MXITER is never less than 2 and rarely more than 50 MXITER often equals 2 when the problem is linear all layers are confined and no boundary conditions are nonlinear the Evapotranspiration Drain and River Packages for example produce nonlinear boundary conditions For nonlinear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 400 VMOD Flex Help problems MXITER generally is 50 or less however values near 50 and sometimes even larger are needed for more severely nonlinear problems Max Cycles MXCYC Default 50 For each call to the solver AMG cycles through one or more sequences of coarsening and refinement The solver is limited to a maximum of MXCYC cycles per call to the solver For most problems convergence for each iteration is achieved in less than 50 cycles
213. d max values for the X and Y co ordinates Alternatively the extents can be calculated from a bounding polygon Select the option Calculate extents from a polygon object You will need to import a polygon object from 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 353 SHP or DXF File that contains just a single closed polygon and provide this is as an input For details on importing polygon objects see the section Import Polygons fisa Once the polygon is imported it will appear in the Data tree in the top left Select click on this polygon from the tree then click on the blue arrow button under Calculate extents from a polygon The polygon should appear and the X and Y extents will be calculated accordingly note VMOD Flex will calculate a minimum bounding rectangle from an irregularly shaped polygon in order to calculate the X and Y min max extents Define Vertical Grid Specify the number of layers you want for the grid In the table below you can manually define a constant flat layer elevation for the top of each layer and the bottom of the bottommost layer by default VMOD Flex will calculate equally thick layers At this step you can also defined varying layer elevations by using surfaces This is intended for simple numerical models where there are pancake layer geology If your model has layers that pinchouts and or discontinuities it is advised that you follow the Conceptual Mode
214. d time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed Select Run Type and Engines e From the Select Run Type window choose Single Run From the Compose Engines step you will see MODFLOW 2005 is selected along with MT3DMS For the first run we will run the flow solution only without transport De select the checkbox beside MT3DMS Click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 109 MODFLOW 2005 Translation Settings At the Translate step you have the option to adjust the various parameters and flags for the MODFLOW packages and run time settings Available options include Settings General Time Steps only appropriate for transient simulations Solvers Recharge and Evapotranspiration package Lake package settings Layer types Rewetting options Initial Heads Anisotropy and Output control e MODFLOW 2005 Settings e Enter 7300 for steady state simulation length in the grid in the main window T Ea X gt Translate 3 5 Define Modeling Objectives T la 5 EJ Define Numerical Model Translate EJ Create Grid E impot Mode E View Edit Grd Gaal E Define Properties Settings Property Package LPF E Define Boundary Conditions Bl Select the Next Step MODFLOW 2005 Run Type Steady State E Define Observation Wells Settings f m oye PERESNING og Define Zone Budget Zones on ave E
215. dditional points Adding Head Observation Data The Observation Data table is used to enter the observed values at specified times for the selected observation point To add observations to the Observation Data table follow the steps below e Select Observations from the Data to Display box e Select the well from the Well Heads table for which observation data will be added e Select the desired observation point from the Observation Points table e Click the Add Row button from the Observation Data toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the time at which the head was observed in the Time field e Enter the observed head values in the Head field 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 225 Adding Well Tops The Well tops table is used to enter the elevation points along the well path where the well intersects with a horizon Well top information can be used in VMOD Flex to create surfaces which can then be used to define conceptual model horizons For more information on creating surfaces from well tops please see Converting Well Tops to Points Data Objectks2 section To add well top information to the Well Top table follow the steps below e Select Well Tops from the Data to Display box e Select the well from the Well Heads table for which well top data will be added e Click the Add Row button from the Well Tops toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the location of the well top as a
216. define the flow property values for the geological formations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 279 Visual MODFLOW Flex Exam unl al u9 File Tools Window Help Workflow ox ERTA e O l i Data amp ground E Define Modeling Objectives Define Property Zones layer2top EJ Collect Data Objects tayer2 bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model O boundary EJ Define Model Structure Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones MZ chd east J Define Property Zones El 2 GZ chd west H 6 Step Use Structural Zone s ez 5 MG rivers B Se Structural Ze fr e Use Polygon Data Object Sa Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Model Explorer Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary S E Structure Horizons Horizon1 Horizon2 Horizon3 Zones M Zone1 M Zone2 C Properties 3 Simulation Domain z Model Domain CH Boundary Conditions Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Quick Overview Instructions Pre requisites Result Next Steps Define flow properties for the conceptual model Structural Zones are createdh7o lf you wish to use a property distribution you have imported or created surfaces If you wish to use shapefiles yo
217. del parameters some of these runs may produce dry cells and as a result MODFLOW assigns head values equal to 1 0e30 to all the dry cells This can cause the objective function to be skewed and the subsequent model runs to fail to converge If the Keep minimum saturated thickness for the bottom layer option is activated by assigning an appropriate head value to the bottom cell MODFLOW will keep the bottom cell saturated It prevents the column from drying out ensures that PEST will continue running even though the calculated head is actually below the bottom layer of the model and helps with model convergence It is recommended to not activate this option in the first run of a model because it is important to know if the dry cells exist or not and by preventing the column from drying out the model results could be misleading Hints For Using Dry Cell Wetting Cell re wetting often promotes a non converging or unstable solution which may be indicated by cells cycling between wet and dry If this happens we recommend you try the following e Make inactive any cells that you know should never become wet e Increase the Wetting threshold value This makes it more difficult for a cell to be wetted and therefore helps stop MODFLOW from repeatedly turning a cell on and then off again However the solution may become less accurate since cells that should become wet might stay dry e Modify the Wetting factor value This will increase or de
218. ductivity and select Export as shown below 5 E Run Inputs 6 0 Aow i M Aheanrstinn z C Backward Particles Z AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid Settings Composite View Delete 3D Viewer Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all Walle The following dialog will appear note at the bottom you have the option to choose Points Shapefile or Polygon Shapefile format 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow aaa B Save As GO gt Computer gt SYSTEM C ExportTest L Organize E Views v BR New Folder Favorite Links Search Name Date modified Type i Documents This folder is empty More Folders E Desktop B Administrator Ji Public F j Computer an amp SYSTEM C a DATA D e DVD CD RW Drive E A Filename Conductivity SHP ESRI polygon shapfile SHP Hide Folders Click OK Depending on the type of data you may have additional settings The following options are available for Properties B Export Select Co ordinate System World Co ordinate X Add Column tames T Null Value in Inactive Cells 7 SiSiSSiS88 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services aaa VMOD Flex Help Choose which attribute
219. e Finish button to generate the finite element mesh The finite element mesh will now appear in the Conceptual Model tree under the Model Domain node as shown below where it can be displayed in a 2D or 3D Viewer window and used in Translation to Finite Element Modelbsel 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 333 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 334 VMOD Flex Help 9 9 1 Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models VMOD Flex allows you to translate your conceptual model to multiple finite difference models for running and analyzing in VMOD Flex or to one or more finite element models for running in FEFLOW During translation VMOD Flex automatically populates the specified grid or mesh with the defined geological formations boundary conditions and property zone attributes and creates the necessary input files for loading into your desired simulator For MODFLOW finite difference models a numerical modeling workflow b4 will appear where you can view edit the properties and boundaries on the numerical grid then translate and run MODFLOW and view the results For finite element models VMOD Flex will generate the FEM problem file for loading into FEFLOW Note FEFLOW v 5 4 or later is required for opening and running FEFLOW models This chapter walks you through the steps involved in translating a conceptual model to a numerical model and includes information on the foll
220. e J W 2000 Robustness and scalability of algebraic multigrid SIAM Journal on Scientific Computing v 21 no 5 p 1886 1908 Clement T P RT3D v1 0 1997 RT3D v2 5 2001 A Modular Computer code for Simulating Reactive Multi species Transport in 3 Dimensional groundwater systems Pacific Northwest National Laboratory Rihland WA 99352 USA PNNL SA 11720 Found on line at http bioprocess pnl gov rt3d htm Cooley R L 1983 Some new procedures for numerical solution of variably saturated flow problems Water Resources Research v19 no 5 p 1271 1285 Demmel J W 1997 Applied Numerical linear algebra Philadelphia Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics 419 p Domenico P A and Schwartz F W 1990 Physical and Chemical Hydrogeology John Wiley and Sons Inc New York NY 824 pp 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 5o2 VMOD Flex Help Driscoll F G 1986 Groundwater and Wells 2nd Edition Johnson Division St Paul Minnesota 1089 pp Deutsch C V and Journel A G 1998 GSLIB Geostatistical Software Library and User s Guide Oxford University Press N Y 369 pp Fetter C W 1993 Contaminant Hydrogeology Macmillan Publishing Co New York NY 458 pp Fetter C W 1994 Applied Hydrogeology 3rd Edition Macmillan Publishing Co New York NY 691 pp Fetter C W 1999 Contaminant Hydrogeology 2nd Edition Prentice Hall Inc New Jersey 500 pp Freeze R A and Cherry J
221. e in addition to those required when PEST is run in parameter estimation mode One of these variables is PHIMLIM This specifies the degree of model to measurement misfit that is allowed to occur in the present optimisation process Because the attainment of a good model to measurement fit and the simultaneous enforcement of homogeneity constraints may place conflicting requirements on parameter values a compromise between the two must be reached The user determines the compromise level by setting a maximum model to measurement misfit that he she will tolerate this misfit being expressed in terms of the measurement objective function The maximum permissible value of the measurement objective function ie PHIMLIM should be set a little higher than the objective function that it is possible to achieve without any regularisation constraints being enforced Each prior information equation included in the parameter estimation process must be assigned a weight As was discussed above weights are calculated on the basis of geostatistical information available or assumed for the model area If an observation or prior information equation is used for regularisation purposes then it is assigned to the observation group regul As part of its regularisation functionality PEST adjusts the weights assigned to all members of this group during each iteration of the optimisation process however the relative weight values within this g
222. e Length m 1 Text Y C a S xl M Source Data Preview x elevation soil_type 536212 689999999 4814029 99999898 GB 01 323 5 Coarse Gravel 536212 689999999 4814029 99999898 GB 01 323 5 213 5 297 5 Medium Sand 536212 689999999 4814029 99999898 GB 01 323 5 213 5 271 5 Gravel lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab described above Next click on the Tops tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields Top Z elevation or measured depth of formation Top ID formation name e g Sand1 Sand2 Clay etc Please note the well top data in the source file must be formatted as follows well ID Top ID Top X Well1 Fill 6 5 Well1 Sand1 26 Well1 Clay 52 Well2 Fill 4 Well2 Sand1 17 Well2 Clay 94 Well Heads with Well Path 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 178 VMOD Flex Help fl File Import lol x m Data Mapping Wellheads Path Source column Target field Fill Unit Category Units Multiplier Data Type x x Length m 1 Numeric Y Y Length m 1 Numeric ID None None none 1 Numeric IZ Elevation X Length m 1 Numeric x Y lt Create gt one M Source Data Preview lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Help This option is only available for deviated horizonta
223. e SSOR ISOLVE 2 e Modified Incomplete Cholesky ISOLVE 3 The Modified Incomplete Cholesky method usually converges faster than the other two method options but it requires significantly more memory If SSOR is chosen you must specify a relaxation factor Dispersion tensor cross terms The GCG Solver has two options for dealing the cross derivative terms of the dispersion tensor e Lump all dispersion cross terms to the right hand side NCRS 0 will place all the dispersion tensor cross terms to the right hand side of the matrix equation and consider them as known values This method approximates the equation the loss of accuracy is generally insignificant but is highly efficient reduces the memory requirement by nearly two thirds since there are significantly less unknown terms to be solved For further detail please refer to the MT3DMS Documentation and User s Guide e Include full dispersion tensor NCRS 1 will keep all the dispersion tensor cross terms on the left hand side of the matrix equation and consider them as unknown terms This method gives the exact matrix equation but is memory intensive since there are significantly more unknown terms to be solved For details refer to the MT3DMS Documentation and User s Guide Initial Step Size DTO Default 0 The Initial Step Size is used to override the automatically calculated initial time step The user can assign a value to be used for the first iteration of the solutio
224. e Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed Define Pumping Wells To generate a pumping well boundary condition you must have a wells data object loaded in the VMOD Flex project You will begin by importing a wells data object into this project e File Import from the main menu Select Well as the data object type to choose the Source File Browse to My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles Pumping_Wells xls file e Open e Next gt gt The next window will show a preview of the data to be imported 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 100 VMOD Flex Help e Data Import oo o E Sa Work sheet and range Select Worksheet From row Sheeti X 1 Preview Source Data Row Well Id x Y Elevation Well bottom Screen Id Screen top Z all Supply Well1 1415 535 18 5 0 1 5 gl2 Supply Well2 1463 50 184 0 1 5 f lt back _Net gt gt Conce Hep e Next gt gt VMOD Flex provides you with various options to import well data In this window you must select to import the well heads screens and pumping schedules e Well heads with the following data e Pumping Schedule check box Soer E Select the type of wells to import 9 Vertical D Deviated Horizontal Select the format of the vertical data in your data source Hevation Measured depths Select the type of data you want to import Well
225. e WHS solver 0 and 1 Level 0 requires more outer iterations but less memory Level 1 requires fewer outer iterations but more memory While convergence of the solver requires fewer iterations with a factorization level of 1 the memory required to run the solver increases with this factorization level Also the work per iteration increases with the level 1 factorization such that the total solution time may not be less than the solution time using level 0 factorization The Strongly Implicit Procedure also known as SIP is a method for solving a large system of simultaneous linear equations by iterations The advantage of the SIP solver is that it is very stable and generally converges to a solution but often very slowly It is not as fast as the PCG method but it requires less memory to compute the final solution Because each equation involves up to seven unknown values of head and because the set of unknown values changes from one equation to the next throughout the grid the equations for the entire grid must be solved simultaneously at each time step This package is described in Chapter 12 of the MODFLOW manual included with your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The solver parameters for the SIP method are described below Maximum Number of Iterations Default 200 This is the upper limit on the number of iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be considered if a convergent solution is not reached bef
226. e data being imported If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 170 VMOD Flex Help File Import _Soucecoumn Tatget fied F UntCatego Po Evaton Eevan E A e fen e E en o O Surface data will usually only consist of three columns X Y and Attribute Data elevation conductivity etc VMOD Flex will automatically map the source columns to the target fields You can preview the mapped data before importing into VMOD Flex 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 1 5 Working with Your Data 171 ini xi Geographic information for the source data Coordinate Systems UTM Zone 17N NAD83 Datum NORTH AMERICAN 1983 CONUS x mM Local Coodinate System lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel L He _ Click the Next button to finish the import process Upon importing a new data object will be added to the Data Explorer Wells VMOD Flex supports the following file types for well data Excel XLS To import wells follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Wells from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Na
227. e e Next Step z E er e Pumping Well Boundary Condition Define SI Sele Name Pe PumpingWell1 Trenslate Description Pun Nu hew R Vie Vie Select Wells Data Object J Pumping_Wells1 Net gt Cancel Help e Next gt gt in the preview screen e Next gt gt to accept the default which is to include all the wells e Finish The pumping wells have now be added to the numerical model e In order to see these wells you need to turn off the Recharge coverage and change to layer 3 e Click on the box beside Recharge in the model explorer to remove the check box e Change to Layer 3 as explained earlier You should see the two points representing the wells located in the lower right corner of the model domain as shown in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 104 VMOD Flex Help Inspect Define Boundary Conditions Views v Layer Toolbox Wells Edit Assign KP PROF Layer View Layer 3 Row 63 Column 55 X 1467 64 Y 346 49 Atrribute e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed e Select Define Observation Wells Define Head Observations Field observations of groundwater heads and fluxes are essential in order to calibrate the results obtained by MODFLOW In this exe
228. e workflow selection screen will appear e Select Numerical Modeling and the Numerical Modeling workflow will load e In this step you define the objectives of your model and the default parameters 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help sample File Tools Workflow Window Help DEH O Data E Data aio jopoyy PP No kinetic reactions Available Engines USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET Avallatile Run Numerical Engines EE View Results Kx m s Ke Hydraulic Conductivity X Direction e For this scenario the default objectives will be fine e Click Next Step to proceed Loading the Model Files e At this step you can choose to create a new empty numerical grid or import an existing project e Click the Import from Model button e In the next screen click the Browse button and then navigate to the folder that contains your Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project e Select the file and click Open to continue The import will start and you will see the status in the progress window e During the import there are a few things to observe 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s Visual MODFLOW Flex demo Numencal Model u9 Fi
229. eate Grid EJ Import Model View Edit Grid 0000005 DRUMCO grid Run View Imported Grid Views 7 Layer 1 HA 7 Row Column 3D Toolbox FF W Exaggeration 10 Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wireframe Column View Row View Layer 1 Row 19 Column 1 X 7 29 815 77 Atrribute The numerical grid will appear as a node in the model tree as highlighted in red You can right click on this item in the tree and select Settings In addition the Numerical Grid can be added to a stand alone 3D view to do this right click and select 3D Viewer 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 356 VMOD Flex Help a AIRPORT2 REVISED 5 Simulation Domain o F pagpa Domain i J E puts GL Properties i 5 0 Row bo Bw al InitialHeads 5 ro Boundary Conditions E Constant Heads is CJ Rivers C Recharges 8 C Pumping Wells 0 Particles Outputs i V Heads ST Forward Pathlines The numerical grid can be exported to shapefile see Exportlaai for more details When you are finished with viewing the grid click Next Step to proceed to the Define Properties step 10 4 Define Properties At this step you can view edit and define the flow properties for the model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services
230. ecified Head package requires the following information for each specified head grid cell for each stress period Start Head Specified head value at the beginning of the stress period Stop Head Specified head value at the end of the stress period Supported Geometry The geometry for Specified Head boundary conditions can be specified using Polylines or Polygons River The River boundary condition is used to simulate the influence of a surface water body on the groundwater flow Surface water bodies such as rivers streams lakes and swamps may either contribute water to the groundwater system or act as groundwater discharge zones depending on the hydraulic gradient between the surface water body and the groundwater system For finite difference models VMOD Flex uses the River Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for River grid cells is stored in projectname RIV file Currently translation of river boundary conditions is not supported for finite element FEFLOW translations The MODFLOW River Package simulates the surface water groundwater interaction via a seepage layer separating the surface water body from the groundwater system see following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 303 Head in Cell Impermeable Valls O rrema 7 Arv Ariy Ariy Qriv Schematic of River Boundary Required Data The MODFLOW River Package input file requires the followin
231. ected the Well Tops table will be shown The Display Format frame allows you express the Z values in the data tables as either an Elevation or a Measured Depth with respect to the well head Zmax At the top of each table there is a set of buttons that allow you to add remove and modify the contents These buttons are described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 222 VMOD Flex Help Add a row to the table Insert a row above the active row Insert a row below the active row Remove the active row from the table Adding Well Head Data To add an item to the Well Head table follow the steps below e Click the Add Row button from the Well Head toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter an alphanumeric name in the Well Name column Note The well name must be unique and it may contain hyphens and spaces but not the forward or backward slash characters e Enter the X Y coordinates of the well head in the X and Y fields respectively e Enter the elevation of the well head in the Zmax field e Enter the depth of the well in the Zmin field Adding Well Screens To add an item to the Well Screen table follow the steps below e Make sure the Screens option is selected from the Data to Display box e Select a Well from the Well Head table Click the Add Row button from the Screens toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter a screen identification number in the Screen ID field e Enter a screen
232. ed Show only errors and warnings Show this amount 190 Bop Row x aL Elevation Kx ft day lay2 i lay3 Errors lay4 lt Back Einish Cancel Help In the top half of the dialog VMOD Flex will list any mapped fields that contain invalid data along with a reason for why they are deemed invalid The data validation rules for each mapped column are as follows e Xand Y values must be a numeric value and present in each row of the mapped data e Data columns will be deemed invalid if VMOD Flex detects a null blank field e Data in each column must satisfy the specified data type If invalid data exists you can choose to import this data anyway Otherwise you can select the Do Not Import Rows with Warnings check box and VMOD Flex will not import any rows deemed invalid In the bottom half of the dialog there are two options e Show only errors and warnings When selected only the records deemed invalid will be shown in the preview table Records that are deemed invalid will be colored either red error or yellow warning e Show this amount When selected you can view a specified number of records in the preview table below Enter a value and then click the Apply button to show the records both valid amp invalid in the preview table Click the Finish button to import the data Once imported a data object will be added in the Data Explorer 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 166 VMOD F
233. ed You have imported or created the data objects 204 you want to use for defining boundary conditions For example polylines for the geometry or Surfaces or time schedule for defining the attributes Result A conceptual boundary condition object is created Next Steps Create Finite Difference Grid or Create Finite Element Meshis25 Background Every conceptual model requires an appropriate set of boundary conditions to represent the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 288 VMOD Flex Help system s relationship with the surrounding systems In the case of groundwater flow model boundary conditions will describe the exchange of flow between the model and the external system e Specified Head e River e General Head e Drain e Recharge e Evapotranspiration e Lake e Specified Flux e Pumping Well The workflow for defining a pumping well boundary conditions is different than that of defining other boundary conditions such as recharge specified head river etc Please see the following section for information on defining pumping well boundary conditions For information on how to define all other types of boundary conditions please skip to Defining Other Boundary Conditions ze section Defining Boundary Conditions In VMOD Flex the boundary condition types are separated into three categories e Boundary Conditions kes standard Constant Head Rivers Drains General Head Recharge EVT etc
234. ed VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a steady state flow simulation and will automatically use the data from the first time period only of each boundary condition and pumping well defined in VMOD Flex to run the model to achieve flow equilibrium i e a time independent solution since all inputs are constant lf the Transient Flow option is selected VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a transient flow simulation During this process VMOD Flex will automatically merge all of the different time period data defined for each pumping well and boundary condition into the stress period format required by the different versions of MODFLOW This creates a time dependent flow solution as the model is being run with different inputs at different times Specify the steady state simulation time Select to save the FLO file Translate General 4 General Settings Property Package LPF MODFLOW 2005 Run Type Transient Settings Steady State Simulation Time 3650 Time Steps Save FLO file No Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Property Property Package 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow ss 10 10 1 3 Time Steps OO sy HD on amp wl nr E alnlalalalalaalaa my o
235. ed or the final convergence criteria are met The Outer iterations continue until the final convergence criteria are met on the first inner iteration after an update The following is a description of the solver parameters for the PCG method e Maximum Number of Outer Iterations Default 25 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of outer iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand Twenty five iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Maximum Number of Inner Iterations Default 10 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of inner iterations to be performed This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the current set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand Ten inner iterations should be adequate for most problems More than ten iterations will not usually improve the solution as the solution is updated again when it returns to the outer iterations e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each outer iteration has completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units f
236. ed number of elements that comprise the finite element mesh Please note that the specified number of elements cannot be less than the default number generated by Triangle i e the number generated if this option is disabled Minimum Angle For the Constrained Conforming triangulation method a minimum angle can be specified The specified angle will replace the default bound on the minimum angle 20 degrees The specified angle may include a decimal point but cannot be expressed in exponential notation Refinement Options e Edges of triangles along model boundary should have approx length Use this option to set the approximate length of edges Segments that comprise the model boundary domain Vertices will be added along the boundary creating subsegments with the specified length This option will refine the areas along the model domain boundary e Edges of triangles along line should have approx length Use this option to set the approximate length of edges of triangles along line add ins Vertices will be added along the lines creating subsegments with a specified length The option will refine areas around line add ins e Refinement around point add ins Use this option to refine areas around point add ins Refinement for point add ins is defined by specifying the number of triangles directly around the points and the desired distance from the point to the new vertices Use the Gradation slider bar to specify the smoothness of the tran
237. ed to each grid cell within that zone are calculated by multiplying the zone parameter value with the corresponding value from the parameter distribution array If the grid spacing from the model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 365 does not match the grid spacing from the distribution array a bivariate interpolation scheme is used to calculate the appropriate parameter value at the center of the model grid cell using the four nearest data nodes in the parameter distribution array Conductivity e Kx Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model X axis e Ky Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model Y axis e Kz Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model Z axis These Conductivity parameters may be defined on a cell by cell basis using constant property values and or distributed property values When importing or assigning the Conductivity property zones VMOD Flex will require valid data for each of the above parameters Anisotropy The reason Visual MODFLOW prompts for both Kx and Ky is because there are two options for defining the horizontal anisotropy of the Conductivity property zones e Anisotropy by layer e Anisotropy as specified Note The anisotropy option is set in Translation settings see Anisotropyk17 for more details If the Anisotropy by layer option is used the Kx value will determine the conductivity in the X direction and the specified an
238. ed to the Run PEST step to begin the PEST run 11 7 3 Truncated SVD Regularization Coming soon 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow s 11 7 4 SVD Assist Theory In contrast to Tikhonov regularization which adds information to the calibration process in order to achieve numerical stability subspace methods achieve numerical stability through subtracting parameters and or parameter combinations from the calibration process Aster and others 2005 As a result of the subtraction the calibration process is no longer required to estimate either individual parameters or combinations of correlated parameters that are inestimable on the basis of the calibration dataset These combinations are automatically determined through singular value decomposition SVD of the weighted Jacobian matrix Approaches to Highly Parameterized Inversion a Guide to Using PEST for Groundwater Model Calibration http pubs usgs gov sir 2010 5169 When PEST implements SVD assisted parameter estimation it computes the global Jacobian matrix only once Then it decomposes parameter space into estimable and inestimable parameter combinations It then reformulates the whole calibration problem so that from that moment on it estimates only super parameters Only as many of these are required as there are dimensions in the calibration solution space alternatively only as many of these need to be defined
239. eer Zone Budget ow 5 Particles ow 6 E Forward Particles ez E Backward Particles Observation wells successfully imported import finished succesfully E Numerical Model e Progress The status of each model element is shown in the progress any detected errors will be shown here e Model Tree After the import you will see the model tree is populated in the bottom left corner of the screen from here you can show hide different model inputs outputs e You can add other data objects to the view such as an image Airphoto or other raw data polyline polygon shapefiles Just select the check box beside these objects in the Data Explorer e Click Next Step to proceed where you will arrive at the Grid view edit step View Edit Grid e Atthis step you can view the numerical grid in layer plan view cross sectional along row or column and 3D view e There are numerous tools available to control and manipulate the grid views 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help View Imported Grid Views LPA E E v Layer Layer View 1 Row 1 amp Column 1 e 3D Toolbox e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views Place a check box beside the desired view and it will appear on the screen e Adjust a specific layer row or column
240. ees Select the type of wells to import Vertical gt Devieted Horizontal Select the format of the vertical data in your data source Bevation gt Measured depths i Select the type of data you want to import Well heads only with Id x y Elevation and depth Well heads with the following data Screens ID locations Observation points Observed heads Observed concentrations Well tops lt lt Back _Net gt gt Cancel Hep e Next gt gt e Next gt gt to accept the default Coordinate System In this screen you need to map the fields from the spreadsheet to required fields in the Wells Import utility TOEF J i Data Mapping Well heads Observation Points Target_fields E Map_to Unit category x Unit Multiplier ma Data type T Well Id Weli Id None None 1 Text xX x Length m 1 Numeric jY Y Length m T Numeric Elevation Elevation Length m 1 Numeric p Well bottom Well bottom Length m 1 Numeric Source Data Preview Well Id x v Elevation Well bottom Logger ld Logger Z Observed Head C Ow 1 1590 77 2662 82 238 38 198 81 1 Pn Ow 10A 1256 48 2985 59 240 32 205 38 1 lal _ xeBack netaz Canca C H i To save time you can prepare your Excel file with the exact filenames that are required by VMOD Flex and then no mapping is required For this exercise the sour
241. eet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration starts e A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head difference across the modeled domain is less than one foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations are within the maximums declared above this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e g 0 001 Residual Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 While the head change criterion is used to judge the overall solver convergence the residual criterion is used to judge the convergence of the inner iterations of the solver If the maximum absolute value of the residual at all nodes is less than the tolerance specified here units of length3 time then the solver will proceed to the next outer iteration If you notice that only a few inner iterations are being performed for all outer iterations and an 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 393 appropriate mass balance is not achieved the Residual Criterion value can be decreased by one or more orders of magnitude Note The residual criterion is unit dependent The default value of 0 01 is sufficient if your length units are feet or metres and your time units are seconds If your time units are not second you should multiply the default value by the number of seconds in your
242. el Help 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 175 If this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab Next click on the Screens tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields e Screen ID e Screen Bottom Z elevation of bottom of screen e Screen Top Z elevation of top of screen For each well in the source data the Screen ID must be unique Also screens should not overlap within a single well These requirements will be validated in the final step of the well import process If you selected the pumping schedule check box in the previous step click the Pumping Schedule tab and then map the appropriate columns from the source field to the following target fields e Pumping Start Date in MW DD YYYY HH MM SS format time is optional e Pumping End Date in MWDD YYYY HH MM SS format time is optional e Pumping Rate Note Please consider the following when importing a pumping schedule In your source data the final time in the pumping schedule should have a pumping rate of 0 to indicate the stop time If time is not included in the source data just the date VMOD Flex will automatically set the time to 12 00 00 pm Currently Pumping Schedules can only be imported using absolute time Please ensure that the date and time values in your source data are expressed in absolute time MMW DD YYYY HH MM SS and not relative
243. el e Click Add or Remove Programs for Windows XP or Programs for Vista e Select VMOD Flex from the list of installed programs e Click Uninstall Licensing VMOD Flex supports both dongle based hardware licensing and software based licensing For more information on software licensing please consult the VMOD Flex Getting Started Guide available on the installation DVD in PDF format For general license inquires please contact Schlumberger Water Services Sales sws sales slb com 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 VMOD Flex Help 1 2 1 3 Starting VMOD Flex Once VMOD Flex has been installed on your computer simply double click on the VUOD Flex shortcut icon located on your computer s desktop Alternatively you can access the software via the start menu by clicking on Start Programs SWS Software Visual MODFLOW Flex Note If you are using dongle based hardware licensing please ensure that your dongle is connected to your computer AFTER you have installed the software and that you have properly configured your installation How to buy You can buy VMOD Flex directly through your local sales representative via e mail phone or online through the shopping cart on our website using a credit card Direct order link and VMOD Flex Software homepage Order link iwww swstechnology com Locate your local distributor amp http www swstechnology com groundwater services contact E mail a SWS Sales Repre
244. ell Pathli77 section Note For data requirements for each option please see the next step Data Mapping Once you have selected which well data to import click the Next button to proceed to the data mapping This step requires you to map the columns in the source data to the required target fields The required fields will vary depending on the type of well data you selected in the previous step The following sections describe the data mapping for each data type option Well Heads Only e For importing Well Heads only you must map the following columns from the source data to the required target fields Well ID X Y Elevation Bottom e Well ID must be a unique value in the source data If not any rows containing duplicate Well IDs will not be imported 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 174 VMOD Flex Help AE Data Import m Data Mapping Well heads Multiplier Target_fields Unit category Wellld None a S a C a S CA S C C a C a e e a C Rae Rae e Rie xl M Source Data Preview well Name 14 28158 Wells Heads with Screens H Data Import loj x m Data Mapping Wellheads Screens Pump Schedule Target_fields l Unit category il Multiplier Data type E A C A S EA C A A xl M Source Data Preview well Name 14 426158 lt Back Next gt gt Canc
245. ells E r Vertices Show Isolines V Use virtual grid V Show Labels H oe Isolines Slice Settings Colomap Slice Type I Autooply Isolines Eligi x Colors y Ieosuifaces Row Number 1 75 1 U Select Data Attribute 4 Max 4 00 Zones Y Min 1 00 Line properti e ties Lal abels Color Number of contours Specified a 8 gt Line Style Contour Interval v 03 Line Width Start value 1 1 Settings for the Ilsolines are identical to those explained above for Slice lsolines also has an option to plot on a Cross Section see Colormap on Cross Sectionks l as described above Under Select Data choose the attribute you want to use for calculating Isolines For Properties you can choose from Zones or Attributes eg Kx Additional Settings for Line Properties allow you to adjust the Line color style width And the number of contour lines or the contour interval and the starting value minimum by which contour intervals will be calculated Settings in the Labels tab allow you to adjust the font size and color and the decimal format In the Settings tree under Isolines Colors you can access the color page where you can 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 260 VMOD Flex Help choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recha
246. els Heads 1 1 Dy initialHeads E BH20 Observation Wels Heads 1 1 i Boundary Conditions E BH21 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 O Recharge sie Conaterd Het E BH3 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 LD Constant Head d iE BH4 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 2 ee 2 E BHS Observation Wells Heads 1 1 Gey Zone Budget E BHE Observation Wells Heads 1 1 C Zone Budget Ea BH7 Observation Wells Heads 1 1 i Observations E e Obs Wels Heads P 1 E Observation Wel Observation Wells E PEST E BH Observation Wells Heads 1 1 i E Observations O Parameters Pilot Points L Zones Nitrite p kj s m E i el SAMPLE2 grid Run PEST SAMPLE grid Run e All head locations and associated time varying heads are selected by default and will be used with a default weight 1 No changes will be needed for this exercise e Click Next Step to proceed to the Define Parameters Step Define Property Parameters e Atthis step select which parameters you want to include in the PEST run The Define Parameters window will then appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 136 VMOD Flex Help O 3 E Apply E Define Observations Define Property Parameters 3 Define Pilot Point Select Parameter Define Kriging Venogra Use Group Parameter Tied To Transformation 2 tivity Analy gt 7 Conductivity Kx None X Log f I PEST E Conductivity Kz None X Log F P Storage Ss None X None 1 ON Stora
247. enario the default objectives will be fine e The Start Date of the model corresponds to the beginning of the simulation time period It is important to define a relevant start date since your field measurements observed heads and pumping schedules will be defined with absolute date measurements and must lie within the simulation time period In this example the default start date can be used e Click Next Step to proceed Collect Data Objects e The next step is to import or create the data objects you wish to use for building the conceptual model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 22 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex Example W File Tools Window Help EESAC ILI Data n 0 oF a8 000000058 Qay yoo of Create New Data Object Create Surface At this step you can import data create new data objects by digitizing or create surfaces from points data objects e Click the Import Data button and the following screen will load LL Dua Type a e cent L e Select Polygon in Data Type combo box e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel select folder Polygons and select boundary shp 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 23 e Click Next gt gt
248. ence Points To delete a georeference point 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 190 VMOD Flex Help e Select the georeference point from the Control Points Table e Once selected click the Delete button located just beneath the control points table Configure Georeferencing Options When the Configure Georeferencing Options button is selected the following dialog will open settings ibols Georeference Image Graticule Orginal Points _ p Georeference Points Style CrossCircle Y Style Circle F Size 12 Size g 2 Color m Color Apply OK Cancel Symbols Tab This tab allows you to change the style settings of the original control points and the georeference points Choose a Style symbol Size and Color A preview of the symbol settings is shown in the boxes below Georeference Image Tab This tab allows you to define settings for the georeferenced image Each setting is described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data Rasescsoecesesosossesoscesesoscssessesseesssososesso I Show Fill Color Fill color for empty area JPEG image quality LoT J H Interpolation Mode Default X When a georeferenced image is rotated you can fill the areas of empty space with a specified color Otherwise leave the check box unchecked and the empty space will show transparent Click the color box beside Fill color for empt
249. entire grid are checked when determining the maximum allowable step size for particle tracking there may be some cells outside the area of interest with high flow rates The high flow rates in these cells will control the time step calculation in MT3D In this situation setting the Courant Number greater than 1 will not affect the accuracy of the simulation Minimum Saturated Thickness as a Fraction of Cell Thickness The Min sat thickness fraction of cell thickness parameter is used to set a value for the minimum thickness of the saturated layer for each cell This option is particularly important when active cells are running dry This variable will be in the units specified for length during the initial setup of the model 10 10 3 2 MT3DMS_solution_method Select the solution method used to solve the advection dispersion transport equation Translate General 4 General Settings Advection Method Upstream Finite Difference UFD MODFLOW 2005 Use Implicit GCG Solver Yes Settings Time Steps Solvers 4 GCG Settings Recharge and EVT Max number of outer iterations 1 Lake Max number of inner iterations 50 Layers Relative convergence criterion 0 0001 Rewetting Concentration change printing interval 0 Initial Heads Preconditioners Jacobi Anisotropy SSOR Relaxation Factor 1 Output Control Dispersion tensor cross terms Lump all dispersion cross terms to the right side MT3DMS Initial step size DTO days 0
250. ep to proceed or select View Charts item from the workflow tree e From the Parameter combo box to the left of the main chart window choose Transport e You will then be presented with the graph for Concentration vs Time enabling you to view the breakthrough curves at each of your concentration observation wells e All from the Groups box on the left side of the window e Apply e You should now be viewing the breakthrough curves for each of the three concentration observation wells defined earlier in the model see following figure 2D Viewer 1 xX Numerical grid Run x E Define Modeling Objectives Transport View Charts S E Define Numerical Model EJ Create Grid DP E import Model a i E View Edit Grid EJ Define Properties Calculated vs Observed Concenrations 730 Time 730 Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step cates Define Observation Wells Transport X 2221 ms Layer 1 E Define Zone Budget Zones Chart Type oe Cale Obs Define Particles es i 5E Select Run Type Cale vs Obs gt Fs PEST Run Time Z E Single Run 730 X f E Trensiate rre eee TE Deji E Run Numerical Engines i Labels n Bi 5 View Results Z All Times Fi J View Chat G View Maps v All Obs OW A CONCOP1 a iw Conco 1290 2 OW conco ed Layer Z Z Pa 824 8 OW A CONCOO1 MOWA E 7 OW2 A f i OW3 A z f 359 4 OW A CONCOA1 B ore
251. equation after the flow solution has been obtained from groundwater flow model MODFLOW The general advective dispersive equation describing the fate and transport of contaminant of species k in three dimensional transient groundwater flow systems is aa re A a C _ O OC _ ep lt 61 C 9 CE SR OX J Ct Ox f Ox Dispersion term Advection term Sink Sour Reaction term term where Ck is the dissolved concentration of species k 8 is the porosity of the subsurface medium t is time xi is the distance along the respective Cartesian co ordinate axis Dij is the hydrodynamic dispersion coefficient tensor vi is the seepage or linear pore water velocity It is related to the specific discharge or Darcy flux through the relationship 4 qs is the volumetric flow rate per unit volume of aquifer representing fluid sources positive and sinks negative C is the concentration of the source or sink flux for species k rR is the chemical reaction term All the solution methods listed above treat the dispersion sink source and reaction terms in exactly the same fashion using the block centered finite difference method either explicit or implicit in time weighting They differ however in the way the advection term is solved For instance 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 421 e When the particle based methods MOC MMOC and HMOC or the TVD method are selected to simulate solute transport
252. er 1 HWE ORUMCO grid mie Ghee ma se o oe 2D 3D Viewers Data objects can be displayed in one or more of the following viewers e 2D View Plan view ideal for GIS data surfaces well locations images etc e 3D View Ideal for data that have X Y and Elevation Z values defined Structural Zones Wells Pathlines Heads along a cross section etc e The Flex Viewer which is available in the numerical modeling workflow and consists of a combination of a Layer Row and Column view and 3D View the individual views can be shown hidden Workflows Groundwater modeling consists of a series of steps that must be completed in a particular sequence in order to achieve a specific goal In VMOD Flex these steps are presented in a workflow In the Workflow window you see the steps that make up a workflow and at each step there is a corresponding GUI with which you interact The benefits to you as a modeler 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview 11 are unlimited e Simplicity You know where you are and where you have to go This dramatically reduces the learning curve e Accessibility all the actions you need are available at your fingertips no more hunting for an option deep inside a menu e Convenience modeling is iterative and requires a frequent amount of flipping between input run and results The workflow GUI simplifies these back and forths In VMOD Flex there is a workflow for Numerical Mode
253. er Water Services Quick Start Tutorials E Data Import gt lele Data Source Data Type Point Source File Name Description eas canes Hee e For the Data Type select Surface from the drop down list e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles Surfer airport ground surface grd and select Open e Click Next gt gt e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Finish You should now see a new airport ground surface data object appear in the data tree in the top left corner of the window e Now repeat the above steps to import the other Surfer GRD files into the project airport layer2 top grd airport layer3 bottom grd airport layer3 top grd e When you are finished you should see 4 Surface data objects in the data tree in the top left corner 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex Airport File Tools Workflow Window Hel ig amp aiport ground surface aiportiayer2top aimortiayer3top ina Mab airportdayer3 bottom 18101dx7 poy PC ae e Now you are ready to define the grid layers using these surfaces Under Define Vertical Grid select Use Surface check box for each grid layer This is shown below Define Vertical Grid Numbe
254. erbed Thickness River Width Conductivity Stage Bottom Leakance Static Constant be lt Previous Finish Cancel Help Attribute data can be defined for each zone in the boundary condition geometry polygon or polyline Simply select the feature for which attributes are to be defined from the Feature List select a zone from the Zone list and then define the attribute data in the Data Entry Grid Repeat this process for other features zones in the selected data object Note The selected zone will be highlighted yellow in the adjacent 2D Viewer preview If attribute data is not defined for certain zones these parts of the boundary condition will not be included during translation For polylines only it is possible to define attributes at line vertices In this case the Points List will become available where you can select the vertices that comprise the selected zone For more information on assigning attributes to points see Select the Method for Defining Attributes Polylines Only section For each attribute in the Data Input Grid there are two combo boxes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 204 VMOD Flex Help BoundaryConditionWizardForm Polylines Zones Points _ Hide lt lt aj PLineO Zonel PLinel Zone13 PLine1 m Select how the attributes are defined PLine2 PLine3 PLine4 PLine5 PLine6 PLine PLine8 xl Define for the entire zone C De
255. ericalGrid1 a amam Ban 337 5714 5 H Inputs 340 7143 a nf peoi 343 8571 Conductivi 347 0000 O Storage IntialHead 5 Boundary Conditior S Constant Heac Constant Constant H Rivers River 1 lt 1 Wels Pumping V S Row i C Observation Wi 5 H Outputs H Run H E Inputs H Outputs 5 2 Flow Z Heads Drawdown aana i r Layer 1 Row 48 Column 22 X 5733 28 Y 9882 47 Heads 330 6457 e You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view e You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier refer to View Edit Properties 4 section e f your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time m laal 1726 20123 23PM ioe e The next section will discuss how you can generate a new grid with a different size and resolution and generate a numerical model using this grid Evaluating Different Grids Often the initial grid size you defined is not adequate to provide the solution and stability you require from your model In this section we will explain how you can generate multiple grids from the conceptual model and run the corresponding numerical models 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 52 VMOD Flex Help e Below the windows
256. erlay C O Conc001 Time 10000 00000 day Stress period 2 Time step 1 e eue Ho Pate ama JE Te eee Ae Vee fd Cf En BB vin EA EOSTA SA 5 20PM Figure 10 Concentration Contours in VMOD Classic Export Results The VMOD Classic interface supports several different export file formats Model results from the VMOD Classic interface that are exported as shapefiles or 3D gridded data objects can be easily imported into the VMOD Flex interface for superb 3D display and comparison with initial project conceptualizations and raw data objects Shapefiles Once the models are completed in VMOD Classic you can export the results in several ways e Concentration contours can be exported as contour lines File Export GIS and choose Contours Shapefile This must be done on a per layer basis and for each desired output time 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 495 e Pathlines can be exported to SHP file File Export GIS and choose Contours Shapefile e These files will be imported as Polyline Data Objects in VMOD Flex as explained in the next section 3D Gridded Data Objects Tecplot DAT Concentration results can also be exported to a TecPLOT DAT file which contains concentration values for all cells in all layers The benefit of this format is that you can create cross sections of concentration profiles and also isosurfaces 3D Plumes in VMOD Flex e Select File
257. erms F Term to be stored once in either the binary budget file BGT or the listing file LST Be aware that this setting can be lost if MODFLOW is being run together with MODPATH because MODPATH requires the flow terms to be written to the BGT file and not to the LST file The checkbox labeled Save FLO file will save the cell by cell flow terms required by MT3D when MT3D is not being run at the same time as MODFLOW Saving Output Every Nth Time Step For simulations with many stress periods and time steps it can be very tedious to manually select the desired output time step intervals The row of fields underneath the Output Control 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow as table are used to specify regular time step intervals for saving files during Each N th step in each stress period The first text box is where the N value is entered To apply this value to the column click the underlying checkbox If MODPATH is run with the MODFLOW simulation Visual MODFLOW will save the flow terms for all time steps 10 10 2 MODPATH The MODPATH program is used for calculating the advective flow pathlines for forward tracking and backward tracking particles MODPATH has the following run time settings Discharge Options msl Select the option to control the discharge of the particles at sinks Reference Timel417 Set the reference time options for particle releases 10 10 2 1 Discharge Options T
258. erpolation Prefiltering is performed to ensure high quality shrinking This mode produces the highest quality transformed images Graticule Tab The graticule tab provides display options for the preview graticule These settings are described below Padding Space 30 Back color Line style Line color i Major mark width 5 Min tick distance fep r V Auto Interval Intervals fi nan M Mark Settings Padding Space Controls the amount of buffer soace between the edge of the preview window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y coordinates contain many digits Line Style Select from various line styles e g solid dashed etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 193 Line Color Set the color of the graticule lines Back color Set the background color of the graticule Major mark width Set the width of the major mark ticks Minor tick distance Set the distance between minor ticks Auto Interval Automatically calculates the distance between graticule lines Interval If Auto Interval is not selected set the distance between graticule lines Mark Settings Controls the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label and control the gap between the label and the axis itself The final step involves previewing the raster image and viewing coordinate information before importing into VMOD
259. ers If an updated parameter value is outside of its bounds PEST temporarily holds the parameter at its boundary value Updating Parameter Values after a PEST Run If you have completed a PEST run and return to the Define Parameters step to make a change such as add remove zones or adjust the Minimum or Maximum values you need to click the Apply button on the workflow toolbar and also proceed through the Define Pilot Points step and re generate the Define Kriging Variograms step in order to update the appropriate input files 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services asa VMOD Flex Help 11 3 Define Pilot Points The next step is to define Pilot Points fe Ee oe B Define Observations EJ Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Select existing well point data object Pilot points Parameter zones ime ea komee eer pilot points zone1 pilot points zone1 EN Kx i pet ports zone2 Plokpontszone2 a lk b pilot points zone3 pilot points zone3 pilotpoints zone4 pilot points zone4 al Kx 3 m lke 4 Parameter zone selection Kx_Zone4 X Used Feed Name Group ati Yon aA gt E pp0 pilot points zone4 44718 5366 763280 9756 30 Pilot points are simple XY points with an initial value for each parameter that you want PEST to estimate Pilot points can be imported from TXT file XLS SHP file or assigned manually by digitizing in the 2D environment An exa
260. ertices Linear Interpalatron Just start and end points All vertices From 3D ondided From shape le From time schedule Transient data Define the attributes using the various methods click Finish when you are done For more details on the options for defining attributes see Define Boundary Conditions Attributes bo2 NOTE When digitizing boundary conditions VMOD Flex will automatically assign these to the appropriate layer based on the attributes you define To delete a specific boundary condition cell group right click on this node in the tree and select Delete Database The Database button becomes active when you select either Recharge or Evapotranspiration for the Boundary Condition type This will load the zone database window as shown in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 378 VMOD Flex Help In this grid you can modify the values for existing zones Editing Well Attributes To delete well attributes right click on the original wells data object and select the Spreadsheet option The options for editing are explained in the Edit Well Attributes 223 section e Select Well from the Boundary Condition list e Be sure you are in the correct layer where your well is screened e Select Edit gt Single from the toolbox e Select the desired well cell The following dialog should appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical
261. erty Parameters E Define Pilot Points i Define Kriging Variograms pof B E Select Run Type control data i Sensitivity Analysis Ta Se PEST Select Regularization 1 1 single point 100 SVD Assist 5 02 0 0 3 0 017 H v Reaularisation 5 0 5 0 0 001 ie 0 1 i EY No Regularization 25 0 005 430 013 Parameter Estimation 111 inn Analyze Results parameter groups Update Mode Inputs pg1 relative 0 01 0 0 switch 1 5 parabolic pg2 32 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 33 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg3 34 log factor 30 1 300 pg3 1 00 01 na4 35 lnn factor 3N 1 2M nn4 10001 If you are familiar with the PEST file format structure you can adjust the PEST Control file in this window or copy into a text editor make changes and paste the adjusted contents back in this window A full explanation of the PEST control file is available in the PEST manual http www pesthomepage org gettfiles php file pestman pdf For this exercise the default values are fine 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 150 VMOD Flex Help Before starting the PEST Run it is a good idea to check the PEST Input files PEST provides a utility to do this called PESTCheck of PEST Check Click button on the workflow toolbar You should receive a confirmation that no errors were found Click OK to proceed Click Next Step to proceed to the Run PEST window Run PEST P Run PEST e Click Run PEST to start the P
262. ervices Numerical Modeling Workflow 427 saved for example to generate Zone Budget Transport data Output Times In the grid shown below you can enter the output times for which you want MT3DMS to save during the run The simulation results are saved in the MT3D output OT file The toolbar above this grid provides the following options from left to right e Add row to the grid e Delete selected row s e Copy selected rows to clipboard e Paste from clipboard ideal if you have times defined in a column in an Excel spreadsheet or in a text file one time entry per row 10 11 Run Numerical Engines One of the benefits of Visual MODFLOW is the integration of all of the numeric engines including MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 MODFLOW LGR MODPATH Zone Budget To run a simulation with any or all of the above numeric engines be sure to select Run from the top menu bar of the Run section and the Engines to Run window will appear as shown in 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ae VMOD Flex Help the following figure GOB usas MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET ll Define Observation Wells MODPATH lll Define Zone Budget Zones fl Define Particles E E Select Run Type i olf PEST Run off Sinole Bur Jome i Translate ha Run Numerical Engines D O View Results The Engine column lists the av
263. es e Click on Define Attributes The Define Boundary Condition dialog will appear e Click Next gt gt to accept the default name The following dialog will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help Select how the attributes are defined Define forthe entire zone 1 Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just start end end points Al vertices From 30 gridded From shapetite From time schedule Transient data Enter Starting Head m of 19 Enter Ending Head m of 19 Conc001 leave the default value of 1 this indicates that contaminant mass will be assigned to these cells Click Finish to complete the boundary condition The hand drawn polyline will now turn to a set of red points indicating that a Constant Head boundary condition has been assigned to these cells Next you will assign a Constant Head boundary condition along the northern boundary for the lower confined aquifer Locate the Layer selection located to the top left of the grid display and change this to Layer 3 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials a Inspect Define Boundary Condi e Assign Polyline from the toolbox Move the mouse pointer to the north west corner of the grid top left grid cell and left click on this location to anchor the starting point of the line Now move the mouse pointer to the north east corner of the
264. es file 1E 5 HT_1EM5 500 25 HT 500 25 9E 7 HT 9EP7 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help 11 PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow Visual MODFLOW Flex provides a seamless interface to the popular parameter estimation and predictive analysis program PEST developed by Dr John Doherty of Watermark Computing This section provides instructions on using VMOD Flex to setup run and interpret a Parameter Estimation Predictive Analysis simulation In addition this chapter provides a brief description of the input parameters and settings required by PEST A detailed description of the algorithms parameters input files and other options for PEST are available in the PEST User Documentation This can be accessed from www PESTHomepage org g Before you start You are encouraged to familiarize yourself with the concepts and applications of PEST prior to using in VMOD Flex The time spent on this will make your experience with parameter estimation much more productive and will likely help you to overcome any difficulties you may experience the first time you run PEST A Note You must have a license of Pro or Premium in order to use the PEST module in VMOD Flex Visual MODFLOW supports both the Calibration and Predictive Analysis capabilities of the PEST program and it allows you to run parameter estimation using results from both groundwater flow and contaminant transport simulations i e observations can
265. es you drew on the line Simply click on the second item in the list E Define Boundary Condition xs Polylines Zones Points mr SCN PolyineD Zone a The s Select how the attibutes are defined Define forthe entire zone Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just start and end points All vertices V Use default leakance ence UE frm SF onstant Sneed S m Em m S Riverbed Bottom Leakance Tiinan SK SRBTHICK ji e Now define the values at this end point in the parameters grid based on the values below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services values Riverbed Thickness 0 1 VMOD Flex Help mf River Width m Riverbed Conductivity m da e Click Finish to complete the boundary condition The hand drawn polyline will now turn to a set of blue points indicating that a River boundary condition has been assigned to these cells Recharge In most situations aquifers are recharged by infiltrating surface water In order to assign recharge in Visual MODFLOW you must be viewing the top layer of the model Check the Navigator Cube in the lower left hand side of the screen to see which layer you are currently in The first boundary condition to assign is the recharge flux to the aquifer e Recharge from the list of boundary conditions in the toolbox e Assign Entire Layer
266. es you selected in the previous step Theory Using conventional model calibration technology the calibration process would use one parameter associated with a property zone and adjusting these parameters until the fit between model outcomes and field observations is as good as possible If the goodness of fit obtained on the basis of these zones was not acceptable then extra zones would be introduced into the model domain at locations where the modeler felt that they would do the most good the parameterization process would then be repeated with the new parameters included If a good fit was still not obtained more zones would then be introduced The process would continue until the fit between model outcomes and field observations was acceptable There are a number of shortcomings associated with this approach These include the following e The procedure is quite laborious and slow e In a case such as the present one geological mapping provides no guidance on where to put extra zones hence the final distribution of zones that the modeler achieves using this process Is likely to be subjective and non unique e Characterization of geological heterogeneity in the present study area by zones of piecewise uniformity is not in harmony with the nature of the alluvial material therefore any zonation pattern that is finally decided upon will not look right it will be defensible only on the basis that it is better to employ such
267. et a georeference point e From the top toolbar click on the Add button e Click on a map location where the world coordinates are known e Ageoreference point window will appear prompting for the X and Y world coordinates of the selected location e Enter the X and Y coordinates for this point e Repeat this procedure for additional georeference points e When you set a georeference point it is added to the Control Points Table You can improve the accuracy of the georeferencing by adding more than two control points to the image When the image is transformed the Preview tab will display the original control points and the corresponding georeferenced points thus allowing you to visualize the accuracy of the georeferencing Once you have set at least two georeference points click the Transform button to georeference the image The georeferenced image will then be displayed in the Preview tab Editing Georeference Points To edit a georeference point e Select the georeference point from the Control Points Table e Once selected click the Edit button located just beneath the control points table e A Georeference point window will appear prompting for the X and Y world coordinates of the selected location e Enter the new X and or Y coordinates for this point e Click the Ok button Note You must click the Transform button again in order for the georeferencing to update to reflect the modified X Y values Deleting Georefer
268. f each stress period and at the end of the simulation in the listing LST file The first two columns list the available stress periods and associated time steps for the entire simulation only one stress period and time step will be listed for steady state simulations The remaining columns indicate the information which can be written and saved to the various MODFLOW output files To select an output option click in the appropriate checkbox and a checkmark will appear to indicate that the selected information will be written for the selected time step The columns labeled Save to Binary will save the output information to the binary files as described below e Heads Saves the heads in the binary heads file HDS e DDown Saves the drawdown in the binary drawdown file DDN e F Term Saves the cell by cell flow terms in the binary budget BGT file Note The Zone Budget program uses the BGT file for calculating the flow between zones Therefore to change the frequency at which the Zone Budget information is saved select the desired F Term intervals The columns labeled Print to LST will save the output information to the listing file as described below e Heads Saves the heads in the listing file e DDown Saves the drawdown in the listing file e F Term Saves the flux terms cell by cell flow terms in the listing file e Budget Saves the budget information in the listing file Note MODFLOW only allows the flow t
269. fference method is only available in MT3DMS MT3D99 and RT3Dv 2 5 The central finite difference method does not exhibit the numerical dispersion problems like the Upstream Finite Difference method but is susceptible to excessive artificial oscillations in advection dominated problems The TVD third order total variation diminishing method is available only with MT3DMS MT3D99 and RT3Dv 2 5 The TVD scheme which is mass conservative solves the advection term based on ULTIMATE algorithm Universal Limiter for Transient Interpolation Modeling of the Advective Transport Equations As in the particle based methods the TVD scheme solves the advection component independent of the other terms in the transport equation Results from the TVD scheme may exhibit minor numerical dispersion and minor oscillations in problems having sharp concentration fronts Since the algorithm is explicit there is a stability constraint on the step size The maximum allowed value for the time step is the minimum time step calculated for every active cell Note Modifying the default parameter settings for each Solution method requires some understanding of the techniques used to solve the advection dispersion component of the transport equation For more details refer to the MT3DMS User s manual aa of Solution Methods Disadvantages Appropriate Conditions Method Numerical dispersion Dispersed fronts Peclet number lt 2 2013 by Schlumberger Water Service
270. fied by the value 1 for the species concentration eg Conc001 Conc002 If you with to assign a contaminant mass to a specific boundary condition object then replace the default 1 value with a representative contaminant concentration 7 6 1 Define Boundary Conditions Lines Polygons g Before You Start Make sure you have imported or created all the data objects that you want to use for Defining Boundary Conditions Refer to the Collect Data Objects ke5 step Define Geometry The first step involves selecting the boundary condition type and specifying the location of the boundary condition on the simulation domain e From the Select Boundary Condition Type combo box select the desired boundary condition type For more information on each boundary condition type including the data requirements for MODFLOW please see Boundary Conditions Overview 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 290 VMOD Flex Help e Enter a Name and a Description optional for the boundary condition The specified name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the boundary condition is created e Next select where to apply the boundary condition on the simulation domain by selecting an option from the Where to apply on the Simulation Model Domain combo box The type of options available in this combo box depend on which boundary condition type is selected The table below summarizes the available options for each boundary condition
271. fine Boundary Conditions E E Select the Next Step Chat Ty E Define Observation Zones a p E Define Observation Wells Calc vs Cv Define Zone Budget Zones Time E Define Particles sina Select Run Type PEST Run v Labels EJ Single Run T Mi Ta EJ Translate aves EJ Run Numerical Engines 7 Al Obs EEJ View Resuts zA View Chats 7 Layer 1 E View Maps T ow m Ow 2 1 OW 3 1 yj ow 4 1 yj Ow 5 1 Apply PPS Calculated vs Observed Heads Time All 19 2 E Layer 1 Calc Obs oan a ow 2i1 18 66 18 12 E 3 3 6 17 58 17 04 Ow a 1 16 B 16 5 17 04 17 58 18 12 18 66 19 2 Observed Head m Min Residual 0 12 m at OW 1 1 Standard Error of the Estimate Max Residual 0 25 m at OW 2 1 Root Mean Squared 0 14 m Residual Mean 0 05 m Nomaized RMS 5 89 Abs Residual Mean 0 11 m Correlation Coefficient 0 99 e Take a moment to view the correlation between calculated and observed heads e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click gt Next Step to proceed In the next section of the tutorial you will define the inputs for the transport run properties and boundary conditions then run MT3MDS along with MODFLOW 2005 and view and interpret the results Define Transport Model The following section outlines the steps necessary to complete a simplified transport model Simi
272. fine values at vertices Linear Interpolation M Use default leakance Stage Bottom Leakance Aveta River Width Static X Stati v SEte z Stati X Constant X Constan gt Ete Constand gt Constan 0 K RBTHICK Riverbed Conductivity lt Previous Finish Cancel Help The first combo box allows you to set an attribute as Static Steady State or Transient conditions change over time When one or more parameters are set to Transient the Transient Data button will become active When selected the Transient Data window will launch shown below The Transient Data dialog allows you to define the stress periods and values for all the attributes in the boundary condition that have been set as Transient e Click the Add Row button to add a new row to the table e Enter a Start and End time and a Value for each transient attribute e Press the Enter button on your keyboard e Repeat for additional stress periods e Click OK to save the transient data The second combo box provides different methods for assigning attribute values to the boundary condition The contents shown in this combo box depend on the attribute type i e not all methods are available for every attribute The available methods may include Constant Value From 3D Gridded Data From Shapefile From Time Schedule and From Surface Each method is described below Constant Value Constant Value
273. fining the flow boundary conditions where required Constant Concentration is an exception to this rule since it does not need to coincide with a prescribed flux you will still see a Constant Concentration boundary condition type allowing you to define the geometry cells and parameters time and species concentrations for this Boundary Condition type When Transport is active in your model run and you define a new boundary condition you will see parameters for Species Concentration as part of the Boundary Condition attributes eg Conc001 Conc002 etc These will have a default value of 1 indicating that no mass sink source is defined for this group of boundary condition cells As soon as you change this value to 0 or greater then these cells will be treated as sinks sources Assign Species Concentrations for the Recharge Boundary When you defined the flow model you created a separate recharge zone that covers the refuelling area Now you will add a defined species concentration to this recharge flux e Check to ensure that you are viewing Layer 1 e Select Recharge from the list of boundary conditions under the toolbox e You will recall there were two recharge zones created for the flow model background recharge of 100 mm yr covering the entire model top and a small area over the refueling area with a higher recharge rate of 250 mm yr The mass of contaminants will be assigned only to this smaller recharge zone e
274. from the toolbox The Define Recharge Boundary Condition dialog will appear Click Next gt gt to accept the default name e In the Define Boundary Condition dialog enter 100 for Rate as shown below e Leave the default value of 1 for Conc001 this indicates that no contaminant mass will be assigned to the recharge flux 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Select how the attributes are defined Define forthe entire zone Define values at vertices Linear interpolation Just stan and end points From 3D gridded From shapefile e Click Finish All cells in the top layer will be assigned a recharge rate of 100 Now you will assign a higher recharge value at the Refuelling Area where jet fuel has been spilled on a daily basis First you need to import a polygon shapefile that delineates this area e File Import e For the Data Type select Polygon from the drop down list e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles refuelling area shp and click Open e Click Next gt gt e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Finish You should now see a new data object refuelling area appear in the data tree in the top left corner of the window e Click on the box beside this data object in the tree i The data object shou
275. g information for each grid cell containing a River boundary e River Stage The free water surface elevation of the surface water body This elevation may change with time e Riverbed Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer bedding material of the surface water body e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the surface water body and the groundwater caused by the seepage layer riverbed The Leakance value C may be calculated from the length of a reach L through a cell the width of the river W in the cell the thickness of the riverbed M and the vertical hydraulic conductivity of the riverbed material K using the following formula _ KxLxWw M C For situations where the River package is used to simulate lakes or wetlands the L and W variables would correspond to the X Y dimension of the River boundary grid cells When a River boundary condition is assigned the Use default Leakance option is 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 304 VMOD Flex Help automatically selected If the Use default Leakance option is selected the River boundary condition requires the following data e River Stage The free water surface elevation of the surface water body e Riverbed Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer bedding material of the surface water body e Riverbed Thickness Thickness of the riverbed Seepage layer e Leakance A numeri
276. g the edit tools described above click the 8 End Edit button to save the changes Finally click the View button to return to the normal 2D Viewing mode 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 207 4 5 Deleting Data Objects To delete a data object right click on the data object from the Data Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 208 VMOD Flex Help 5 Visualizing Data in 2D 3D Visualizing Data Objects VMOD Flex supports two types of interactive data viewers 3D Viewer and 2D Viewer The 3D Viewer is based on OpenGL graphics technology allowing you to visualize graphically rich three dimensional representations of your data The 2D Viewer allows you to view your data from a planar perspective and provides various tools for editing and drawing data objects VMOD Flex allows you to have multiple viewers opened and displayed simultaneously Both viewers can be launched by clicking on Window from the main menu and then selecting New 2D Window or New 3D Window Expand the following sections to learn more about each topic See Also Exportlsa1l for details on exporting data from a viewer e Exporting 2D 3D Views to imagekal Opening a New 2D or 3D Viewer There are two ways in which you can launch a 2D or 3D Viewer in VMOD Flex From the Main Menu or from the Data Explorer e From the main menu select Window then either 2D or 3D Viewer
277. ge Sy None X None X Paramete S Select Property Zone Use Parameter Zone Value Min Max gt v Kx 1 30 1E 15 1E 30 Fa Kx 2 30 445 1E 30 J Kx 3 30 1E6415 1E 30 Fa Kx 4 30 1615 168 In the table at the top select which property parameters you want to include in the table at the bottom select which property zones you want to include For this exercise all Kx property zones will be included these are selected by default For each parameter you can specify to Tie it to another parameter You can also specify the Transformation option by default all Conductivity parameters are set to Log transformation In the table at the bottom for each property zone you must specify minimum and maximum values defaults are provided in addition the value from each zone is also displayed to assist in defining reasonable minimum maximums Enter 1 for the Minimum for each zone Enter 300 for the Maximum for each zone This is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials E Ea Apply Define Observations Define Property Parameters DJ Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Select Parameter i Use Group Parameter Tied To Transformation rn gt m Conductivty Ke None Log T H Conductivity kz None lt j Log A Storage Ss None None A Storage Sy None gt Moe Use Parameter Zone Value Min Max S K Se r
278. ging the points to a new location in the 2D Viewer Rescale Select a shape element and stretch or shrink the geometry by selecting and dragging a side or corner of the blue box Rotate Select a shape element and rotate the geometry clockwise or anti clockwise by selecting and holding the blue box while moving the mouse Delete Shape Delete the selected shape Undo All Undo all edits This button will revert the data object back to its original geometry If you are editing an existing polyline or polygon data object the Selector combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer allows you to select and modify the points vertices that comprise the features in the data object For example if you are editing a polyline data object you can select Points from the Selector combo box and each vertex that comprises each polyline will become active allowing you to add move or delete the vertices When the Selector combo box is set to Points the following icons are added to the 2D Viewer sidebar Add Vertex Add a vertex to a polyline or polygon feature by placing your mouse in the desired location on the line or polygon boundary and clicking the left mouse button Move Vertex Select and hold the left mouse button and move the vertex to a new location the line or polygon boundary Delete Vertex When selected select a vertex to remove from a line and or polygon boundary Once you have created modified the data object geometry usin
279. gram based on native property values For this example the default parameters for the variograms all will use Exponential is sufficient However for Zone2 we will define a value of 2 0 for the Anisotropy with the direction of anisotropy coinciding with the direction of the creek Alignment in the direction of the creek is based on the premise that channel structures within this old creek valley will make it more likely for hydraulic property similarity to prevail in this direction than in a direction at right angles to it The variogram parameters can be adjusted by selecting a Variogram from the tree as shown 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services us VMOD Flex Help below e Click Variogramkx2 under the Variograms node in the tree The display will appear as below 3 Ea PD Apply Define Observations Define Kriging Vairograms Define Property Parameters HT E Define Pilot Points egr Vaiograms Define Knging Variograms Fy Tare rons select KUN ype Zone2 Zone3 ponent X a Zone4 E Variograms Bearing Variogramkx1 0 es oe 500 Aniosotropy 1 e Enter 2 for the Anisotropy e Enter 45 for the Bearing this value allows you to make the variogram anisotropic in a certain direction this is an angle of rotation e Click Next Step to proceed to the Select Run Type Select Run Type At this step choose the type of PEST Run if you want to run PEST
280. grams Ra Z Variogramkx1 Pa ed ia y Variogramkx2 Number of Variograms g Variogramkx3 oA ae Variogramkx4 1 S e e Weight 0 15 Kriging Min Number of Points 1 Max Number of Points 50 Search Radius 2000 Theory Spatial Interpolation using Pilot Points The use of pilot points in characterizing the spatial distribution of a hydraulic property must be accompanied by a mechanism whereby hydraulic property values assigned to pilot points are spatially interpolated to the cells of the finite difference grid Spatial interpolation is accomplished using the Kriging algorithm Kriging is a method of spatial interpolation based on geostatistics The cornerstone of geostatistics is the variogram a variogram describes the extent to which hydraulic property values or any other type of data pertaining to any two points are likely to be different from each other as a function of the distance between those points One of the benefits of using Kriging as a basis for spatial interpolation is that the factors by which hydraulic properties at pilot points are multiplied before summation to obtain the hydraulic property value at a particular grid cell are independent of the actual hydraulic 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help 11 5 property values at the pilot points Hence a set of Kriging factors pertaining to each of the cells of the finite difference grid can be calculated in advance of the actual interpola
281. grid top right grid cell and Right Click on this location to indicate the end point of the line You should then see a small menu appear Define Attributes e Click on Define Attributes The Define Boundary Condition dialog will appear e Click Next gt gt to accept the default name e In the Define Boundary Condition dialog enter the following values e Enter Starting Head m of 18 e Enter Ending Head m of 18 e Click Finish to complete the boundary condition The hand drawn polyline will now turn to a set of red points indicating that a Constant Head boundary condition has been assigned to these cells e Next assign the Constant Head boundary condition to the lower confined aquifer along the southern boundary of the model domain e Assign Polyline from the toolbox Move the mouse pointer to the south west corner of the grid bottom left grid cell and click on this location to anchor the starting point of the line Now move the mouse pointer to the south east corner of the grid bottom right grid cell and Right Click on this location to indicate the end point of the line You should then see a small menu appear Define Attributes e Click on Define Attributes The Define Boundary Condition dialog will appear e Click Next gt gt to accept the default name e In the Define Boundary Condition dialog enter the following values e Enter Starting Head m of 16 5 e Enter Ending Head m of 16 5 e Click F
282. gs Porosity Options Hfective MODFLOW 2005 Courant Number 0 75 Settings Min Sat Thickness 0 01 Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MT3DMS Solution Method Output Control Output Settings Output Times Solution Method e Expand the MT3DMS item under the Translation settings and select Solution Method A Solution Method settings will appear as shown in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 125 Translate General 4 General Settings Advection Method Upstream Finite Difference UFD 5 MODFLOW 2005 Use Implicit GCG Solver Yes Settings Time Steps Solvers 4 GCG Settings Recharge and EVT Max number of outer iterations 1 Lake Max number of inner iterations 50 Layers Relative convergence criterion 0 0001 Rewetting Concentration change printing interval 0 Initial Heads Preconditioners Jacobi Anisotropy SSOR Relaxation Factor 1 Output Control Dispersion tensor cross terms Lump all dispersion cross terms to the right side 5 MT3DMS Initial step size DTO days 0 Translation Type Max step size days 0 Settings Multiplier 1 2 Output Control Output Settings Output Times In the Solution Method dialogue Advection term frame you will be using the Upstream Finite Difference solution method with the Implicit GCG Solver The Upstream Finite Difference method provides a stable so
283. han by a variogram based on native property values Reference Using Pilot Points to Calibrate a MODFLOW MT3D Model John Doherty Select Run Type Select Run Parameter Estimation option Run Parameter Estimation 471l for finding the optimal set of parameters based on your observations Run Sensitivity Analysis ke calculate parameter sensitivities which will help you to determine which parameters are influential or not influential on the model results 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 461 11 6 O l Define Observations Select PEST Run Type Define Property Parameters EJ Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms ERY Select Run Type I Sensitivity Analysis S PEST Select Regularization SVD As Tikh e No Paramet Analy i Update ulansation Sensitivity Analysis Run Sensitivity Analysis A sensitivity analysis is the first step in assessing the possible range of results that can be derived from the groundwater model In a sensitivity analysis parameter values are individually changed to determine the effect on model calibration and prediction The results give an indication of which parameter changes can have significant impact on the model results these are sensitive parameters and which parameter changes have little or no impact on the model results these are non sensitive or inse
284. he Discharge Options are used to tell MODPATH what to do with particles when they enter a grid cell where water is leaving the system Any grid cell where water is leaving the system is Classified as a sink For example an extraction well is a sink or all cells in layer 1 with evapotranspiration are sinks Weak Sink Options In many cases the water leaving the system through a grid cell is less than the amount of water entering the grid cell If this difference is small the cell is classified as a weak sink Since MODPATH cannot always determine if a particle should be removed from the system when it encounters a weak sink there are three options to control how particles should be treated when sinks are encountered e Particles always pass through cells with weak sinks e Particles are always stopped when they enter cells with internal sinks e Particles are stopped in the cells where discharge to sinks is greater than a specified total inflow to the cell default 5 The desired Weak Sink Option may be selected from the Discharge Options window shown in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help Translate General 4 Discharge Settings Week Sink Option Particles stop in cells were discharge greater total inflow MODFLOW 2005 Discharge Persentage 25 Settings Recharge Options IRCHTP Aux is assigned to the top face of all cells Time Steps Evapotranspiration Options IEVTTP
285. he calibration process is there because it has to be there In many modelling contexts this philosophy of 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 11 7 1 model calibration has a large intuitive appeal allowing a modeller to use zones to characterise the distribution of some hydraulic property within a model domain while at the same time removing the inflexibility that accompanies the characterisation of a model domain by areas of piecewise parameter constancy Relationships between pairs of parameter values can be introduced into the calibration process as prior information equations The weight assigned to each of these prior information equations can be the same Alternatively if the weight is proportional to the inverse of the square root of the variogram calculated for the distance between the respective pilot points then it can be shown that this is in harmony with the geostatistical characterisation of the area as encapsulated in the variogram What this characterisation says in short is that the closer are two points together the more likely are the hydraulic properties at those points to be the same By calculating weights on the basis of the inverse of the variogram we are enforcing the zero difference condition more strongly for points which are closer together than for those which are farther apart When run in this mode a number of control variables are required in the PEST control fil
286. he contents of the Inout Parameters frame will vary depending on the selected expression e f the selected expression contains a constant value e g Z Constant enter a value in Value field e f the selected expression requires a surface e g Z Surface x y then select the desired surface from the Data Explorer and then click the button to insert the surface into the Value field e Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transformed data as a new data object e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Note If the data object is being viewed in a 3D Viewer while the operation is applied you may have to turn off the data object and then turn it back on to see the changes Attribute Operations Modify an Attribute using a Constant Value For time schedule data objects VMOD Flex allows you to modify attribute values using a specified constant value For example the constant value can be set equal to added to subtracted from and multiplied by the existing attribute values 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 229 HE Settings General Operations Arithmetic Select Operation Attributes attribute Attribute Constant x Description and Instructions Add the constant value specified from each value of the selected attribute Input Parameters Parameter Attribute tiver_stage Constant 10 T Save
287. he line and then calculates the appropriate Conductance value for each grid cell according to the standard formula enter the following values e Under Select how the attributes are defined select the Define Values at vertices Linear Interpolation option After doing so the settings in the top right should appear as shown below E Defne sonay conin See NS ea Polylines Zones Points Show gt gt _ PolylineD a Point 13 Select how the attributes are defined O Define forthe entire zone Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just start and end points 1 All vertices Leak Riverbed Riverbed ae Conductivity X E GET X Thickness River n um E a onstant SK SRBTHICK ie e Inthe parameters grid at the bottom enter the following values for the start point This is indicated as PointO under the Points box Leakance do not enter any values Riverbed Thickness m 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s River Width m Riverbed Conductivity 10 m da R Leakance from the river will be calculated based on the parameters you define For more details on the calculation refer to Boundary Conditions Theorylsi e Now you will define the values for the End Point of the line e Click on Point15 under the Points box as shown below note the Point name may be different it will depend on how many vertic
288. he model by comparing observed heads to calculated heads Required Files e Several files are required for this exercise which should be included with the VMOD Flex installation These files are available in your My Documents folder VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel If you cannot find these files please download them from our website http trials swstechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 T utorials conceptual model supp files zip Creating the Project e Launch VMOD Flex e Select File New Project The Create Project dialog will appear e Type in project Name Exercise 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Click Browse button and navigate to a folder where you wish your projects to be saved and click OK e Define your coordinate system and datum or leave the non cartesian as defaults e Define the Units frame For this project the default units will be fine The Create Project dialog should now look like this F Create Project E Project Infomation Units i Name SRI li Exercise 4 Unit Settings Conductivity m s Data Repository Length S D Documents VMODFlex Ex Pumping Rate m 3 d Recharge mm yr ar Specific Storage 1 m Desciplion Time day Project Coordinate Coordinate Systems Local Cartesian x Datum ity Word Geodetic System 1984 e Click OK The workflow selection screen will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Wate
289. he simulation However the USGS later extended the Block Centered Flow package BCF2 to allow for the rewetting of these dry cells during a transient simulation While this represented a major advancement for more accurate representations of water table aquifers it also causes the solution to be much more unstable in some situations More detailed information on the cell wetting and the BCF package can be found in the MODFLOW Packages Reference Manual included with your Visual MODFLOW media in the Manual folder The Re wetting settings may be accessed by selecting MODFLOW Re wetting from the top menu bar of the Run section A Dry Cell Wetting Options window will appear as shown in the following figure and described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 408 VMOD Flex Help e Activate cell wetting IW DFLG is used to indicate if the wetting capability is active IWDFLG 1 or inactive IWDFLG 0 e Wetting threshold is used to determine if the dry cell needs to be wetted For a dry cell to become wet the head in the adjacent grid cell s must be greater than the elevation of the bottom of the dry cell plus the Wetting threshold value e Wetting interval IWETIT indicates how often MODFLOW attempts to wet the dry cells detected during the course of the solution iterations For example if WETIT 2 cell wetting would be attempted at every second iteration If a model with dry cells is having problems converging to a so
290. hedule must be defined for the pumping well For information on importing well data please see Importing Wells h7 section For information on defining well data for existing wells data objects please see the Well Table 20 section Constant Head Currently this boundary condition is only supported for Finite Difference Model translation The Specified Head boundary condition also known as Constant Head in VMOD Flex is used to fix the head value in selected grid cells regardless of the system conditions in the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 302 VMOD Flex Help surrounding grid cells thus acting as an infinite source of water entering the system or as an infinite sink for water leaving the system Therefore specified head boundary conditions can have a significant influence on the results of a simulation and may lead to unrealistic predictions particularly when used in locations close to the area of interest During translation VMOD Flex uses the Time Variant Specified Head Package provided with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Specified Head cells is stored in projectname CHD file Unlike most other transient VODFLOW boundary condition packages the Specified Head package allows the specified heads to be linearly interpolated in time between the beginning and end of each stress period such that the specified head for a grid cell may change at each time step of a given stress period Required Data The Sp
291. hlumberger Water Services 152 VMOD Flex Help Define Observations PEST REC PEST SEO PEST SEN PEST RES Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points PEST RUN RECORD CASE pest_run Define Kriging Variograms E Select Run Type E Sensitivity Analysis PEST Version 12 3 1 S E PEST Select Regularization I SVD Assist PEST run mode I Tikhonov Regularisation No Regularization Parameter Estimation Parameter estimation mode S Analyze Results case dimensions Update Model Inputs Number of parameters 35 Number of adjustable parameters z 35 Number of parameter groups 4 Number of observations 21 Number of prior estimates o Model command line s model bat Jacobian command line na Model interface files Templates pest kx points tp1 for model input files pest kx points dat Parameter values written using single precision protocol Decimal point always included Instruction files pest heads ins for readi ng model output files pest mod2obs out PEST to model message file na e Record file REC contains parameter values objective function sensitivities etc e Sensitivities for Observations SEO e Sensitivities for Parameters SEN e Residuals RES contains the adjusted calculated vs observed values and residuals The results from these files can be Exported into Excel for charting If the results look reasonable you
292. iaeasdedoosbedeasusvtecsusbocsscnsdascdacaseesesmuasecsenseseloasecebendenassestoag 157 Poin S i O OOn a a a A E E E EE S aS 157 POES s i O a a a a aa E EEN aaa ea aT 166 Polygons i a a a r a ae EE EES A A SP E E OEE U espis osr NENSI 168 S rfac s O r i i a NEE AE C N VE E e E ENN e a a a a ai 169 Wells O e a a a a a a a a a aa a 171 BO GHdded Data PATEAR AEEA A EA A Ca ees av Wa RAE i A RA ABA 179 CFOSS SECTIONS si ciccs TTT T E ceccccoadseverssenisascccuncossvsessencudaysacscucineoassessivecentcusseastbavasey 183 PAGES EE usin vn oa ncn oa ev TO Lae voc os Ries Sed og be Ts Ln UA HEA T T TE LA Dee T aE TER 185 TiMe SChE GUI OS ssc 2evssicccspceecncesacusevaedtedstvecktdendaetsevcececkceocesccboaevavadeedserecececeSoaussersecdeek edececcccedssentiesevesescccecescousseriadicess 194 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW Models sssscccssssscscssssscesssssesesssesesesesssesesescsesesesceesesescseaeaescacaesesceeaearstecaearseeeacars 196 3 Creating Surfaces O Oaa aa aaa aaa Sea a a S Aaa Sa anced SE Aa s SA AAAA ESA EAS Orao Aces IEAA SCORSE ONAE 198 4 Creating New Data Objects cii sciscsciccaccdsiecissassscsssasesteoascedaanaschssseasbencncosnsaengossensasosseanseasute sestunescbsbenspesseebeedsnaneestieds 204 5 Deleting Data Objects cssssesessssscecezetecsrcevutassvasedacsateesdetenssseceedensbdeevavetccedeueyUeeusend gavetscusedesvebdeuse ta aasoreeenseeve dees 207 Part 5 Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 208 Part 6 Data Settings
293. ic p94 relative 0 01 0 0 switch 1 5 parabolic parameter data pg 1 1 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 11 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 12 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 13 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 14 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 19 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 20 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 21 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 22 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 23 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 24 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 25 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 26 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 27 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 28 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 29 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg2 30 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 31 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 32 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 33 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg3 34 log factor 30 1 300 pg3 1 00 01 pg 4 35 log factor 30 1 300 pg4 1 00 01 P Run PEST Click on to start the PEST Run you should see the PEST progress ina DOS window When the run completes you will see several new tabs added to the workflow window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help 11 7 Es gt Run PEST Stop of PEST Check Define Observations Reset Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms a Select Run Type 8 PEST Select Regularization SVD Assist I Tikhonov Regularisation No Regularization
294. ical Engines Define Numerical Mode I Create Grid a EJ Import Model a View Edit Grid MODFLOW 2005 Define Properties MODFLOW 2005 Define Boundary Conditions Version 1 8 00 12 18 2009 Prec single x86 32 bit Select the Next Step OpenMP parallelized using 2 CPU Using NAME file D SampleProject demo data MODFLOW AIRPORT4 Ii Define Observation Zones Run start date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 I Define Observation Wells U S GEOLOGICAL SURVEY MODULAR FINITE DIFFERENCE GROUND WATER FLOW MODEL I Define Zone Budget Zones Period 1 Step 1 I Define Particles Convergence Residual 8 2018813E 03 Max Change 4 0346560E 05 S E Select Run Type Run end date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 Elapsed run time 0 120 Seconds 4 PEST Run Normal termination of simulation Single Run Time O O 1sec Translate Time 1 0 1sec Numerical WallTime 0 2 Total CPU_time 0 1sec in Massel Engines OpenMP parallelzed using 2CPU gt Run e Click the button on the main workflow toolbar to start running the engines You will see the Engine progress in the scrolling window e Note that after a successful run the Heads and Pathlines items will be added the tree in the model explorer e Once finished Click the gt Next step button to proceed View Results e You can then choose to view results in the form of Maps Contours and Color shading or Charts 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 50 VMOD F
295. ical model with grid layers property cell representations and set of cells corresponding to the boundary conditions you created in the conceptual model This process is also described in the help section Converting Conceptual to Numerical Models 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 487 Q VMOD Flex allows you to generate various numerical models from your conceptual model You can calculate the difference in heads or drawdown between several model runs For more details see Compare Heads and Drawdown Once the numerical model is created you will see something similar to the examples below O OF a Convert conceptual model to nur Inspect Define Properties V Column 1 ca mE Toolbox Conductivity ix Zone x Database Rowview 2 Conductivity rai j zlil Layer 1 Row 20 Column 6 X 3825 15 Y 12781 14 Zone 1 0000 Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 NumericalGridi Run Figure 4 Property Zones in the Numerical Workflow 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 488 VMOD Flex Help x To Figure 5 Property Zones in a stand alone 3D Viewer 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 489 Convert conceptual model to nur Define Properties Inspect Define Boundary Conditions Column 1
296. ices Conceptual Modeling Workflow 275 Discontinuity horizons represent an erosional surface in the middle of a stack of horizons It can never be the highest or lowest horizon Horizons above it up to the next discontinuity or erosional horizon will lap onto it while all horizons below it will be truncated by it These horizons can be thought of as the top or base of a sequence Conformable default horizons will be truncated by erosional base and discontinuous horizons Lower conformable horizons will be truncated by upper conformable horizons If a conformable horizon is above an erosional horizon the conformable horizon will conform to the erosional horizon it will be pushed up by the erosional horizon The horizon rules described above are applied after all the horizons are calculated If one of the horizons will be truncated by an erosional base or discontinuity horizon it is a good idea to extend the input data beyond these unconformable horizons in order to truncate them properly Demonstration of Horizon Types The image below shows three surfaces in a 3D Viewer The surfaces are colored Red Green Blue from top to bottom respectively 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 276 VMOD Flex Help You will see that there are spots where the green surface intersects with the red surfaces and likewise where the blue surface intersects with the green surface For numerical models FEFLOW and MODFLOW this geometr
297. id Size Rows Cell Height 100 130 000 Columns Cell Width 100 130 000 Grid Extents Xmin Xmax 3000 000 16000 000 Eram Enter a unique Name for the numerical grid This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the grid is created Enter the grid size and optionally the grid rotation The grid can be rotated counter clockwise about the grid origin by entering a value between 0 and 360 in the Rotation text field e The Xmin and Ymin values refer to the X Y coordinates of the bottom left corner of the numerical grid The Xmax and Ymax values refer to the X Y coordinates of the top right corner of the numerical grid e The Columns and Rows fields allow you to define the Grid Size e Type 100 for both the rows and columns e Click the Next button to proceed to define the vertical discretization 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 3 VMOD Flex Help e Define Numerical Grid Define Vertical Grid Grid Type Deformed x Create Child Grid Description In a deformed grid mesh the tops and bottoms of the model layers follow the horizons elevations You can refine the model layers by dividing the zones into proportionately thick layers Znin 184 170855920891 Min Cell Thickness Zmax 0 1 363 466310940812 Layer Refinement ae Exaggeration KO Row 1 lt lt Back Finish Cancel i e In the Define Vertical G
298. ied interval where coarsening in an interval will remove rows columns in a specified interval In the Settings frame define the row column interval for which the refinement coarsening should be applied by specifying the Start row column and the End row column For example if you would like to refine the grid area between row 20 and 30 you would enter 20 as the start row and 30 as the end row Finally specify the refinement coarsening factor in the Refine by box For example if refine in an interval is selected a factor of 2 would subdivide each row column within the specified interval into two equally spaced rows columns If coarsen in an interval is selected a factor of 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 323 2 would reduce the number of rows columns within the specified interval by a factor of 2 Click the Apply button to show the defined refinement coarsening in the adjacent 2D Viewer 8 1 2 Define Child Grid for LGR A higher resolution block shaped child grid can be created within any numerical grid parent grid and used for running Local Grid Refinement LGR simulations with the MODFLOW 2005 LGR package Refined child grids are often used to improve simulation accuracy around areas of interest within your simulation domain For example refined grids may be needed in e regions where hydraulic gradients change substantially over short distances as would be common near pumping or injecting
299. ill allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours HH Render as cells Show color shading 2 Show hide contour lines il Show hide grid lines e In the Toolbox you can select a different parameter group for example Initial Heads and see the corresponding zonation in the Flex Viewers e Click Next Step to proceed to the Boundary Conditions step View Edit Boundary Conditions e Atthis step you can view edit the flow boundaries for the model 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help O O l Inspect Define Boundary Conditions J KAA Select the Next Step Lisi rf FaOe I Define Observation Zones v Layer Layer View I Define Observation Wells 1 i IJ Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Row Select Run Type 1 PEST Run Single Run Column Translate Run Numerical Engines EJ MODFLOW 2005 3D View Results E View Charts E View Maps Toolbox Constant Head Edit Layer 1 Row 37 Column 2 X 3183 36 Y 1124295 Atrribute e From the toolbox select the Desired Boundary condition group Constant Head Rivers etc e Then select Edit Single or Edit Group e Click on a cell that belongs to this group a dialog will appear where you can see the parameters for a single cell or group of cells e Click Next Step to proceed You will arrive at the Flow Boundaries step Proceed to Run or
300. ime Therefore a Stop Time value of 1 time unit is commonly used However if the model is going to be used to evaluate a transient simulation in the future it is probably a better idea to give it a more realistic value corresponding to the potential time frame of interest If a steady state simulation is run using a model containing transient boundary condition data only the data from the first Time Period of each grid cell will be used for the steady state conditions lf a transient model is run for 10 years and a boundary condition is defined only for a period up to 7 years Visual MODFLOW will assume this boundary condition does not exist for the remaining 3 years of the simulation The exception to this rule are the Constant Head and Constant Concentration Boundaries which must be defined for the entire simulation Note For a steady state simulation a minimum of one active grid cell in the model MUST contain a head dependent boundary condition type Otherwise the model is indeterminate 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 382 VMOD Flex Help 10 6 and the solution will not converge This head dependent boundary condition acts as a reference head for all calculations The head dependent boundary condition type can be one of the following Constant Head CHD River RIV Stream STR General Head GHB Lake LAK For a transient simulation the specified initial heads are sufficient for a determinant solution Defi
301. ing Interpolation Domain Tl Use a polygon extent gt OK Cancel Help Select the interpolation method to use for generating the surface Choose from the following interpolation methods e Inverse Distance e Kriging e Natural Neighbor Below are brief descriptions of each interpolation method taken from the GSLIB Geostatistical Software Library and User s Guide Deutsch and Journel 1998 For a description of each interpolation parameter setting click on the setting and a brief description will be displayed beneath the interpolation settings grid Once the settings have been defined click the OK button to generate the surface Inverse Distance The Inverse Distance Squared method is very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 203 point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to the bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other methods for in
302. inish to complete the boundary condition The hand drawn polyline will now turn to a set of red points indicating that a Constant Head boundary condition has been 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help assigned to these cells River The following instructions describe how to assign a River boundary condition in the top layer of the model along the southern edge of the model e First you need to go back to Layer 1 using the steps explained previously e Next you need to import a polyline that defines the location of the River e File Import from the main menu The following window will appear amp Data import gt Ar Data Source Data Type Point si Source File Name Description ets Cea Sate e For the Data Type select Polyline from the drop down list e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles river shp and select Open e Click Next gt gt e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Next gt gt accept the defaults e Click Finish You should now see a new river data object appear in the data tree in the top left corner of the window e Place a check box beside this data object and it should appear in the layer view at the Define Boundary Conditions step e Select River from the list of boundary conditions in the toolbox as
303. ints throughout the model domain and then ask PEST to find for itself those regions within the study area where transmissivity must be greater or less than average in order to ensure that there is good agreement between model outputs and field measurements If we had based our parameterisation of the model domain solely on zones we might not have placed those zones in the correct position for the calibration process to properly infer the existence or extent of such heterogeneity The introduction of regularisation into the calibration process serves two purposes Firstly it brings a high degree of numerical stability to a parameter estimation problem which would otherwise be highly susceptible to the deleterious effects of a singular normal matrix you might have noticed when inspecting hcal rec that PEST was not able to calculate any parameter statistics due to singularity of the normal matrix Secondly if regularisation constraints are appropriately defined model calibration can proceed with a homogeneous unless proven otherwise philosophy that is in spite of the number of parameters at its disposal PEST will make each zone within the model domain as uniform as it can in terms of the distribution of the estimated hydraulic property introducing heterogeneity into a zone only where this is necessary in order to allow a good of fit between model outputs and field data to be achieved Hence any heterogeneity which is introduced as an outcome of t
304. ion Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles S E Select Run Type PEST Run G Single Run E Translate S E Run Numerical Engines E MODFLOW 2005 EJ ZONEBUDGET EJ MODPATH ees View Charts View Maps ts Properties O Aow Conductivity Storage intialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 C River 1 Pumping Wells C Pumping Wells Boundary Coll Zone Budget Particles O Forward Particles z C Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells puts Heads Drawdown 3 a DRUMCO grid Run View Maps e Click the View Maps button e You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Visual demo DRUMCO gnd Run rene xh a Fie Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D Ga o z GOOF Sota drumco Bevation 1 Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 EJ Define Numerical Model View Maps drumco Elevation 3 E Create Grd H Views B drumco Bevation 4 EJ import Model ay E m drumco Bevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid Leger FF bxaggeration 10
305. ion for lake stages THETA THETA Explicit THETA 0 0 semiimplicit 0 0 lt THETA lt 1 0 or implicit THETA 1 0 solution for lake stages Specify several values that assist in the LAK package convergence 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow ss 10 10 1 7 Layer Types The Layer Type Settings window is used to set the LAYCON value and the LAYAVG variables required by the MODFLOW numeric engine The LAYCON value is the layer type index array recognized by MODFLOW MODFLOW has four different Layer Types to choose for LAYCON values as described below e Type 0 Confined Transmissivity and storage coefficients of the layer are constant for the entire simulation e Type 1 Unconfined Transmissivity of the layer varies and is calculated from the saturated thickness and hydraulic conductivity The storage coefficient is constant valid only for Layer 1 e Type 2 Confined Unconfined Transmissivity of the layer is constant The storage coefficient may alternate between confined and unconfined values e Type 3 Confined Unconfined Default setting Transmissivity of the layer varies It is 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ss VMOD Flex Help calculated from the saturated thickness and hydraulic conductivity The storage coefficient may alternate between confined and unconfined values Vertical leakage from above is limited if the aquifer be
306. iption and Instructions For all Z values in the object apply Z Constant Assign the values from Constant nput Parameters __ Parameter Value I Save As New Data Object Execute VMOD Flex supports the following data operations e Arithmetic Operations Polygons Polylines Points and Maps only e Attribute Operations Surface Points Time Schedules only zs VMOD Flex Help e Converting Model Layers to Points Data Object Cross Sections only e Converting Well Tops to Points Data Object Wells only e Calculating Well Head Elevation Z from a Surface Wells only Each type of operation is described in detail in the following sections Arithmetic Operations Arithmetic operations allow you to shift the elevation values in the data object source data according to a user specified arithmetic expression For example you can use this option to drape a map over a specified surface data object You can also shift polylines polygons points up or down by a specified constant value Arithmetic operations can be applied to Polygons Polylines Points and Maps only When the Arithmetic node is selected from the Settings tree the following dialog will display To apply an arithmetic operation follow the steps below e Select the desired arithmetic expression from the Select Operation combo box e f you are unsure of what the expression does refer to the provided description in the Description and Instructions text box e T
307. is new polyline location imagehss data object when Then Create a new creating a river boundary Polylineleo4 data object condition Digitize the polyline in a 2D Viewer XYZ points for Import these as Points Select these surfaces geological contacts 157 data objects when defining horizons Then Create or numerical model Surfaces from these layers data objects Raster Grid of Kx or Import these as Select these data Recharge data from surface data objects objects when defining Surfer ESRI GRD properties or Recharge boundary conditions Visual MODFLOW Select the Numerical Select these files when project or USGS model workflow after prompted to Import MODFLOW files creating a project Model Learn more 5s 9 Learning more gt See Importing Datahs7 for details on importing GIS data images excel spreadsheets or XYZ text gt See Creating Data Objects 204 for more details on digitizing new point polygon or polyline data 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 157 objects gt See Creating Surfaces i9l for more details on interpolating XYZ data to be used as geological layers or 2D parameter distributions 4 1 Importing Data VMOD Flex supports importing data from various standard data types to allow you flexibility in constructing your conceptual model Data can be imported and used in several ways spatial data can be used to delineate and visualize geometry of structu
308. is used for the first nonlinear iteration The damping parameter is adaptively varied on the basis of the head change using Cooley s method for subsequent iterations e Head change criterion HCLOSE After every outer iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the modeled domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations is within the maximums this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Residual criterion RCLOSE RCLOSE is the residual convergence criterion for the inner iteration The PCG algorithm computes the 2 norm of the residual and compares it against RCLOSE Typically RCLOSE is set to the same value as HCLOSE see below If RCLOSE is set too high then additional outer iterations may be required due to the linear equation not being solved with sufficient accuracy On the other hand a too restrictive setting for RCLOSE for nonlinear problems may force an unnecessarily accurate linear solution This may be alleviated with the IITER parameter or with dampi
309. ished defining the layer elevations e Click on the Create Grid button near the top right of the window to create the grid You will see the model tree will get generated on the left side of the window and the NumericalGrid should appear as the last item Refining the Grid This section describes the steps necessary to refine the model grid in areas of interest such as around the water supply wells refueling area and area of discontinuous aquitard The reason for refining the grid is to get more detailed simulation results in areas of interest or in zones where you anticipate steep hydraulic gradients For example if drawdown is occurring around the well the water table will have a smoother surface if you use a finer grid spacing Also layer properties can be assigned more correctly on a finer grid e Right click on the NumericalGrid1 from the tree and select Edit Numerical Grid e Refine the Grid The following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials a Grid refinement Define grd refinement Edit rows Edit columns Select editing options Refine in an interval v Settings Start End me ff Refine by 1 a a Add data to view e The grid refinement works by defining a starting row number and ending row number then a Refine by factor to help you define the limits of where the refinement should be applied you can add data objects
310. isotropy ratio Ky Kx for each layer will be used to calculate the Ky value for each grid cell If the Anisotropy as specified option is used the model will use the Kx and Ky values defined for each property zone Storage e Ss specific storage e Sy specific yield e Eff Por effective porosity e Tot Por total porosity Specific Storage Ss is defined as the volume of water that a unit volume of aquifer releases from storage under a unit decline in hydraulic head due to aquifer compaction and water expansion Using Specific Storage Visual MODFLOW determines the primary storage coefficient sf1 for MODFLOW The primary storage coefficient is calculated by Visual 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 366 VMOD Flex Help MODFLOW to be equal to the specific storage multiplied by the layer thickness Specific Storage x thickness Storage coefficient Please NOTE that Specific Storage is not used in Steady State simulations Specific Yield Sy is known as the storage term for an unconfined aquifer It is defined as the volume of water that an unconfined aquifer releases from storage per unit surface area per unit decline in the water table For sand and gravel aquifers specific yield is generally equal to the porosity MODFLOW uses Ss or Sy depending on the layer type assigned by the user please refer to Layer Type Settings 405 For an unconfined layer MODFLOW uses Sy to determine storage volumes For a confined la
311. isplay the label at the start in the middle or at the end of the line e Orientation to the line Display the label parallel perpendicular or horizontal to the line 6 4 2 Cross Sections The following section describes the available style settings for cross section data objects To access the style settings right click on the cross section data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help General Interpretation Operations Style Wells Interpretation Type Mode v I Show Labels M Show All iv BB Vv FF Vv GG Vv DD Cross section data objects consist of two main elements the interpretation layers and the cross section wells The settings for each element can be accessed by clicking on the Interpretation or Wells node respectively Interpretation A screen capture of the interpretation settings is shown above From the Interpretation Type combo box select which interpretation layer to show in 3D Viewer Select from Model Geology or Hydrogeology When a interpretation layer is selected from the combo box its associated cross sections are listed in the grid below Under the Visible column select which cross section to show hide in 3D Viewer Select the Show All check box to show all the cross sectio
312. ive wet layer in the model The Recharge settings are shown in the following Recharge options window and these are described below e Recharge is only applied to the top grid layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the recharge values assigned to these grid cells will NOT be carried down to the underlying active wet grid cells In this case the inactive or dry cells act like an impermeable barrier to the recharge 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow ss e Recharge is applied to the specified layer It allows the user to assign the recharge values to any of the specified model layer e Recharge is applied to the uppermost active layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the recharge values assigned to these grid cells will be carried down to the upper most active wet grid cell in the same vertical column of grid cells Note A constant head boundary condition always intercepts recharge and prevents deeper infiltration Evapotranspiration The Evapotranspiration distribution can be applied to any of the user specified model Layers If assigned to the top grid layer and some cells in the top layer become dry during the course of the simulation or if some cells in the top layer are designated as no flow cells the MODFLOW program allows the Evapotranspiration to be applied to the grid cells in the upper most
313. ividual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart 4 2D Viewer 1 X Numericalgrid Run x lf Define Modeling Objectives Transport View Charts Define Numerical Model EJ Create Grid PB Import Model L5 EJ View Edit Grid Define Properties 2 Calculated vs Observed Concenrations 730 Time 730 Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step piel Ej Define Observation Wells Transport gt 2221 ms Ar LL m dare oot om toe ff ine Parti SS he mS El Select Fun Type Cele vs Obs Bi PEST Run Time rA E Single Run z320 x E Translate 7 Lab 1755 6 omweso A EJ Run Numerical Engines 2 s a FA B E View Results All Times Pa EJ View Chats N AT Ah EJ View Maps 7 All Obs owl tas ra E concor 1290 2 owi A CONCOO1 A F z 2 3 824 8 OW A CONCOO1 mowa E T OW2 A V OW3 A ff a OW3 A CONCO01 AZIA CONCOOT OW2 A CONC OW2 A CONC OW9G6CONCO01 359 4 824 8 1290 2 1755 6 2221 Observed Concentration mg L Min Residual 2 5E 11 mg L at OW3 A CONCO01 Standard Error of the Estimate 45 75 mey Max Residual 454 4 mg L at OW1 A CONTC001 Root Mean Squared 211 99 mg L Residual Mean 125 02 mg L Normalized RMS 16 96 72 Abs Residual Mean 125 061 mg L Correlation Coefficient 0 99
314. izes the horizontal grid using 20 rows and 20 columns with no rotation However you can customize the grid to your liking by modifying the settings in the horizontal grid dialog shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 317 Name NumericalGrid1 Define Horizontal Grid 3000 000 B Define Numerical Grid Rotation poe nA 0 Add Data Object Grid Size Rows Cell Height 100 130 000 Columns Cell Width 100 130 000 Grid Extents Xmin Xmax Width 3000 000 16000 000 13000 000 Ymin Ymax Height Enter a unique Name for the numerical grid This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the grid is created The grid can be rotated counter clockwise about the grid origin by entering a value between 0 and 360 in the Rotation text field The Xmin and Ymin values refer to the X Y coordinates of the bottom left corner of the numerical grid The Xmax and Ymax values refer to the X Y coordinates of the top right corner of the numerical grid The Columns and Rows fields allow you to define the Grid Size The maximum grid size supported by VMOD Flex is 5000 rows by 5000 columns Click the Next button to proceed to define the vertical discretization Defining the Vertical Grid 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 318 VMOD Flex Help a Define Numerical Grid Define Vertical Grid Grid Type Deformed xj Cre
315. l a as this will allow you to better accommodate more complex geology using Horizon rules To define Surfaces for Grid layers first you need to Create Surfaces import then interpolate XYZ points or Import Surfaces from Surfer GRD ESRI ASC etc Once the surfaces are available in the Data tree select each surface for the appropriate layer elevation being sure to work your way downwards define top of layer 1 first then work downwards A Using Surfaces When using surfaces to define grid layer elevations please keep in mind the following restrictions gt All surfaces must be large enough in area to cover completely the grid extents gt Surfaces must not intersect with other surfaces eg above or below Fix these surfaces or use the Conceptual Modeling workflow to accommodate these layers gt Surfaces must be added in the correct order vertically working from top downwards Once you are finished defining the horizontal and vertical grid click on the Create Grid button at the top middle of the window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 35a VMOD Flex Help 10 3 Once the grid is created there are several options to customize the grid to your project needs The Refine Coarsen button will load a window where you can refine coarsen the grid For more details on this option please see the Edit Grid s21 section The Define Child Grid button will load a window where you can create child local
316. l wells When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab see Well Heads Onlyli73 section Next click on the Path tab and map the appropriate column from the source data to the following target field e Elevation e X e Y e Well ID Please note well path data in your source file must be formatted as follows e Well ID X Y Elevation Well1 574506 3 4863299 36 100 Well1 574506 11 4863299 36 80 Well1 574506 60 4863298 36 68 e etc etc etc etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 179 Each row in the data represents a vertex in the well path When viewed in 3D Viewer VMOD Flex connects each vertex with a line allowing you to visualize the horizontal well path s Once the well path is imported you can manually define screen intervals pumping schedules observation points and well tops in the Wells Table See Well Tablek20 for more information The final step in the Well import process is data validation VMOD Flex will validate the mapped data and highlights any rows that contain invalid data e g null values wrong assigned data type duplicate rows etc fl File Import Oj x Errors and warnings Heads Screens Pump Schedule There are 1 records with errors highlighted in red These records will not be imported Id PW already in the list I Do not import rows with warnings M Mapped Data P
317. l Head boundary and the Specified Head boundary are e the model solves for the head values in the General Head grid cells whereas the head values are specified in Constant Head cells e the General Head grid cells do not act as infinite sources of water whereas Specified Head cells can provide an infinite amount of water as required to maintain the specified head Therefore under some circumstances the General Head grid cells may become dry cells Required Data The General Head Boundary Package requires the following information for each General Head grid cell e Stage This is the head of the external source sink This head may be physically based such as a large lake or may be obtained through model calibration e Leakance The leakance is a numerical parameter that represents the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain In contrast to the River Drain and Evapotranspiration packages the General Head package provides no limiting value of head to bind the linear function in either direction Therefore as the head difference between a model cell and the boundary head increases decreases flow 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 307 into or out of the cell continues to increase without limit Accordingly care must be used to ensure that unrealistic flows into or out of the system do not develop during the simulation The leakance value may be physically based repre
318. l using MODFLOW 96 or MODFLOW 2000 will be set to use the WHS Solver by default 10 10 1 4 1 PCG PCG2 uses the preconditioned conjugate gradient method to solve the simultaneous equations produced by the model Linear and non linear flow conditions may be simulated PCG2 includes two preconditioning options modified incomplete Cholesky preconditioning which is efficient on scalar computers and polynomial preconditioning which requires less 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 392 VMOD Flex Help computer storage and with computer specific modifications is most efficient on vector computers Convergence of the solver is determined using both the head change and residual criteria Non linear problems are solved using the Picard iterations The PCG2 Package is described in Water Resources Investigations Report 90 4048 of the USGS by Mary Hill 1997 which is included in the MODFLOW reference manual on your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The PCG2 solver works on a two tier approach to a solution at one time step inner and the outer iterations Outer iterations are used to vary the preconditioned parameter matrix in an approach toward the solution An outer iteration is where the hydrogeologic parameters of the flow system are updated i e transmissivity saturated thickness storativity in the preconditioned set of matrices The inner iterations continue until the user defined maximum number of inner iterations are execut
319. lar to a groundwater flow model a contaminant transport model requires properties including initial concentrations boundary conditions sinks sources and observations in order to calibrate the transport model run against observed field conditions These steps are described in the following sections 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 115 Define Transport Properties Sorption In this example the only reaction that will be simulated is linear equilibrium adsorption of a single dissolved species the Jet fuel compound JP 4 However depending on the complexity of the problem you are dealing with your model may have several different zones with different sorptive and reactive properties distribution coefficients decay coefficients and yield coefficients for each dissolved species in the model In Visual MODFLOW Flex the properties and processes for the transport model are assigned using the same types of graphical tools as you used for assigning the flow model properties For this tutorial you will not need to modify the Distribution Coefficient value you defined during the transport model setup but you may examine the sorption parameter values as follows e From the workflow tree click on Define Properties to go return back to this step e Under the toolbox choose Species Parameters e Click on Database The Parameters Database window will appear as shown below The default distribution coefficien
320. late the pilot points to their initial value PEST will try to find a value that is as close to the initial pilot point value as possible 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 468 VMOD Flex Help pg4 relative 0 01 0 0 switch 1 5 parabolic parameter data pq 1 1 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 2 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 3 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 4 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 5 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 6 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 7 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 8 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pq 1 9 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 16 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 0001 pg 1 17 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 18 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 19 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 20 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 21 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 22 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 23 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg 1 24 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 25 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 26 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 27 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 28 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 29 log factor 30 1 300pq1 1 00 01 pg2 30 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 31 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 32 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg2 33 log factor 30 1 300 pg2 1 00 01 pg3 34 log factor 30 1 300 pg3 1 00 01 pg4 35 log factor 30 1 300 pa4 1 00 01 EE When you are finished proce
321. ld now appear in the Layer View of the grid it is located in the top middle of the site e Zoom into this area using the mouse wheel or the Zoom in button on the toolbar 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 92 VMOD Flex Help e Click Assign Polygon from the toolbox e Digitize a polygon that traces over the refuelling area When finished Right Click the mouse button to close the polygon You should then see a small menu appear Define Attributes e Define Attributes The Define Recharge Boundary Condition dialog will appear Click Next gt gt to accept the default name In the Define Boundary Condition dialog enter 250 for Rate in units of mm yr Notice that Conc001 has a default of 1 indicating that there is no defined mass flux assigned to this boundary condition You will modify this later on in the Transport section of the tutorial Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just stat and end points Al vertices A From 2D gridded From stapefile From time schedule Transient data From Surface Click Finish You should now see a new zone of cells colored red indicating the new RechargeZone2 with this new value Click Database to see the recharge zones you created and their corresponding values 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Click OK to close the window e Now is a good time to save the project Click Fil
322. le 7 Size 2 T Show in Cutaway region Select the color method symbol and size from the appropriate combo boxes The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show points or vertices in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled points or vertices will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutaways For information on creating cutaways please see Creating Cutaways k12 section Choose from the following color methods e Specified Points are colored using the color specified in the General settings e By Attribute Points are colored based on a specified data object attribute as explained below Color By Attribute Data objects can be colored based on a specified attribute Color rendering can be applied to any shape element that contains attributes To color a data object by attribute follow the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings steps below In the Settings for the selected data object e Expand the Style node and select the shape element to be colored e g Points e From the Color combo box select the By Attribute option e From the Settings tree select the Colors node and the following dialog will appear Settings L E General Colors Operations Select Data vox bi Attribute Max 361 6556 AvgWLevel 7 l Labels Min 244 9531 Color Classification Max 361 6556 E Use
323. le Tools Window Help Workflow 8x ERSA Zs 00b E Data H dumco Bevation 1 Elf Define Modeling Objectives J drumco Bevation 2 BM Define Numerical Model MODFLOW Visual MODFLOW project dumco Bevation 3 B Create Grid DADocuments Visual MODFLOW Tutorial Drumco drumco vm m amp drumco Bevation 4 it Model ig dumco Bevation 5 Ve Importing Conductivity g drumco Bevation 6 mporting ease S Importing leads f VMod imported Wells 3 7 4 arse iid J Importing Visual MODFLOW Boundary Conditions e importing recharge and evapotransporation H O Vie Reading VMod Project D Documents Visual MODFLOW Tutorial Drumeo drumco Importing Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Importing Rivers River 1 importing Pumping Wells Total Wells imported 5 Creating well schedules Please watt import Boundary Conditions and Wells Successfully Finished limpotting Visual MODFLOW ZoneBudget Importing ZoneBi I Zone Budget Successfully Imported Model Explorer Importing Visual MODFLOW Particles Wels Boundary Condition Panir Seose patea jd Import Visual MODFLOW Observation Wells jow 1 les low 102 Propone ow 14 ow 15 E How ow 15a I Conductivity ow 16 E Storage jow 17 3 EE IntialHeads pos 5 Boundary Conditions low la E Recharge low 2 E Evapotranspiration low 21 E Constant Heads sere E Constant Head 1 w26 E Rivers ow 29 E River 0 ow 31 i River 1 bed E Pumping Wells z mes LJ Pumping Wells Boundary Col
324. le button to launch the Time Schedule dialog e From the Data Explorer select the desired time schedule data object e Click the 3 button to insert it into the Select Time Schedule Object field e Once selected the data objects attributes are listed in the combo box below e Select the desired attribute value from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box Use Default Leakance 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 297 The Use Default Leakance option is used to calculated the leakance value for River Drain Lake and General Head boundary conditions using a mathematical expression containing array variables see the section Using Mathematical Formulas and Array Variables in the VMOD Flex User s Manual for more information If the Use Default Leakance option is selected the leakance value will be calculated using a default formula associated with each boundary condition type If this option is not selected a leakance value will need to be entered manually The advantage of using the default leakance formula to calculate the leakance value for the group of grid cells is that each grid cell will be assigned a leakance value proportional to the size of the grid cell Linear Interpolation Explained When the Define values at vertices option is selected two sets of boundary condition data are required one set for the grid cell at the Start Point of the line or line segment
325. lect Run Type 1 fm B PEST Run Single Run 30 Translate E Run Numerical Engines S E View Results Kats bs cael Select Observation Object EJ View Maps Concentration_Obsen Update Method Add Replace Model Explorer T Me IntilHeads mall oe Transport iy Initial Concentrations Conc001 Species Parameters Conc001 Bulk Density Longitudinal Dispersi i Boundary Conditions 5 Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 Constant Head 3 Rivers O River 1 Recharge 5 5 Wells PumpingWell1 5 Observations Heads Observations 7 B A Concentration Observati ut Layer 1 Rowe 70 Column 1 X 17 06 68 24 Atrribute e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help e Select Single Run and click Next Step to proceed e At the Compose Engines step be sure to include MT3DMS in the engine run place a check box M beside this engine in the list e Click Next Step to proceed MT3DMS Translation Settings This section will guide you through the selection of the advection method solver settings and output times that you will use to obtain the solution and results for the contaminant transport model Translate General 4 General Settin
326. levation and Bottom e Screens Screen ld Screen top Z Screen bottom Z e Pump Schedule Pumping start date Pumping end date Pumping rate When working with your own pumping well data for your models you can use this Excel file as a template by having all the fields automatically mapped this reduces the effort required during the import process and minimizes the source of errors Switch to the Screens Tab to see the mapped fields 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services amp Data Import o o E Data Mapping 1 VMOD Flex Help Wellheads Screens Pump Schedule Target_fields Map_to Screen Id Screen top Z Screen Id Screen top Z Unit Screen bottom Z Screen bottom Z ae Source Data Preview Well Id x Supply weni 1415 535 Supply Well 2 7463 dw e Next gt gt The Data Import preview will appear eum E Errors and wamings p Heads Screens Pump Schedule E Do not import rows with wamings _ Mapped Data Preview Heads Screens Pump Schedule Row Well Id x li Supply Well 1 1415 Elevation 18 5 Well bottom Errors 2 Supply Well2 1463 18 4 e Next gt gt lt lt Back Finish The Pumping_Wells will now appear as a new data object in the Data tree 2013 by Schlumberger
327. lex Help MODFLOW Flex conceptual m File Tools Workflow Window Help BETA EE Conceptual Modeli Xx NumericalGridi Runi x 6 OB EJ Convert conceptual model to nun View Results xg OpOW IP Ej View Maps e Click the View Maps button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 51 Bins MOON Reon maae A File Tools Workflow Window Help D a Data Conceptual Modeli X NumericalGrid1 Run1 x lo E Data E E O boundary E ground ja Convert conceptual model to nun 1B layer240p a Define Properties ese be layer2 bottom E Define Boundary Condtions m GB chd west g 2 Select the Next Step ce ii m u Ct H 7 chdeast Ii Define Observation Zones mlae XR PPRSWF EJ Define Observation Wells 1 amp aie Pumping_Wells Ii Define Zone Budget Zones rx Obswells I Define Particles Row MW Select Run Type 50 2 amp PEST Run Single Run Column Translate fm Run Numerical Engines 35 5 EJ View Results 20 View Charts JE Toolbox Legend Color Heads m 325 0000 328 1429 Model Explorer 2 um
328. lex Help 4 1 2 Polylines Polyline data consists of a series of points vertices connected by lines Polyline data objects can be used in VMOD Flex for defining geometry and assigning attributes to linear boundary conditions such as River and Drain boundary conditions Polylines may also be useful to visualizing geographic features such as river and road networks VMOD Flex supports the following file types for polyline data e Shapefile SHP e AutoCAD DXF To import polyline data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Polyline from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description and then click Next to continue The next step involves selecting the coordinate system of the source file and will vary depending on which file type is selected for the source file For SHP files if the associated PRu file is located in the same location as the source file VMOD Flex can automatically detect the coordinate system of the source data and will perform a geotransformation if the coordinate system is different than that defined in the project settings If a PRu file is missing than you will be prompted to select the Coordinate System for the data being imported For DXF files you will always be prompted to select the Coordinate System of the selected source file Click the Next butt
329. lex supports MT3DMS v 5 1 The following sections describes the settings for adjusting the solver advection method output times and miscellaneous settings Translate General 4 General Settings Porosity Options Effective MODFLOW 2005 Courant Number 0 75 Settings Min Sat Thickness 0 01 Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control 3 MT3DMS Solution Method Output Control Output Settings Output Times Porosity Options The Porosity options are used to select which porosity measurement to use for the transport solution For advection dominated transport the best choice is to apply the Effective porosity option then the diffusion into and out of dead end pore spaces can be considered negligible For diffusion dominated transport the best choice is to select the Total porosity option to account for mass transfer to and from dead end pore spaces 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow as Courant Number The Courant number represents the number of cells a particle will be allowed to move through in any direction in one transport step when the MOC MMOC and HMOC methods are used Generally the Courant Number is between 0 5 and 1 0 however values in excess of 1 0 can be used with caution If the upstream finite difference method is used the Courant Number must not exceed 1 0 Since the flow terms in all cells in the
330. ling and a workflow for Conceptual Modeling The workflow panel contains a toolbar and a list of steps required for your current workflow O OF a4 Define Modeling Objectives Collect Dats Obiedts Navigating a Workflow Go to the Previous Step in the workflow Go to the Next Step in the workflow Hide the workflow panel ideal when Ba 7 you want to maximize the viewing space for visualization and editing 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 12 VMOD Flex Help 2 1 Expand the workflow panel this button E gt is only available when the workflow panel has been collapsed Workflow States Beside each state in the workflow there is a corresponding icon The icon helps you to identify which is your current step which steps have been completed and which steps you may proceed to next The image below provides an explanation of this r a3 Workflow Diagram Legend coy gt This is your current step ial You are allowed to move to the step lv The step is completed You need to complete necessary prerequisite steps before moving to the step E Do not show again OK Main Menu The following sections describe the various menu and toolbar options in VMOD Flex File Menu The File menu provides access to standard operations such as open save close project The Project Preferences can also be modified 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Ove
331. llected for rainfall and groundwater recharge doesn t always follow the same time schedules as data collected for other boundary conditions like well pumping rates and surface water levels This approach also makes it difficult to utilize raw field data collected and recorded in terms of real times In Visual MODFLOW a Time Period is similar to a Stress Period but with two important exceptions A Time Period is defined using real times and real time units and Each boundary condition grid cell may contain different Time Periods The advantage of this approach is the ability to clearly see the magnitude of time for each Time Period as opposed to interpreting data such as from Stress Period 1 to Stress Period 2 and it facilitates more convenient methods for importing raw data from different boundary condition types Each group of boundary condition grid cells requires a minimum of one Time Period of data containing a Start Time a Stop Time and a complete set of data for the selected boundary condition type the required data for each boundary condition type are described later in this section For steady state simulations Visual MODFLOW requires data for only a single Time Period while for transient simulations Visual MODFLOW can accommodate an unlimited number of Time Periods For steady state simulations the Stop Time value is irrelevant because the term steady state indicates that the model results are not changing with t
332. llowing formula 7 V R p lt where VR i Retarded Flow Velocity of Species i in units of L T V Average Linear Groundwater Flow Velocity in units of L T Ri Retardation Coefficient of Species i unitless The retarded flow velocity is used to calculate the advective transport of each species Unless otherwise specified during the setup of the Transport model the default soil Bulk Density value for any new model created is 1700 kg m3 If no sorption method is selected in the current Transport Variant then no Bulk Density values are required for the simulation and all of the options in the left hand toolbar will be disabled Longitudinal Dispersion 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services sss VMOD Flex Help Dispersion is a physical process that tends to disperse or spread the contaminant mass in the X Y and Z directions along the advective path of the plume and acts to reduce the solute concentration Dispersion is caused by the tortuosity of the flowpaths of the groundwater as it travels through the interconnected pores of the soil Dispersion is calculated using the equation D ax E ct x Of x 4 pe h h hl where D is the Dispersion Coefficient L2 T is the longitudinal dispersivity L V is the longitudinal velocity of flow along the plume migration pathway L T sz is the horizontal dispersivity L V is the horizontal velocity of flow along the plume migration pathway L T
333. lot points zone3 P8 pilot points zone4 Ja0jdx Ja PON Model Explorer pilot points zone a pilot points zone pilot points zone Zones Outputs Heads Drawdown Properties 5 Fow M Conductivity Storage InitialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Constant Heads Constant Head 0 Wells Wells Zone Budget Zone Budget Observations Observation Wells m Outputs lt m Define Modeling Objectives 5 Define Numerical Model I Create Grid Import Model View Edit Grid J Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step IE Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Select Run Type W PEST Run Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines 5 View Results View Chats View Maps SAMPLE2 grid Run PEST SAMPLE2 grid Run SAMPLE2 grid Run1 Inspect Define Properties Vers BE VI Layer XP PROD 1 Lae ewe Row Column 3D Toolbox Conductivity Zone Database Assign Legend Color Zones Atrribute Layer Row Column HCoord VCoord e Click on Define Properties from the workflow tree if not already selected e From the Toolbox sele
334. low property on top i Translate Recharge to 2nd type boundary condition Evapotranspiration Translate as N OUT flow property on top Translate Evapotranspiration to 2nd type boundary condition Ca ae cones tee The Packages frame contains a list of existing boundary conditions for the conceptual model being translated Here you can include exclude boundary conditions by selecting the appropriate check box in the Translate column The corresponding FEFLOW condition type is listed for each boundary condition under the FEFLOW Conditions column You can also select how Recharge and Evapotranspiration should be represented As Flow Properties or as Type2 Boundary Condition 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help Click the Next button to initiate the model translation During translation output details are displayed in the translation log Once finished click the Finish button to exit the translation wizard 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow sas 10 Numerical Modeling Workflow This chapter presents information on editing data in a numerical model workflow the numerical model can originate from e Importing a Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project or e Executing a Conceptual to Numerical Model conversion The numerical modeling workflow provides the tools for building the numerical model properties and boundaries assigned to grid cells running the
335. lution it may be a result of oscillations due to drying and re wetting of grid cells in sensitive regions of the model Setting a larger cell wetting interval value may help the solution to converge by allowing the heads in neighboring cells to get closer to a better solution before wetting the dry cells Wetting Methods The wetting of a dry cell is triggered by the head values in adjacent grid cells see Wetting threshold above The Wetting method frame has two options for determining the adjacent grid cells to use for determining whether the dry cell should be wetted e From below WETDRY lt 0 will use only the head in the grid cell directly below the dry cell to determine if the dry cell should be wetted This option is generally more stable and is particularly good when the adjacent horizontal cells are poor indicators of whether a cell should become wet e g areas with steep vertical gradients and variable bottom elevations e Wet cells from side and below WETDRY gt 0 will used the head in all four adjacent grid cells and the grid cell directly below the dry cell to determine if the dry cell should be wetted This option is useful in situations where a dry cell is located above a no flow cell such that it cannot be re wet from below It is also applicable for one layer models where there are no cells below However this method can cause some problems in multi layer models where inactive cells occur beneath wet cells Wetting He
336. lution to the contaminant transport model in a relatively short period of time The GCG solver uses an implicit approach to solving the finite difference equations and is usually much faster than the explicit solution method e Click the button in the Advection term frame and select Upstream Finite Difference UFD e To select the GCG Solver select Yes beside Use Implicit GCG Solver The Implicit GCG Solver Settings window will appear in the lower half of the Solution Method settings e Though the Upstream Finite Difference method and the Implicit GCG Solver are computationally efficient the tutorial simulation tracks contaminant transport over a 20 year period In order to speed up the modeling process you will use a nonlinear time step Type the following information in the fields at the bottom of the window e Multiplier 1 1 e Maximum transport step size 200 as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help B gt Translate g Define Modeling Objectives EJ Define Numerical Model Create Grid E Import Model View Edit Grid Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones WW Define Particles Select Run Type E PEST Run Single Run EJ Translate Run Numerical Engines View Results View Charts View Maps D B Output Settings Translate E General 4 General i Settings Advecti
337. ly a few inner iterations are being performed for every outer iteration and an appropriate mass balance is not achieved this parameter value can be decreased by one or more orders of magnitude e Damping Factor for the Outer Iterations Default 1 This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the dampening factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to acceleration parameters used in other solvers e Relative Residual Criterion Default 0 This parameter provides another method of checking for convergence of the inner iteration This method compares the residual from the most recent inner iteration to the residual from the initial inner iteration Once the most recent inner iteration residual is below the initial inner iteration residual times the relative residual criterion the current outer iteration is completed and a new outer iteration will be started 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 10 10 1 4 4 SIP Numerical Modeling Workflow 397 Factorization Level Default 0 There are two levels of factorization available with th
338. lygon polyline Data Source The folder path of the data source when the data was imported Color The color of the data object when displayed in 2D and 3D Viewers Click the color box to select a new color for the data object Description The description of the data object as defined during import This field is editable allowing you to update the description at any time Table Button The table button allows you to view the geometry and attributes of the data object in a table view For more information on the table view please see Viewing the Data Tabled section 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings zs Details The Details node contains information on the coordinate system of the data object and the field mappings specified during import Statistics The Statistics node displays a count summary of the various data elements that comprise the data object For example for polygon data objects the statistics node will show the number of polygons polygon parts and vertices in the data object For cross section data objects the number of wells and cross sections is displayed For Property and Structural Zone conceptual model objects various statistics are automatically calculated and displayed under the statistics nodes including Min and Max X Y and Z values Area and Volume 6 2 Data Table General The data table allows you to view the geometry and attribute values of a data object The data t
339. m S Conceptual Mode 2 C Mode Boundary een S A Structure Horizons Zones i Properties Simulation Domain Preview 3D Viewer 1 NumericalGridl Run Sample Runl Conceptual Model Quick Overview Instructions Define geological surfaces for your conceptual model and provide Horizon hierarchy rules Pre requisites Two or more surface data objects have been created or imported boa Result Horizons and Structural Zones are created Next Steps Define Property Zones b78 At this step you define the geological structure for the conceptual model by converting surfaces to Horizons Horizons are stratigraphic layers 2D surfaces with topography that define the upper and lower boundaries of the structural zones in a conceptual model In VMOD Flex horizons are created by clipping or extending interpolated surface data objects to the boundary of the conceptual model When horizons are created VMOD Flex will automatically generate the Structural Zones geologic formations between the horizons which can be used later to define property 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 272 VMOD Flex Help zones This segment is separated into the following sections e Defining Horizons e72 e Explanation of Horizon Types k74 e View Structural Zonesk771 Defining Horizons 9 Before You Start Make sure you have all the surface data objects that you want to use t
340. mberger Water Services sos VMOD Flex Help where e COND is the Leakance for each General Head grid cell e KAVG is the Average Conductivity e FACEAREA is the surface area of the selected grid cell Face for each General Head grid cell automatically calculated during translation e UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same Length L and Time T units used by COND e DIST is the Boundary Distance the distance from the external source to the assigned general head boundary If the Use default conductance formula option is not selected the fields used for calculating the General Head Conductance value Distance to Reservoir Average Conductivity are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for General Head boundary conditions can be specified using a polygon data objects Drain For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the standard Drain Boundary Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Drain grid cells is stored in the projectname DRN file Currently for finite element model translation this boundary condition is not supported MODFLOW s Drain Package is designed to simulate the effects of features such as agricultural drains which remove water from the aquifer at a rate proportional to the difference between the head in the aquifer and some fixed head or elevation
341. mberger Water Services Working with Your Data 161 AE Data Import Tables Select Table or Query View Tables Boreholes d p C View Queries M Preview Source Data Row ID x Y rA Layer2 Name Layer3 Layer4 gil 536212 689999 481402999999 2323 5 2623 5 GB 01 2823 5 3123 5 o 536156 69 4814049 99999 2326 2626 2826 DE n 4814063399993 2325 2626 1 Ce 69 4814019 99999 2322 2622 s 535048 50935 Fi O Coe 4814069 99999 2330 5 2630 5 o 4814029 99999 2333 2633 2833 3133 gle 53549869 4814039 99999 2329 5 2629 5 geo p es e 2035 as 535295 69 4814029 99999 2338 2638 535232 69 4813999 99999 2339 5 2639 5 E p12 12 536225 92 4814281 79999 2325 93 2625 93 F 536129 740000 4814379 69999 2324 85 2624 85 E 2824 85 3124 85 14 536065 76 4814320 19999 2323 05 2623 05 CE N 535960 34 4814251 29999 2324 26 2624 26 16 535866 679999 4814349 39999 2326 56 2626 56 GB 16 2826 56 3126 56 bd lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Her Next select the Coordinate System of the data being imported If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next gt gt button to continue to the next step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 162 VMOD Flex Help RE Data
342. me and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue e The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and choose a subset of the source data e g a worksheet of an excel file Select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 172 VMOD Flex Help which row to import from using the From Row text field e VMOD Flex provides you with various options for importing wells and associated well data For example you can choose to import well heads Well ID X Y Elevation Bottom or you can choose to import wells heads along with related screen locations pumping schedules or observation points ini xi m Select the type of wells to import Vettical C Deviated Horizontal r Select the format of the vertical data in your data source Elevation Measured depths m Select the type of data you want to import Well heads only IDX Elevation not required Well heads wiht the following data C Screens ID locatior ial Pumping schedule Observation poini I Gbseryedihead I Observed concentration lt Back Next gt gt Cancel In the Select the type of wells to import frame choose between Vertical and Deviated Horizontal Note For Deviated Horizontal Wells only well heads and well paths can be imported via the import process Wells screens observation p
343. meet these requirements will not be included For information on defining well data i e screens pumping schedules please see Well Tablelz2a section VMOD Flex will then add the boundary condition under the Boundary Condition node in the Conceptual Model tree Theory Every model requires an appropriate set of boundary conditions to represent the system s relationship with the surrounding systems In the case of a groundwater flow model boundary conditions will describe the exchange of flow between the model and the external system In the case of a mass transport model the boundary conditions will also describe the exchange of solute mass between the model and the external system The following sections present an overview of the boundary condition packages supported in VMOD Flex Each section includes a brief description of the boundary condition including the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 301 input data required by MODFLOW and the supported data objects for defining the boundary condition geometry The following boundary conditions are discussed in this section Well The pumping well boundary condition is used to simulate wells or other features that withdraw water from or add water to the model at a constant rate during a stress period where the rate is independent of both the cell area and head in the cell For finite difference translations VMOD Flex uses the Well WEL package
344. meter changes have little or no impact on the model results these are non sensitive or insensitive parameters This should help you to property select parameters to include in a PEST run as you should focus more on the sensitive parameters and less on the non sensitive parameters e The observation times for heads lie within the start stop time of the numerical simulation If you have imported a model from Visual MODFLOW Classic ensure that an appropriate start date was defined in Visual MODFLOW Classic before loading the project into VMOD Flex If you have generated the numerical model from a conceptual model workflow ensure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow a that the start date at the modeling objectives is appropriate based on the head observation times you have defined Setting up a PEST Run PEST requires several inputs and a number of steps that must be completed in a specific order Fortunately VMOD Flex provides the PEST GUI in a workflow that guides you through the sequential steps and necessary inputs running PEST and analyzing the results e Add Observations and Assign Weights e Define PEST Parameters Property Zones Boundary Conditions e Define Pilot Points e Define Kriging Variograms e Select Regularization Options None Tikhonov SVD Assist e Define PEST Run Settings e Run PEST e Run Sensitivity Analysis e Analyze Results e Update Model Inputs Each of
345. more details Theory The following sections present an overview of the property zone parameters required for flow and transport models in VMOD Flex A flow model requires Conductivity Storage and Initial Heads property values for each active grid cell in order to run a flow simulation Similarly a transport model requires transport parameter values for each active grid cell in order to run a transport simulation Upon creating a Visual MODFLOW project the default flow and transport parameter values are assigned to every grid cell in the model domain This will ensure the model has the minimum data required to run a simulation However in most situations the flow and transport properties will not be uniform throughout the entire model domain and it will be necessary to assign different property values to different areas of the model Heterogeneous model property values are supported by Visual MODFLOW using either Constant Value Property Zones or Distributed Value Property Zones These two different approaches are described below Constant Value Property Zones The Constant Value Property Zones approach is the most simple and straight forward and can be used for all model properties supported by Visual MODFLOW Different model properties are accommodated by grouping grid cells sharing the same property values into property zones Each property zone will normally contain a unique set of property values and is represented by a differe
346. mple of the pilot points on top of conductivity zones is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow ass The general steps are as follows e Select the desired points object from the model tree e Click Next Step button to add these points e Select which parameter zones the points represents eg Kx Zone1 or Kz Zone5 In the table in the lower half of the window specify which pilot points are Fixed Fixed pilot points are those that have initial values that are well known and will not be adjusted during the PEST run Examples of these include points where you have pumping slug test data For all other points their initial value is taken from the property zone in which the specific point lies VMOD Flex handles these Fixed pilot points the following way In the PEST Control file e these pilot points parameters use Fixed Transformation and the initial value defined in the table above will appear beside each point and e the regularization information for these fixed parameters is not included under the prior information section this is only applicable when one of the regularization options are used in the PEST run Once you are finished be sure to repeat these steps for the other parameter zones you have included 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help A Note You must create a set of pilot points for each of the parameter zon
347. mputer Program FHB1 for Assignment of Transient Specified Flow and Specified Head Boundaries in Applications of the Modular Finite Difference Ground Water Flow Model MODFLOW Open File Report 97 571 U S Geological Survey Required Data The specified flux package requires the following input parameters e Starting Flux L3 T e Ending Flux L3 T Supported Geometry The geometry for Specified Flux boundary conditions can be specified using polygon or polyline data objects 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 34 VMOD Flex Help 8 Defining Grids Meshes At this step you can create finite difference grids for MODFLOW or finite element meshes for a FEFLOW run Define Finite Dvference Grid Define Fiste Element Mesh Quick Overview Instructions Create Finite Difference Grid bis or Create Finite Element Meshbzs Pre requisites The Conceptual Model has been defined 263 Result A numerical grid or mesh is created Next Steps Convert the conceptual model to a MODFLOW modells34 Convert Conceptual Model to FEFLOW finite element modells34 Once you have created your conceptual model you can discretize your model using either the finite difference method or the finite element method The finite difference method involves fitting your conceptual model to one or more finite difference grids Once converted the resulting numerical model can be viewed edited and then simulated in the VMOD Flex
348. n 10 Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wiref cor Ej Define Properties JiS FF Q Eaggertion irtual gri irtual grid size reframe Head_Observations E Define Boundary Conditions 3 EJ Select the Next Step Row I Define Observation Zones T fj EJ Define Observation Wells je Define Zone Budget Zones Column Heads I Define Particles p a Efi Select Run Type 12 336 PEST Run 7 30 3 Single Run x mm 13 288 EJ Translate Game 8 4 2740 Run Numerical Engines Toolbox EJ View Results Legend Es 5 4 93 E View Chats Color Heads m m 16 145 J View Maps 12 3356 4 m Mm 17 097 13 2879 GS 28 050 Moda Bor o 002 EET 15 1927 F i Row A 4 i Conductivi 16 1451 Storage 17 0974 IritialHead a Tenpat 18 0498 i Initial Conc 19 0022 ConcO 5 Species P Conc0 Buk Densi Longitudin Boundary Conditior 2 Constant Heac Constant H Constant H a Constant H Dg Rivers L 0 River 1 Recharge Wells PumpingW E Outputs a Aow Z Heads I iC Drawdown J s Layer 1 Row 5 Column 22 X 647 9 1779 64 Heads 18 9482 e When you are finished click OK e Take a moment to view the Heads in other layers by changing layers as described earlier e You can also view the heads along specified row or column and in 3D view View Charts Heads e Click on View Charts from the workflow tree and the chart window will appear e In the side toolbar tur
349. n Numerical Woridlow Select the desired workflow s and click OK In addition you can load a specific workflow through the model To reload a Conceptual Model workflow right click on the Conceptual Model node in the model tree and select Open Related Workflows 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Multiple Model Scenarios a Delete Translate to Finite Element Model Open Related Workflow s Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all To reload a Numerical Model workflow right click on the desired Run node in the model explorer and select Open Related Workflow Open Related Workflow s Settings Delete Expand to selection iz Expand all child nodes Collapse all 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 482 VMOD Flex Help 13 VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic Introduction This document describes how to pass models from VMOD Flex to the VMOD Classic Interface and how to load the results from a VMOD Classic run back into the VMOD Flex environment 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic a When do you need to switch to VMOD Classic Interface All new projects should begin within the Flex interface however if you need to use the following features then you will need to migrate to the VMOD Classic interface to complete that portion of your project
350. n The default value of 0 means that the MT3D calculated value will be used NOTE If the implicit solver is not selected then this value will be ignored and the value for 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services aa VMOD Flex Help DTO will be taken from the Output Control settings Maximum transport step size TTSMAX Default 0 This value is the maximum time step size allowed when a multiplier greater than 1 is used Setting this equal to zero imposes no maximum limit Multiplier TTSMULT Default 1 This is the multiplier used to calculate the size of the next transport time step when the finite difference method is used with the implicit GCG solver A value between 1 and 2 is generally adequate Using a time step multiplier will degrade the solution at later times when the timestep becomes large but can significantly decrease the amount of time needed for the solution If one of the particle based methods or the TVD method is used this value will be ignored 10 10 3 2 1 Technical Review Contributed By Christopher J Neville S S Papadopulos amp Associates Overview of MT3D Solution Methods MT3D offers two general options for simulating solute transport 1 When the pure finite difference methods are used FD all terms in the governing equation are treated simultaneously with advection dispersion reactions and source sink mixing terms represented with finite difference approximations 2 When the operator
351. n reduce the required run time significantly The Initial Head values are also used to calculate the drawdown values as measured by the difference between the starting head and the calculated head Transport Properties Initial Concentration In many cases the historical conditions of the site are unknown and the contaminant source has been removed or remediated However the groundwater contamination is still present and the mass transport simulation must be run forward in time starting from the existing conditions to predict the potential downstream impacts The Initial Concentration properties define the existing conditions background groundwater concentrations of each chemical 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 367 species being simulated Initial Concentrations must be defined for each chemical species that you have defined in the Define Modeling Objectives the default value is 0 Bulk Density The Soil Bulk Density is used to calculate the Retardation Coefficient for each chemical species according to the following formula Ri 14x Ka n where Ri Retardation Coefficient of Species i unitless pb Soil Bulk Density in units of M L n Effective Soil Porosity in units of L L Kd i Distribution Coefficient of Species i in units of L M The Retardation Coefficient is used to calculate the retarded flow velocity VR i of each chemical species according to the fo
352. n Engines step in VMOD Flex For more details see Run Numerical Engines VMOD Classic Change over to the VMOD Classic interface in order to add and complete the following portions of your project Transport MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT MNW package ETS1 Package Import MODFLOW Files from VMOD Flex VMOD Flex translates the numerical models into standard MODFLOW package files To migrate your model from VMOD Flex to the VMOD Classic interface you must import these translated files into VMOD Classic as described below 1 2 Start Visual MODFLOW Classic Select File Import MODFLOW Browse to the folder that contains the Translated MODFLOW files from VMOD Flex the Output Folder circled above Choose the project_name MODFLOW IN file that was generated by VMOD Flex Enter a name for the Visual MODFLOW project Follow the Import MODFLOW Wizard if you need assistance refer to the Import MODFLOW Files section in the VMOD Classic web help 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic a After the model is imported you can review the model inputs in the VMOD Classic Interface Visual MODFLOW D SamplteProject cm sample project data MODFLOW NumericalGrid1 Run MODFLOW 2005 sampleproject vmf Var001 F rid Wells ropertie Boundarie articles eip Ky cm s 0004 Kz cm s Active Distribution Array 4E5 M E 0 007 0 0007
353. n a M Classification Type Classes Stretched Number of Classes 9 D C Classified C Equal Intervals fi Color _ 255 0 0 Dy 255 146 0 20 012925 E 227 255 3 19 4274875 Wy 118 255 15 18 84205 I 64 255 83 18 2566125 64 255 208 17 671175 B 40 149 246 17 0857375 E 8 8 255 16 5003 Min 16 50 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 250 VMOD Flex Help The Colors node provides options for coloring the surface layer by elevation value The following options are available Show Color Fill This option allows you to show or hide the color fill If disabled the surface will appear in the color defined in the General settings Transparency This option allows you to make the surface appear transparent When the Transparent checkbox is selected use the adjacent slider bar to set the level of transparency Type Select the type of gradient to use for coloring the surface Select Stretched to use a continuous color gradient or select Classified to use discrete color zones Classes There are two options for defining the number of classes to be used Number of Classes and Equal Intervals e Number of Classes Specify the number of color classes in the text box e Equal Intervals Specify an interval spacing and the number of classes will be determined from the range of the attribute data For example if your data rage is 100 and you specify
354. n adjust the Time Extrapolation Limit this value is used by PEST to search for the nearest observation time for comparing to calculated MODFLOW output times The higher the value the more likelihood that an observation time can be found to match the MODFLOW output times The default is 100 in the project time units 11 2 Define Parameters At the Define PEST Parameters step select which model input types you wish to include in the PEST run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 452 VMOD Flex Help Ea Apply Define Observations p Define Property Parameters DJ Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Foi Select Parameter oe ging Vanogran se p arameter ied To Tansformation gt T Grou P Tied Ti Transf Se b v Conductivity Kx None lt Log na PEST F nductivity e x g z Cond Kz Non Lo 4 i Storage Ss None X None X ON Storage Sy None X None X 000 Select Property Zone Use Parameter Zone Value Min Max r m a m 7 K 2 30 1 300 v Kx 3 30 1 300 W Kx 4 30 1 300 Parameter Settings In the table at the top of the window select which parameter s you want to include VMOD Flex currently supports the following parameters e Conductivity Kx and Kz e Storage Ss and Sy Note Ss and Sy should only be included in a transient VODFLOW run This list of available parameters will be extended in future versions to include more parameters from both the flow and transport models
355. n geometry and optionally one or more add ins Add ins are lines points or polygons within the model boundary which VMOD Flex uses as focal points to create nodes during finite element mesh creation By default the Add ins List contains the model boundary and any linear or point boundary condition currently defined for the conceptual model Additional add ins may be added to the list using data objects from the Data Explorer Note To avoid unstable mesh designs it is recommended that all add in objects are pre processed such that there is equal spacing between vertices on polygons and polylines Data object geometry can be edited using the 2D Viewer editing tools For more information please see Digitizing amp Editing Geometry in 2D Viewers 204l To add an add in using a data object from the Data Explorer e Leaving the Define Finite Element Mesh window open select the desired data object 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 328 VMOD Flex Help from the Data Explorer e In the Define Finite Element Mesh window select the Add in Lines Points Polygons button located below the Add ins List An Add in may be included or excluded in the mesh creation by checking or unchecking the corresponding check box respectively When an add in is checked it will also be displayed in the adjacent 2D Viewer preview window Defining the Horizontal Mesh Settings In the second dialog in the Define Finite Element Mesh
356. n on the check box beside All Times and All Obs e Click Apply and the chart should appear as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ua VMOD Flex Help File Tools Workflow Window Help PECA E Data amp aiport ground surface airporttayer2 op aiportiayer3top D8 airporttayer3 bottom discontinuous aquitard 4 Pumping_Wells fp iner OX Point LIT Head Observations S E Run Numerical gid Inputs B B Properties oo Flow C Conductivity Storage i C InitialHeads Ey Transport i Initial Concentrations C Conc 001 lly Species Parameters i Conc001 I Bulk Density Boundary Conditions Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 C Constant Head 2 E Constant Head 3 EH Rivers i C River 1 Recharge L Wells i PumpingWell1 Observations Heads Observations Heads C Drawdown HE C Longitudinal Dispersion 1 1010x OPON EG Be 2D Viewer 1 X Numericalgrid Run X amp E E Define Modeling Objectives View Charts El Define Numerical Model EJ Create Grid IR import Model EJ View Edit Grid ini EJ Define Properties EJ De
357. n3 Click on the Translate to Finite Element model button and the following dialog will appear Alternatively you can select the Conceptual model folder in the tree and select Translate to Finite Element Model from the pop up menu 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models sa F Translate to Finite Element Model hE Define FEFLOW Simulation Settings Settings mmaytesta Finite Bement Mesh FiniteHlementMesh1 v Output name C Users Administrator Desktop VMODRex Projects NumericalModels FEFLOW FiniteElemer Translation Log file C Users Administrator Desktop VMO DAlex Projects Numerical Models FEFLOW FiniteHlement Mes Problem Class Separat e flow problem Simulation Type Steady state v Fow Type Saturated media groundwater hd Translation Format FEFLOW v 5 404 ASCII FEM file X Start Date 10 5 2005 Start Time 12 00 00 AM Steady State Simulation Time day 1 Project Description A brief description of the project By default this is the name of the current VMOD Flex project Finite Element Mesh Select the desired finite element mesh from the combo box to use for model translation Output Name Click the El button and specify the output name and directory for the FEM file that is created during translation The FEM file is an ASCII file containing information on the problem class and model
358. nd interpret in 2D 3D Build geological models and flow boundaries Design structured and unstructured grids Build inputs for Local Grid Refinement LGR Recommended for new groundwater models Numerical Modeling Impor Visual MODFLOW projects impot USGS MODFLOW data sets Recommended for existing flow models NOTE ff you need to maintain a model that uses PEST Transport or SEAWAT you must continue to use VMOD Classic interface e Select Numerical Modeling and the Numerical Modeling workflow will load The first step is to Define Objectives 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Define Objectives e In this step you define the objectives of your model and the default parameters Visual MODFLOW Flex sample File Tools Workflow Window Help EE S IL Data 9 oE BS Define Modeling Objectives S Define Numerical Model e105 POW FIG Ae Ea Data Define Modeling Objectives P jel Flow type E Transport Active d Saturated Constant Density 0000 00000 F Simulation type Groundwater Flow Available Engines USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS __ _ _ sy USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET MODPATH 000 ZOO0LPPRPiaa S 005 P7 Start Date 4 24 2013 Br Property Settings aes san Name Description Mobile FON a 6 4 Conductivity gt BEE conco m jo Kx m s 0 0001 Ky m s 0 00
359. nd type of interpretations in the source data are shown e g Model Geology and HydroGeology Click the Finish button to import the cross section data Upon importing a new cross section data object will be added to the Data Explorer 4 1 8 Maps Site maps of the model region such as aerial photographs topographic maps and satellite imagery are often useful for gaining a perspective of the dimensions of the model and for locating important characteristics of the model Although maps do not contain any specific data used in the calculations and the presence of a map does not influence the results of the simulation they are useful for enhancing visualization of the model VMOD Flex supports the following raster graphics file types BMP Bitmap 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 186 VMOD Flex Help TIF Tagged Image Format JPG JPEG Interchange Format Note When a raster image is imported into VMOD Flex the source file is copied and saved in the project s data repository folder As such the original file may be modified moved or deleted without affecting the imported raster image To import a map into VMOD Flex follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Map from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the data and click Next to continue Next select the C
360. ndary Conditions io 6 0 Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges C Pumping Wells E 0 Particles When the conversion is complete you can click on the Next button on the workflow toolbar which will take you to the Define Properties bsa You can then proceed through the numerical model workflowls4 Converting MODFLOW Grids with Child Grids When you convert a Grid that contains one or more child grids for an LGR run the inputs on the model tree will contain objects for the parent model and each child model In the example below Conductivity1 Storage1 InitialHeads1 are the property values for the Parent Grid Conductivity Child grid1 Storage Child grid1 and InitialHeads Child grid 1 are the property values for ChildGrid1 The same convention applies for boundary condition cells there is one entry for the parent grid boundary cells and one entry for each of the child grid cells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 338 VMOD Flex Help i C Constant Head 1 i stant Heag id ani 0O ant Head west C Constant Head west Child grid1 After a successful MODFLOW LGR run you will see multiple entries in the Output directory Heads for the parent grid and Heads for each of the child grids and likewise for Drawdown 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 339 2 C NumericalGrid1 aR S O LGR E
361. ndition Select these surfaces when defining horizons or numerical model layers Select these data objects when defining properties or Recharge boundary conditions 262 VMOD Flex Help 7 3 Create New Conceptual Model At this step provide the conceptual model area and the start date j Misc Tc Daa ins G O O gourd E Deine Modein Oteecoves a G nn Otea Define Conceptual Modal 2 Deine Conceptus Modei DOO bonda e Save AG doean e PG awen re Name AG men so ESLT Cescoten Stat date Model irea Select eoming date object Projection Type Coordinate Symems Datum Word Geodetic Spain 1384 Conceptual Model 20 Viewer 1 Quick Overview Instructions Provide a polygon for the conceptual model area Pre requisites A polygon data object has been imported or createdboal Result Conceptual Model tree is defined Next Steps Define Model Structurek70 Once you have imported sufficient raw data into your project you can begin to construct one or more conceptual models using imported or digitized data objects as building blocks At this step you need to define some basic information about the conceptual model and provide a polygon that represents the model area You can import a polygon shapefile DXF file as described in the section Import Polygons hes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 269 Or if you do not have a
362. ndition attributes Attributes can be assigned from those stored in Surface Time Schedule Shapefile and 3D Gridded data objects You can also set attributes as Static no change over time or Transient changes over time e For this tutorial you will assign a static constant head value e In the empty field located below the Starting Head field type 347 for the Starting Head and Ending Head Finish button Repeat these steps to define the other constant head boundary condition e Click on Define Boundary Conditions in the tree e Select the Define Boundary Condition button e Choose Constant Head select the chd west polyline and define a value of 325 for both the Starting Head and Ending Head e Click Finish The following display will appear Before you proceed you will define one more boundary condition a River 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 35 Click on Define Boundary Conditions in the tree and select the Define Boundary Condition button Choose River for the boundary condition type From the Data Explorer select the river polyline Click the button in the Define Boundary Condition dialog to add this polyline to the input e A warning may appear about clipping the polyline click OK to continue e Click the Next button e Define the following attributes for the river Stage 335 Bottom 333 Riverbed Thickness 1 Width 10 Riverbed conductivity 0 01 m s E
363. nditions EIE Select the Next Step Engines to Run Define Observation Zones W Define Observation Wells E ngine T E Deine ne Boe ares P MODFLOW 2000 IV Se MODPATH Ww PEST Run ZoneBudget T Single Run l j EJ Translate EJ Run Numerical Engines Single Run i View Results Before attempting to run a parameter estimation simulation make sure your model meets the following requirements e The model runs successfully converges and produces meaningful results The model should provide a solution under a variety of input parameter conditions Parameter estimation is as much an art as it is ascience and therefore it should only be used to complement your own efforts in understanding the system The model has one or more preferably many more observations against which to compare the calculated results Observations can be in the form of measured or estimated values of head or concentration at discrete points in the model or in the form of measured or estimated groundwater fluxes into or out of one or more grid cells It is also recommended that you do a sensitivity analysis prior to a full fledged PEST run In a sensitivity analysis parameter values are individually changed to determine the effect on model calibration and prediction The results give an indication of which parameter changes can have significant impact on the model results these are sensitive parameters and which para
364. nditions are createdke requisit es You have imported a wells data objecth74 with screens and pumping schedule information Result A Conceptual Wells Boundary Condition object is created Create Finite Difference Gridls13 or Create Finite Element Meshh23 Next Steps 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 300 VMOD Flex Help 7 6 3 9 Before You Start Make sure you have imported a Wells Data object that contains well location screens and pumping schedule Refer to Import Wells h7 for more details To add a new pumping well boundary condition follow the steps below e Type in a unique name for the pumping well boundary condition in the Name field This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree under Boundary Condition node when the boundary condition is created e Type in a description of the boundary condition in the Description field optional e Select a pumping wells data object from the Data Explorer e Click the 3 button to insert the data object into the Select Wells Data Object field The wells should then show in the 3D Preview e Click the Next blue arrow to create the data object and proceed to the next step Each pumping well must satisfy the following requirements in order to be deemed valid e The pumping well must located within the simulation domain e Ascreen must be defined for the pumping well e A pumping schedule must be defined for the pumping Wells that do not
365. ne Observations Observation wells can be added to the numerical model as follows First import the observation well data as described in the Import Wells h7 section The observation well data can be viewed edited in the Data Tableke4l section Once you have the head observation data defined navigate to the Define Observations step in the numerical model workflow 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 383 10 7 10 8 H Define Modeling Objectives View Edit Grid Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions inspect Defi ine Observation Wells Select the Next Step Define Observation Zones J Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Select Run Type Translate Run Numerical Engines B View Results View Charts View Maps Views PROV v Layer Layer View 1 5 Row 1 5 Column i 5 3D Toolbox Select Observation Object Update Method Add Replace Merge Layer Row Column HCoord VCoord Atrribute Below the toolbox you will see the insert blue arrow select your Observation Wells data object from the data explorer and click on the 3 button The observation wells should then appear in the 2D view and will also appear as a new node on the numerical model tree Define Zone Budget Zones At the Define Zone Budget Zones step you can view the zone budget zones that been imported from a Visual MODFLOW m
366. ng e Relaxation parameter RELAX The RELAX parameter can be used to improve the spectral condition number of the ILU preconditioned system The value of RELAX should be approximately one However the relaxation parameter can cause the factorization to break down If this happens then the GMG solver will report an assembly error and a value smaller than one for RELAX should be tried This item is read only if ISC 4 e Upper bound of estimate NPBOL IOUTGMG is a flag that controls the output of the GMG solver The possible values of IOUTGMG and their meanings are as follows If IOUTGMG 0 then only the solver inputs are printed If IOUTGMG 1 then for each linear solve the number of PCG iterations the value of the damping parameter the 12 norm of the residual and the max norm of the head change and its location column row layer are printed At the end of a time stress period the total number of GMG calls PCG iterations and a running total of PCG iterations for all time stress periods are printed If IOUTGMG 2 then the convergence history of the PCG iteration is printed showing the I2 norm of the residual and the convergence factor for each iteration IOUTGMG 3 is the same as IOUTGMG 1 except output is sent to the terminal instead of the MF2K LIST output file IOUTGMG 4 is the same as IOUTGMG 2 except output is sent to the terminal instead of the MF2K LIST output file e Multigrid Preconditioner ISM ISMis a flag th
367. ng the entire project as a new file This makes it difficult to keep track of various versions of the model and which inputs lead to specific results etc In VMOD Flex a numerical model run can be duplicated or cloned and managed and modified in a single project This facilitates an iterative approach to modeling by allowing you to adjust a few input parameters translate and run and interpret the results You can also 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services o VMOD Flex Help Compare Heads or Drawdown between model runs to other scenarios To Clone a numerical model follow the steps below B H O a E AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid g E 1 Open Related Workflow s Clone Settings Delete Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all After this the model tree will be duplicated and added under the selected numerical grid a new Numerical Model workflow will then load where you can work with this model run clone 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow aa 5 I Model Domain ee Boundary Conditions L E ARPORT TF mE A B Run Original GL input Model Run 6 C Properties 1 C Boundary Conditions Properties Boundary Conditions Outputs a e The Workflow and Model Explorer are closely associa
368. ning property values for structural zones For more information on creating surfaces from points data see Creating Surfaces ho VMOD Flex supports the following file types for points data e Shapefile SHP e AutoCAD DXF e Text TXT e Comma Separated Values CSV e Access MDB e Excel XLS For Points data the following data must exist in separate columns in your source data eX e Y e Elevation e Attribute 1 optional e g conductivity e Attribute 2 optional e g layer 2 elevation e etc To import points data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu The import dialog will open F oet moor BES Dats Sasca Dua Type Port Souno Fin Name BE Denergare Can cre Heti Select Points from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 159 Enter a Name and a Description optional for the imported data and click Next to continue e The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and will vary depending on which file type is selected For CSV and TXT files shown below select the appropriate delimiter from the Delimiters frame e g if it is a CSV file you would select comma Specify which row to start importing from using the From row selector
369. nly available when you define the property zone geometry using a polygon data object This method allows you to assign an attribute value using an attribute from the specified polygon data object Follow the steps below e f you have not already done so create the Property Zone Using Polygon Data Object baal as described above Select the Use Shapefile Attribute from the method combo box e Under Attribute column the combo box contains all the attributes of the specified polygon e Select the desired attribute from the combo box Once the property zone attributes have been defined click the Save button to create the property zone Once created the property zone is added to the Conceptual Model tree under the Properties node and under the appropriate parameter category node 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 286 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model E 4 Conceptual Modell i C Model Boundary By Structure Transport Property Zones If you need to include contaminant transport in your model then the properties for transport will be done in the numerical workflow Be sure that in the Define Modeling objectives step in the Conceptual Model that you have selected Transport Active After you define a numerical grid and create a numerical model the transport properties will be defined at the Define Properties lss step 7 6 Defining Boundary Conditions At this step define the boundary conditions for the
370. ns for the selected interpretation layer Select the Show Labels check box to show the label for each cross section Wells The wells node contains settings for changing the appearance of the cross section wells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings as These settings are described below General Operations Style Interpretation M Show Wells Tl Show Labels Line Style _ _ Kh x Line Width Preview Apply OK Cancel Help Show Wells Check this option to show the well geometry Show Labels Check this option to show the well label above each well Line Style Select the type of line to display Choose between solid or dashed Line Width Specify the width of the wells Color Change the color of the wells Click the Apply button to display the changes in an active 3D Viewer window 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 246 VMOD Flex Help 6 4 3 Wells The following section describes the available style settings for Wells data objects To access the style settings right click on the well data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings The Wells settings are divided into three sections Well Head Well Path and Well Tops Well Head The Well Head node provides options for changing the ap
371. nsformation options e Fixed The parameter value is fixed and takes no part in the parameter estimation process e Log The parameter will be log transformed i e the log value of the parameter is optimized rather than the real value of the parameter e None No transformation takes place i e the real parameter value is adjusted If the parameter is log transformed then the covariance correlation coefficients and eigenvector values refer to the log of the parameter However the parameter estimates and confidence intervals refer to the untransformed parameter If you fix a parameter its value will be fixed at its initial value and it will not be part of the estimation process Parameter Zone Settings In the table at the bottom of the window select which parameter zones you wish to include by default all zones from a selected parameter type will be included The Value column indicates the value for each zone in the case where you have distributed parameter values in a zone you will see Distributed in this column The Minimum and Maximum are the lower and upper bounds of the parameter zone The lower and upper bounds should be chosen wisely for example if you know that a zone represents an sandy gravel aquifer then define practical limits for the upper and lower bounds for conductivity for sandy gravel The default values are 1E 15 and 1E 30 respectively The lower and upper bounds are ignored for fixed and tied paramet
372. nsitive parameters This should help you to properly select parameters to include in a PEST run as you should focus more on the sensitive parameters and less on the non sensitive parameters When you go to Run Sensitivity Analysis the following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help fe E D Run PEST Stop of PEST Check Define Observations Reset Define Property Parameters a eee Define Pilot Points PEST control fle PEST Run Log Define Kriging Variograms Select Run Type Sensitivity Analysis 5 PEST Select Regularization IE SVD Assist I Tikhonov Regularisation No Regularization Parameter Estimation Analyze Results Ii Update Model Inputs Under the PEST Control file tab you can see the PEST control file has been automatically generated for you with the appropriate settings for a Sensitivity Run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow QO Es P Run PEST Stop f PEST Check Reset Define Pilot Points PEST control file PEST Run Log E Senstivty Analysis E214 A122 Gf PEST Select Regularization 11 single point 100 SVD Assist 5 0 2 0 0 3 0 011 Tikhonov Regularisation 5 0 5 0 0 001 No Regularization 0 1 poeta ft 0005430013 Analyze Results parameter groups WW Update Model Inputs pal relative 0 01 0 0 switch 1 5 parabol
373. nt grid cell color The Constant Value Property Zones approach requires the development of a conceptual model whereby each hydrostratigraphic unit of the model is assigned a uniform set of property values For example consider an aquifer where there is pumping test data and slug test data indicating a range of horizontal conductivity values from 1x10 4 cm s to 5x10 4 cm s at different locations within the aquifer The conceptual approach would assign a uniform Kx and Ky value of 2 5x10 4 cm s to the entire aquifer This value would be adjusted up or down for calibration purposes within the range of values reported If a reasonable calibration cannot be achieved using this conceptual model it may be necessary to sub divide this region into several zones to accommodate local irregularities in the flow pattern However almost all modeling textbooks strongly recommend to start out simple first and get as close a solution as possible and then make the model more complex if necessary Distributed Value Property Zones The Distributed Value Property Zones approach is currently only available for Conductivity Storage Initial Heads Initial Concentrations and Dispersivity properties This approach is a little more complicated because it involves linking a property zone to one or more parameter distribution arrays containing data interpolated from scattered observation points When a property zone is linked to distribution array the property values assign
374. o a solution at one time step Outer iterations are used to vary the factorized parameter matrix in an approach toward the solution An outer iteration is where the hydrogeologic parameters of the flow system are updated i e transmissivity saturated thickness storativity in the factorized set of matrices Different levels of factorization allow these matrices to be initialized differently to increase the efficiency of solution and model stability Inner iterations are used to iteratively solve the matrices created in the outer iterations The solver parameters for the WHS method are described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 396 VMOD Flex Help e Maximum Number of Outer non linear Iterations Default 50 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of outer iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand Fifty iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Maximum Number of Inner Iterations Default 25 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of inner iterations to be performed This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the current set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand Twenty five inner iterations should
375. o be processed much faster However this also results in a loss of resolution of the data and some local scale minimum and maximum values may be missed If you are experiencing performance issues try lowering the number of cells on the X Y axis Point Style 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview This setting provides two options for displaying points in 3D Viewer Basic and Advanced If the Basic option is selected 3D Viewer will render the point shapes in the 3D Viewer On some computers this option may hinder the performance of the 3D Viewer If the Advanced option is selected 3D Viewer will use bitmap images to display the points If you are experiencing performance issues display points in 3D Viewer the Advanced option should be selected Note The Basic option only supports cube and sphere symbols for displaying points Restore System Settings Use this option to reset the factory style settings If you open a project from Hydro GeoBuilder some of the new display features may not immediately show up Please select Tools Restore System Settings Then save the project close and reload and this should correct the problem Project Color Palette 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help VMOD Flex provides an option to use Project wide Color Palettes This is useful when you have multiple data objects that are rendering the same attribute eg heads from different model runs conducti
376. o construct the geological model Surfaces can be created or imported as explained at the Collect Data Objects ke step To create a new horizon e From the Data Explorer select the surface data object that will be used to generate the horizon e Click the 2 Blue Arrow button to insert it into the Horizon Information table If the selected surface is greater than the conceptual model area it will be clipped by the conceptual model boundary polygon If the surface is less than the conceptual model area it will be extended to the conceptual model boundary Note Surfaces should be added from top to bottom starting with the top surface ground surface and ending with the bottommost surface e Click the Add Horizon button to add a new horizon row to the Horizon Information table e Inthe Name column type in a unique name for the horizon e Inthe Type column select the appropriate horizon type from the combo box For information on each horizon type please refer to Horizon Types b74 e Repeat the steps above to add additional horizons Remember you must have at least two horizons before VMOD Flex can create the structural zones e You can preview the horizons in 3D Viewer by clicking the Apply button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 273 Conceptual Model p B Define Modeling Objectives EJ Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure EJ Define Conceptual Model
377. object VMOD provides an option to use Project wide Color Palettes This is useful when you have multiple data objects that are rendering the same attribute e g heads from different model runs conductivity distributions and you want to make qualitative comparisons between these This is challenging when each data object has its own min and max values and are colored based on this However this becomes much easier when these data objects all read from a common color palette If this option is checked on you can access the color palette and adjust min and max values See Project Color Palettes 1s for more details e For the selected attribute you can define various settings These settings are described below Type Select between Stretched or Classified The stretched option allows for color shading i e continuous color gradient The classified option allows for discrete intervals i e zebra in the color gradient Classes There are two options for defining the number of classes to be used Number of Classes and Equal Intervals Number of Classes Specify the number of color classes in the text box Equal Intervals Specify an interval spacing and the number of classes will be determined from the range of the attribute data For example if your data rage is 100 and you specify a 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 239 10 interval spacing 10 classes will be created As the number of intervals
378. odel In future releases you will be able to define new zone budget zones The Flex Viewer allows you to view these in 2D plan cross section and 3D Views Define Particles At the Define Particles step you can view Forward or Reverse particles that have been imported from a Visual MODFLOW model In addition you can create new particles from Points data objects 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ssa VMOD Flex Help Click on the Assign button and the following window will appear F amp S Create New Particles Select Point Object Release Time gt 0 Particle Type Assign to Layer Foward Curent Backward e From the Data Explorer select a Points data object that represents the particle locations If you do not have a file containing points then you can create and digitize new points using the drawing tools Refer to Creating New Data Objectsleo4 for more details e Click the 2 button to insert the data object into the input field e Select the Particle type from the radio buttons below e Specify the Release Time e Finally select the vertical location for the particles if you selected 2D points then you should Assign to the current layer the particles will be added to the center of each cell in the current layer If you selected 3D points then the Elevation value for each point will be read and this will determine which model layer the particles will be inserted into
379. odeling e Learn how to define new property zones and boundary conditions e Define inputs for contaminant transport e Translate the model inputs into MODFLOW and MT3DMS packages e Run MODFLOW 2005 and MT3DMS engines e Understand the results by interpreting heads drawdown and concentrations in several views e Check the quality of the model by comparing observed heads to calculated heads and observed vs calculated concentrations Creating the Project e Launch Visual MODFLOW Flex e Select File New Project The Create Project dialog will appear e Type in project Name Airport e Click Browse button and navigate to a folder where you wish your projects to be saved and click OK 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Define your coordinate system and datum or just leave the non cartesian as defaults e Define the Units frame For this project the default units will be fine The Create Project dialog should now look as follows F Create Project Project Information Name Exercise Data Repository D Documents VMODFlex Description Project Coordinate Coordinate Systems Units AAE Conductivity Length Pumping Rate Specific Storage Time Local Cartesian Datum Word Geodetic System 1984 e Click OK The workflow selection screen will appear i Select Modeling Scenario Conceptual Modeling Import raw GIS data a
380. odular Ground Water Model User Guide To The Link AMG LMG Package For Solving Matrix Equations Using An Algebraic Multigrid Solver U S Geological Survey Open File Report 01 177 Mikhail E M 1976 Observations and Least Squares IEP NY 497 pp Nash J C and Walker Smith M 1987 Nonlinear Parameter Estimation an Integrated System in Basic Marcel Dekker Inc Monticello NY 493 pp National Ground Water Association 1985 1987 1989 1992 Practical Applications of Groundwater Models Proceedings published by NGWA Dublin OH Nielsen D M editor 1991 Practical Handbook of Ground Water Monitoring Lewis Publishers Chelsea MI 717 pp Ozbilgin M M and Dickerman D C 1984 A Modification of the Finite Difference Model for Simulation of a Two Dimensional Ground Water Flow to Include Surface Ground Water Relationships U S Geological Survey Water Resources Investigations Report 83 4251 98 pp Peaceman D W 1983 Interpretation of Well Block Pressures in Numerical Reservoir Simulation with Nonsquare Grid Blocks and Anisotropic Permeability Society of Petroleum Engineers Journal v 23 no 3 p 531 543 Poeter E Zheng C and Hill M editors 1998 MODFLOW 98 Colorado School of Mines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services soa VMOD Flex Help Golden Colorado Pollock D W 1994 User s Guide for MODPATH MODPATH PLOT version 3 A particle tracking post processing package for MODFLOW
381. oints and well tops for horizontal wells can be defined later in the Wells table For more information on the well table please see Well Tablel20 Next specify how the vertical data is expressed in the source file If the data is expressed with respect to a vertical reference datum e g above mean sea level then select Elevation If the vertical data is expressed as a depth e g distance from ground to the bottom of the well then select Measured Depth Select the type of vertical well data to import horizontal wells not supported Select the Well Heads Only option to import just the well heads i e X Y coordinates elevation and well depth for each well Select the Well Heads with the Following Data option to import additional data for each well Options include 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 173 Screen ID Location Import the screen locations for each well Select the Pumping Schedule check box to also import related pumping schedules for each screen This data could be used later to define pumping well boundary conditions Observation Points Import observation points for each well Select either Observed heads Observed Concentrations or both Well tops Import the elevation or measured depth of points along the well path where formation tops horizons intersect with the well This data could be used later to generate surface and horizon layers Well Paths Please see Well Heads with W
382. olumn 1 X 28 05 Y 920 36 Atrribute e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Boundary condition types e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views Each boundary condition group of cells will appear as its own node in the model tree You can right click on this to adjust style settings In addition you can load any group of boundary condition cells into a stand alone 3D Viewer 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 372 VMOD Flex Help E AIRPORT2 REVISED i C Model Boundary E Model Domain Q Boundary Conditions 3 C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid Run E Inputs GL Properties i C Fow TE C Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges C Pumping Wells In general each boundary conditions has the same set of graphical tools on the left hand toolbar for editing the model boundary conditions The following is a description of how to use these options For specific descriptions of the data requirements and data entry options refer to the sections describing each boundary condition type Edit gt e Edit gt Single is used to edit one or more grid cells belonging to the same group of boundary condition cells e Edit gt Group is used to edit all of the grid cells belonging to the selected group of boundary condition cells The following window will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numeric
383. olygons General Head For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports translation of the General Head Boundary Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for General Head grid cells is stored in the projectname GHB file Currently for finite element models translation of this boundary condition is not supported The function of the General Head Boundary GHB Package is mathematically similar to that of the River Drain and Evapotranspiration Packages Flow into or out of a cell from an external source is provided in proportion to the difference between the head in the cell and the reference head assigned to the external source The application of this boundary condition is intended to be general as indicated by its name but the typical application of this boundary condition is to represent heads in a model that are influenced by a large surface water body outside the model domain with a known water elevation The purpose of using this boundary condition is to avoid unnecessarily extending the model domain outward to meet the element influencing the head in the model As a result the General Head boundary condition is usually assigned along the outside edges sides of the simulation model domain This scenario is illustrated in the following figure 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 306 VMOD Flex Help Piyer Boundary Head Model Grid schematic of General Head Boundary The primary differences between the Genera
384. om Previous MODFLOW Run Warning The selected HDS file cannot be the same as the HDS file in the current translation directory If you select Use HDS from Previous MODFLOW Run you must choose a HDS file from another directory Or make a copy of the HDS file from the current translation directory rename this eg Model_InitialHeads HDS and choose this file 10 10 1 10Anisotropy 411 Horizontal anisotropy is the ratio of transmissivity or hydraulic conductivity along a column to its component value along each row The Anisotropy settings in Visual MODFLOW may be accessed in the Run section by selecting MODFLOW Anisotropy from the top menu bar The Anisotropy Factor window as shown in the figure below will provide two choices for determining how the anisotropy is calculated for the model Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Anisotropy Factor Anisotropy Factor 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Translate General 4 General Settings Anisotropy Factor Anisotropy by Layer 5 MODFLOW 2005 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer a VMOD Flex Help e Anisotropy by layer e Anisotropy as specified The Anisotropy by layer option uses the anisotropy ratio Ky Kx Ratio specified for each layer of the model as shown in the figure and the Kx values specified in each grid cell to c
385. ombo box Control Points Table The control points table contains the specified control points You can edit an existing control point by selecting the point from the table and then clicking the Edit button A dialog box will display prompting you to modify the control point coordinates You can also delete a control point from the control points table To do so select an existing control point from the grid and then click the Delete button Georeference Information Table The georeference information table displays information about the georeferenced image including the original image file name and path the original image size and coordinate type projected local or geographic It also displays information on the transformation such as the degree of rotation scale X Y shift and the output file name path and image size Georeference Information Property Value Image File O VM5 6 T estin Image Size Width 1453 Height 1133 Coord Type Projected Transformation Rotation 0 07 Scale 1 006 x Shift 574 140 98 Y Shift 4 862 789 96 Output File Q VM5 6 Testin Output Region Left 574 196 01 Top 4 863 897 78 Width 127 27 Height 74 07 Output Size Width 127 Height 75 r 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 189 Adding Georeference Points In order to map pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known world coordinates To s
386. on Method Upstream Finite Difference UFD amp MODFLOW 2005 Use Implicit GCG Solver Yes Settings Time Steps Solvers 4 GCG Settings Recharge and EVT Max number of outer iterations 1 Lake Max number of inner iterations 50 Layers Relative convergence criterion 0 0001 Rewetting Concentration change printing interval 0 Initial Heads Preconditioners Jacobi G Anisotropy SSOR Relaxation Factor 1 Output Control Dispersion tensor cross tems Lump all dispersion cross terms to the right side MT3DMS Initial step size DTO days 0 Settings Max step size days 200 Multiplier 1 1 Next you will define the output times at which you would like to see the contaminant transport modeling results e Expand the MT3DMS item under the Translation settings and select Output Control The Translation settings will update as shown below Translate General Settings B MODFLOW 2005 Initial Heads E Anisotropy Output Control B MT3DMS Translation Type Settings Solution Method E Output Control Output Times 4 General Simulation time length project time units 200 Max number of transport steps 1000 Specify maximum step size No Maximum step size project time units 1 Save concentation at observation point forever 1 Save onedine summary of mass budget forever 1 Save CMB CCM file mass balance output Yes 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Enter 7300 for
387. on allows you to create a new points data object for each model layer interpretation from all cross sections in the data object that include this interpretation Once the points data objects are created you can then create surface data objects which can then be used to define the horizons of your conceptual model Note This feature is available for model layer interpretations only S Settings General Operations Operations Select Operation Convert model layer interpretations to points data object Description and Instructions Create a new XYZ points data object for each model layer interpretation from all cross sections that include this interpretation The points can then be interpolated to create surfaces Parameter Value J Save As New Data Object Execute To create points data objects from cross section interpretation model layers e From the Select Operation combo box select Convert Model Interpretations to Points Data Object default e Click the Execute button to apply the operation e Once the points data objects are created they will be added to the Data Explorer where they can be used to create surface layers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 232 VMOD Flex Help Converting Well Tops to Points Data Object For Wells data objects only This operation allows you to create a new points data object for each well top formation in a wells data object The resulting
388. on for one or more numerical models In VMOD Flex the conceptual model is completely grid and simulator independent This means you define the inputs using your raw data objects surfaces polylines polygons etc The grid or mesh is only introduced at the time of launching a numerical model This allows you to e Convert the conceptual model to multiple numerical models for uncertainty analysis e Convert the conceptual model toa MODFLOW or FEFLOW model e Easily update corresponding numerical models as your conceptualization changes The sequential step in building the conceptual model are presented in the workflow navigator and are summarized below 1 Define Modeling Objectives keal Ea Define Modeling 2 Collect Data Objects kes Objectives through importing or creating ts 3 Define the Conceptual Model Arealeeal 4 Define Model Structurele7o vertical layering and resulting volume models ad De De De a Se Se Ir 5 Define Property Zones 278l parameter values for Conductivity Initial Heads Storativity 6 Define Boundary Conditions kal constant heads drains pumping wells surface water network etc 7 Define Numerical Grid or Finite Element Meshls14 Finite Difference Grid used for MODFLOW Finite Element Mesh used for FEFLOW 8 Convert to Numerical Modelks4 generate numerical inputs for a MODFLOW model 9 Translate to Finite Element Modellsss
389. on to continue If the file type is SHP the next step involves creating attributes If you are importing from DXF file you can skip this step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 167 loxi Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type ba Create a new attribute WIDTH i Length m 1 Numeric XI M Source Data Preview ID EDMARK_O WIDTH TYPE 1 1 River 2 2 River 3 3 River 4 4 River 5 5 River 6 6 River 9 l River a i lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help This dialog allows you to import shapefile attributes To create a new attribute click the Add a new attribute button When selected a new row will be added to the Data Mapping table In the Map_to column select the desired attribute field in the source data from the combo box Repeat for additional attributes You can delete a mapped attribute by selecting the row from the Data Mapping table and then clicking the Delete button For a description of the Unit Category Unit Multiplier and Data Type columns please refer to section Data Mappinglt3 section Click the Next button to continue The final step involves validation of the data being imported This step will ensure that the data set contains valid data for each of the mapped columns For SHP files please refer to Data Validation 164 section for more information on the da
390. on wells Press the lt Tab gt key again to create a new schedule item The final time in the pumping schedule should have a pumping rate of 0 to indicate the stop time Note If the pumping schedule is not specified for the entire length of the transient simulation then it will assume the well is shut off for the time where no information is available For 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 24 VMOD Flex Help steady state simulation the pumping rate for the first time period will be used as the steady state pumping rate Adding Observation Points Observation Points are the elevations at which head or concentration observations are recorded Although most monitoring or observation wells are installed with a well screen spanning a known interval of the aquifer VMOD Flex requires a single observation point elevation to be defined instead of a well screen interval To add an observation point for a well e Select the Observations option from the Data to Display box This will show the Observation Points table e Select a well from the Well Heads table Click the Add Row button from the Observation Points toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter an observation point ID in the ID field e Enter an elevation value in the Elevation field The MODFLOW simulator supports head and concentration observation wells with multiple observation points throughout the length of the well bore Repeat the steps above to add a
391. onceptual model a a xcn bgt File Tools Workflow Window Help D Hl 7 Conceptual Modeli gt NumericalGrid1 Numerical Model x eoon Si Convert conceptual model to nunj layer2top D Properties Converting conceptual model to numerical model layer2 bottom a chdwest 3 OG chdeast Give Go pee Converting property for itial_heads the layer number is 1 me Converting property for initial_heads the layer number is 2 Conductivity Conceptual model to numerical model conversion has completed Ld Model Explorer its Properties E Fow i O Conductivity Storage3 0 IntialHeads3 Boundary Conditions Constant Heads i C Constant Head 1 C Constant Head 2 During the conversion the run node will be added to the model explorer under the numerical grid that you selected This tree will be populated with all the inputs from your conceptual model Properties Boundary Conditions Wells etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 337 AIRPORT2 REVISED i C Model Boundary CE Properties 6 Simulation Domain E Model Domain C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid 5 O Inputs i a O Properties B Aow pooo d O InitialHeads 2 C Bou
392. oordinate System of the image file If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step All raster images must be georeferenced before importing into VMOD Flex If the selected raster image has already been georeferenced it should have an associated georeferencing tag file and does not need to be georeferenced in VMOD Flex Please note that the georeferencing tag file must be located in the same folder as the selected source file in order for VMOD Flex to recognize it The following table summarizes the supported graphics file types and the corresponding georeferencing tag files Raster Source Georef Tag File BMP BPW TIF TFW JPG JPW lf your source file has a georeferencing tag file you can skip to the final step If the source file does not have a georeferencing tag file you will be prompted to manually georeference the raster image This procedure is described in the following section Georeferencing Images Georeferencing a graphics file involves mapping a coordinate system to the individual pixels of the image When this is required the following window will display when importing a raster image 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 187 Control Points Y 4862795 4863928 f X V Show O
393. op up menu Select Time Schedule from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and choose a subset of the source data e g a worksheet of an excel file Select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose which row to import from using the From Row text field The next step involves selecting the type of time data used in the source file 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 195 iojxi mM Date and Time format in source Relative Start date Start time 8 17 2008 z 12 00 00 AM c abaia Date format Time format M d pyyy K h mm tt X Preview newdate stage a 11 01 2005 16 78 11 02 2005 16 81 11 03 2005 16 85 11 04 2005 16 9 11 05 2005 16 94 11 06 2005 16 94 11 07 2005 16 9 11 08 2005 16 84 11 09 2005 16 78 11 10 2005 16 82 lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help If the time values are expressed in relative time select the Relative option and specify the starting date and time from the combo boxes If the time values are expressed in absolute time select the Absolute option Click the Next button to continue The next step involves data mapping and creating attributes The required target fields
394. or information on the Labels node please see the Labelsle4i section Well Tops The Well Tops node provides options for changing the appearance of the well tops These options are described below General Operations Style Well Head Symbol General Circle id Labels Well Path Size General 4 Labels Transparency 0 Color Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Symbol Select the well top symbology from the combo box Choose from various symbols including circle square cross diamond etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings z Size Specify the size of the well top symbols Color Select a color for the well tops Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Window For information on the Labels node please see the Labels 4 section 6 4 4 Surfaces The following section describes the available style settings for Surface data objects To access the style settings right click on the surface data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings Colors General l Operations Style IM Show Color Fill Colors Contour Line Select Data Attribute Max HHHH H Max 21 18 Min HHHH M Color Template Category Elevatio
395. orehand Two hundred iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased Number of Iteration Parameters Default 5 The finite difference equations describing the groundwater flow system can be put into matrix form as A h q Where A is the coefficient matrix h is the heads array and q is the flux array The number of iteration parameters indicates the number of parameters that will be used to transform the initial coefficient matrix A to a similar matrix that can be decomposed into two lower and upper triangular matrices L and U respectively The default value of 5 is generally sufficient Acceleration Factor Default 1 The acceleration factor controls the magnitude of head change between iterations The acceleration factor must be positive Values larger than one will result in larger head changes between iterations the solution may be approached faster but it may also overshoot the solution more easily Values less than one will result in smaller head changes requiring more iterations to reacha solution Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or met
396. ort the data Once imported a time schedule data object will be added in the Data Explorer Importing VMOD MODFLOW Models Importing Visual MODFLOW Projects 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 197 A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations only If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt Transport MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package To import your Visual MODFLOW project select the VMF file and click OK to continue While the model is created you will see the corresponding inputs added to the model tree Importing MODFLOW 2000 2005 Data Sets Often you may need to import an existing MODFLOW data set into VMOD Flex in order to review the model or evaluate different scenarios VMOD Flex can import existing MODFLOW data sets provided they are in MODFLOW 2000 or MODFLOW 2005 format Note VMOD Flex currently imports MODFLOW 2000 and MODFLOW 2005 Groundwater Flow process files only As a result it will ignore files associated with the Sensitivity Process the Parameter Estimation Process and the Transport Process Support for these additional processes may be added to future versions of VMOD Flex To import a MODFLOW 2000 model data set select the NAM file or MODFLOW IN
397. ose the Database window e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e Click Next Step to proceed e Select Define Observation Wells Define Concentration Observations The final step before running the transport simulation is to add the three observation wells to the model to monitor the jet fuel concentrations at selected locations down gradient of the Refueling Area The first observation well OW1 was installed immediately down gradient of the Refuelling Area shortly after the refuelling operation started The other two observation wells OW2 and OW3 were installed two years later when elevated JP 4 concentrations were observed at the first well OW1 You will import the concentration observations from an Excel file 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 20 VMOD Flex Help File Import Data from the main menu bar Ensure Well is selected as the Data Type to choose the Source File Browse to My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles Concentration_Observations xIs file Open Next gt gt A preview window will appear displaying the source data e Data Import i Work sheet and range Select Worksheet Sheet 1 Preview Source Data Row Well ID x Y Elevation Obs ID Species Date a pli owl 760 1640 16 5 A Conc001 0 ie HE owt 760 1640 165
398. ossessesssessssossosseesessessoscosoessessesessossoessssssssssessosseseee 474 11 Making Changes after a PEST RUN sisisois oesreste eee eiai ii e e iai Eai EELE ENES AAE N R S niaii 476 Part 12 Working with Multiple Model Scenarios 478 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 6 VMOD Flex Help Part 13 VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 482 Part 14 References 501 505 Index 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 1 1 Introduction VMOD Flex is a powerful software package that provides the tools for building three dimensional groundwater conceptual and numerical models using raw GIS data objects The conceptual model approach to groundwater modeling allows you to e Build a conceptual model of the groundwater system prior to the simulation The geological formations property model and boundary conditions are all designed outside the model grid or mesh this allows the flexibility to adjust your interpretation of the groundwater system before applying a discretization method and converting to a numerical model Build the model with minimal data pre processing required Working with grid independent data allows you to maximize the use of your existing GIS data and incorporate physical geology and geographic conditions before designing a grid or mesh Generate and simulate regional and local scaled models With support for MODFLOW LGR package you can design local grids around areas of interest directly within the concept
399. ound E E Define Modeling Objectives oE layer2top f EJ Colect Data Objects Sirt Gid CE layer2bottom ES EJ Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid1 X OG chdwest EJ Define Model Structure 1 chdeast E Define Property Zones river S E Select the Next Step Pumping_Wells E Define Boundary Conditions Obswells Define Pumping Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditic ER Select Grid Type E View Finite Element Mesh View Finite Difference Grid J Convert to MODFLOW Model aes Nanencakae Model Explorer its Properties E Fow i C Conductivity3 C Storage3 InitialHeads3 Boundary Conditions E Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 C Constant Head 2 H Rivers on River 1 E Wells C Pumping Well 1 uts its Properties Ea Fow Conductivity2 D1 Storage2 InitialHeads2 Conductivity Child or _ M Starene Child eri m After clicking on the conversion button a new numerical model workflow window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on the size and type of grid you used and the complexity of the conceptual model inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 336 VMOD Flex Help BViswol MODFLOW Flex c
400. oundary Conditions CHD DRN RCH etc Pumping Wells or Surface Water Network currently under construction e Click on the Define Boundary Conditions button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 32 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Ern File Tools Window Help Workflow 8 ERAIK a A OF D Data x O gound E Define Modeling Objectives NedState DE tayer2top E Collect Data Objects r L1 layer2bottom Define Conceptual Model CHD e a Rate aa Ep OO boundary EJ Define Model Structure E WG chdeast Define Property Zones DR o 150 E WG chd west Select the Next Step 30 175 AGG ives s o Define Boundary Conxitions I 60 200 E Define Surface Water Ne 30 50 E E Define Pumping Wels RC 120 200 E E Define Boundary Conditic Bee H O Sek a F Ta Define Boundary Conditions Define Pumping Wells ec Model Explorer E E Conceptual Model 5 Simulation Domain C Model Domain L E Boundary Conditions e The Define Boundary Condition dialog box will appear on your screen as explained in the following section Define Boundary Conditions e Atthis step you can define flow boundaries for the model e From the Select Boundary Condition Type combo box select the desired boundary condition type e Constant Head e Type name Constant Head East 2013 by
401. owing topics Converting to Numerical Modelb34 Converting to FEFLOW 339 Converting to MODFLOW Quick Overview Instructions Create a MODFLOW numerical model by populating the selected grid with data from the conceptual model Pre requisites Finite Difference Gridb15 has been created Result Anumerical model is generated and added to the model tree The numerical model workflow will appear Next Steps Numerical Modeling Workflowlss l Once you have the conceptual model designed and at least one numerical grid you are ready to populate this grid with the conceptual data Proceed to the Convert to Numerical Model step in the Conceptual Model workflow this is shown in the display below The Select Grid combo box will list all the finite difference grids you have created for your project including grids for use in Local Grid Refinement LGR 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models Select the grid you wish to use and click on the Convert to Numerical Model button Alternatively you can select the desired numerical grid from the Model Explorer tree right mouse click and select Convert to Numerical Model from the pop up menu Visual MODFLOW Fiex z conceptual model EE l E mS File Tools Workflow Window Help PEZA EE TE Conceptual Model x g lee H OB CIO boundary E gr
402. p fx Li ld layer2 top layer2 bottom O boundary GZ chd west chicos Z siver Pumping Wells Obswells Z pathlines pth 8 pathlines tim Z conc contours Z 2cone contours 2cone polayons_L1 3darid Polyine Model Explorer Model Boundary Structure b C Horizons Horizont C Horizon2 M Horizon3 mductivity Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 tial Heads C Property Zone 3 Simulation Domain Model Domain B Boundary Conditions Constant Head 1 C Constant Head 2 O River 1 Pumping Well 1 7 NumericalGrid1 S litt A fl Object m Exaggeration 22 Se am u 2 Conceptual Model NumericalGridi Run 3D Viewer 1 3D Viewer 2 3D Viewer 3 Bec eo Cy Inbox co cure E Exchass vsu E ATECA E mon E sa Ehehe ja CHA 8 TIAI Sa 216m Figure 15 Concentrations imported as 3D Gridded Data Rendered as a Colormap with Isolines along Row 39 For More Information If you require assistance during importing of models into VMOD Classic or the results back into VMOD Flex please contact our Tech Support team sws support slb com 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services References 501 14 References Online Guides to USGS MOD
403. p Selecting this option will apply the boundary condition to the top layer of the simulation domain e Bottom Selecting this option will apply the boundary condition to the bottom layer of the simulation domain e Side Selecting this option will allow you to apply the boundary condition to a single side or combination of sides of the simulation domain When this option is selected you will be required to define the geometry of the boundary condition by selecting the desired sides of the simulation domain using an interactive 3D Viewer For more information on how to do this please see Defining Boundary Condition Geometry Sides section e Intermediate Selecting this option will allow you to assign the boundary condition to an intermediate model layer within the simulation domain by specifying a Connection Elevation value Upon translation VMOD Flex will assign the boundary condition to the appropriate model layer based on the defined connection elevation value The next step is to define the geometry of the boundary condition Boundary conditions that are applied to the top bottom or intermediate layers can be defined by using a Polygon areal or Polyline linear data object from the Data Explorer e From the Data Explorer select the polygon or polyline data object that represents the geometry of the boundary condition e Click the 2 button to insert the data object into the Select a polyline or polygon from the Data Explorer field
404. pearance of the well heads top of the wells General Operations Style Well Hea Symbol Circle Well Path Size Well Tops 5 Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Symbol Select the well head symbology from the combo box Choose from various symbols including circle square cross diamond etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Size Specify the size of the well heads Color Select a color the well heads Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Viewer For information on the Labels node please see Labels z1l section Well Path The Well Head node provides options for changing the appearance of the well path These options are described below General Operations Style Well Head General M Show Lines Labels Well Path Type General C Well Tops Width g Color Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Show Lines Select this option to show hide the well path Type Specify the line type for the well path Choose between a solid line or a dashed line 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help Width Specify the width of the well paths Color Select a color the well paths Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Window F
405. pilot points zone4 data object from the Data Explorer tree e Click gt Insert button at the top of the Define Pilot Points window to add these points e Select KxZone4 for these pilot points e When you are finished your display should appear similar to the figure below Ee Apply Define Observations Define Pilot Points EJ Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Select existing well point data object Bi ceili araka Pilot points Parameter zones a PEST Sele Regularization Name Group Used Parameter Zone p e eee pilot points zone1 pilot points zone1 Kx 1 pilot points zone2 pilot points zone2 K 2 z Parame rl Estimatic pilot points zone3 pilot points zone3 7 Kx 4 Parameter zone selection Kx_Zone4 x Used Fxed Name Group x Y Value a E ppd pilot points zone4 44718 5366 763280 9756 30 In the table at the bottom of the window you can adjust some parameters for specific pilot points The main use of this table is to specify which pilot points if any are Fixed Hard and their initial values Fixed pilot points are those locations where you are confident in the measured parameter value eg pumping slug test locations and you want these values to remain Fixed during the PEST run Above this table there is a combo box where you select which parameter zone should be shown VMOD Flex allows you to combine multiple pilot point sets eg hard soft for parameter
406. points data objects can then be used to create surfaces which can be used to define the horizons of a conceptual model Well top data can either be included during data import or they can be manually defined in the well table view For information on defining well tops please see Adding Well Tops section To access this operation right click on the desired wells data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu In the Settings dialog select the Operations node and a window similar to the one shown below will display S Settings General Operations Operations Select Operation Convert well tops to points data objects Description and Instructions Create a new XYZ points data object for each formation The points can then be interpolated to create surfaces Input Parameters _ Parameter Value I Save As New Data Object Execute To create new points data objects from well top formation follow the steps below e Select the Convert well tops to points data objects option from the Select Option combo box selected by default e Click the Execute button to apply the operation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 233 Mge hga_welltops_Coarse Gravel M38 hga_welltops_Medium Sand Me hga_welltops_Gravel i i hga_welltops_Fine Sand i hga_welltops_Silt h 3 hga_welltops_Sand MS hga_welltops_Clay iS hga_welltops_Boulder Clay
407. polygon you can create an empty polygon data object then digitize the geometry Please refer to the section Creating New Data Objects e4 for more details In the Define Conceptual Model window as shown above define the settings for the conceptual model e Enter a unique name for the conceptual model in the Name field e Enter a description of the conceptual model in the Description field optional e Specify a start date from the Start Date combo box This will be used for calculating the start date for transient model runs NOTE If you are using pumping wells the start date must match the first start time for your pumping schedule e From the Data Explorer select the polygon data object that represents the conceptual model horizontal boundary and then click the 3 button e Note The model area cannot be defined using a complex polygon or one that contains multiple polygons A complex polygon is a polygon that intersects with itself e Click the Save button Once you are finished click gt Next Step to proceed Conceptual Model Tree Once a conceptual model is created a new conceptual model tree is added to the Conceptual Model Explorer The conceptual model tree sets up the workflow for structural and property modeling assigning boundary conditions numerical grid creation and numerical model translation A typical conceptual model tree is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 270 VMOD Flex Help
408. port e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu Click Next Step to proceed View Maps option when presented with the desired output format View Maps Concentrations e By default the Heads will be shown in the Maps view In order to see the Concentrations you need to turn off Heads from the model tree and set Concentrations to be visible e Locate the Output node on the model tree e Remove the Checkbox beside Heads e Add a checkbox beside Concentrations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 2 Visual MODFLOW Fiex Airport ata ee lll a T _ File Tools Workflow Window Help D Hl 2D Viewer 1 x Numerical grid Run x gt 7o J oE B airport ground surface airport jayer2top 21 S E Define Modeling Obj B jectives mi airportdayer3top m EJ Define Numerical Model S airportdayer3bottom Create Grid a O discontinuous aquitard R E import Model Views E JELU Zp vert View Edit Grid Y Layer I 2 Q refueling area Define Properties 1 RP PROVE Pumping_Wells1 Define Boundary Conditions Layer View Head_Observations1 Select the Next Step Row Concentration_Observations1 Define Observation Wells r J IE Define Zone Budget Zones E Define Particles Column 5 EJ Sele
409. port Model View Edit Grid Define Properties General 4 General E Define Boundary Conditions aidi pe L E Select the Next Step MODFLOW 2005 Start Date 1 20 E Define Observation Wells Settings WW Define Zone Budget Zones lime epe Solvers Define Partick a sah ilps Recharge and EVT B E Select Run Type WW PEST Run E Single Run Layas J Translate Rewetting Run Numerical Engines aal Honds B E View Results i Aniactropy EJ View Charts Output Control View Maps MT3DMS Settings Solution Method Output Control This chapter will cover the following topics MODFLOW Translation Settings eel e Generallss e Time Steps hsa e Solversks0 e Recharge and Evapotranspirationhoa e Layer Types 408 e Cell Rewettinglo7 e Initial Heads 410 e Anisotropy e Output Controlla MODPATH Translation Settings 414 MT3DMS Translation Settings fra MODFLOW This chapter describes the features functionality and options in the Translation section of the VMOD Flex interface The Translation section is where the MODFLOW packages are generated Depending on the numeric engine selected for running the flow simulation the MODFLOW tree item may appear as MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 or MODFLOW LGR 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 10 10 1 1 General Here you can see the output directory where the translated files will be generated Numerical Modeling Workflow 387 You can also see the st
410. ption allows you to assign boundary condition data to the entire zone e Define values at vertices This option allows you to assign boundary condition data to 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 293 the vertices along the zone line and then during translation linear interpolation is used to determine the parameters for the cells that fall between the specified vertices With this method there are two options e Define Start and End Points This option allows you to define the attribute value only at the first and last vertex of a zone e All Vertices This option allows you to define attribute values for each vertex in a zone first last and all intermediate vertices Specifying Boundary Condition Data Boundary condition data can be specified by using the Data Input Grid Each column in the data input grid represents a required attribute for the selected boundary condition For more information on the required parameters for each boundary condition please see the appropriate section under Boundary Conditions Overview boo BoundaryConditionWizardForm Polylines Zones Points Haec aj PLineOZonel PLinel Zone13 PLine1 mM Select how the attributes are defined PLine2 PLine3 PLine4 PLine5 PLine6 PLine PLine8 xl Define for the entire zone C Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation M Use default leakance Riverbed Riv
411. r Services 20 VMOD Flex Help ig Select Modeling Scenario Conceptual Modeling Import raw GIS data and interpret in 2D 3D Build geological models and flow boundaries Design structured and unstructured grids Build inputs for Local Grd Refinement LGR Recommended for new groundwater models Numerical Modeling impot Visual MODFLOW projects Import USGS MODFLOW data sets Recommended for existing flow models NOTE ff you need to maintain a model that uses PEST Transport or SEAWAT you must continue to use VMOD Classic interface e Select Conceptual Modeling and the Conceptual Modeling workflow will load l O Define Modeling Objectives Poller ae is e In this step you define the objectives of your model and the default parameters 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 21 File Tools Workflow Window Help DSH Data E Data Rea 5 View Finite Difference Gnd Available Engi MRE oi hee oh PES pie USGS MODFLOW 2000 rem SWS eed Convert to MODFLOW Model USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET MODPATH oni oo ooo 5 16 2013 Gy Mode Explorer Property Settings S 4 Conductivity Ke m s 0 0001 Ky m s 0 0001 Kz m s 1E05 Storage Ss 1 m 1605 Sy 02 e For this sc
412. r View 5 Boundary Conditions Pumping Wells Boundary Condition DRUMCO grid B Run Legend he n Color Zones 2 0 Pow N M Conductivity 2 Storage C IntialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Boundary Cond Zone Budget C Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles O Fow Observation Wells Outputs Layer 1 Row 64 Column 63 X 1181 88 Y 8 62 Zones 1 DRUMCO grid Run e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Property Groups Conductivity Initial Heads and Storativity e For each parameter group you can choose to render by Zones or by a selected attribute Based on your selection the color rendering in the views will change e Click Database button to see the conductivity zones that exist in your model e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views e The display tools will allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours aa A Render as cells Show color shading 4 Show hide contour lines Hl Show hide grid lines e At the bottom of the display you will see in the status bar the position of your mouse cursor in the current view XY grid position Layer Row Column and the Zone ID or attribute value for the selected cell 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help e Click gt Next Step
413. r Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow s information regarding these parameters can be found in the MT3DMS Users Manual The New Species and Delete Species buttons allow you to add and remove species to your Transport simulation This option is available only for certain transport engines When you Species Parameter tab is selected use the button to Add a new species or use the x button to remove the selected species The reaction parameters window is shown below Available Engines USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS Value Units Brot 7 Should sorbed or immobile phase concentrations be read No When you are finished click Next Step to proceed Changing Modeling Objectives 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services sso VMOD Flex Help 10 2 Define Numerical Model The next step is to choose to Import Model import VMOD Classic project or MODFLOW files or Create Grid create an empty grid Visual MODFLOW Flex sample File Tools Workflow Window Help edie Numerical Model x g f _ Taio POW Import Model Import Model You can import a Visual MODFLOW project or a USGS MODFLOW 2000 2005 data set 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 351
414. r of Layers 3 gt Layer 3 Bottom e Next you will provide a surface for each layer e Click on airport ground surface from the data object tree it should become selected then click on the topmost blue arrow gt beside Use Surface under the Define Vertical Grid table in the row that starts Layer 1 Top If you have done this 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials correctly the table should appear as shown below Define Vertical Grid Number of Layers 3 Elevation Use Surface Surfaces 21 20 16 52 airport ground surface e Now repeat these steps for the remaining layers e Select airport layer2 top Surface data object to the tree and insert this using the 3 as the Surface for Layer 2 Top e Select airport layer3 top Surface data object to the tree and insert this using the as the Surface for Layer 3 Top e Select airport layer3 bottom Surface data object to the tree and insert this using the gt as the Surface for Layer 3 Bottom e When you are finished the table should appear as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help Define Vertical Grid Number of Layers 3 A Elevation Use Surface 21 20 16 52 v 13 44 10 37 v 10 17 4 55 v Layer 3 Bottom 2 02 1 386 v Surfaces E airport ground surface amporttayer2 top gt amport layer3 top E airporttayer3 bottom e You are fin
415. ral zones horizons and features of your conceptual model while attribute data can be used in assigning properties to structural zones and attributes to boundary conditions About the Import Process The data import process in VMOD Flex varies slightly depending on the data type being imported However in general the importing process consists of the following steps 1 Select the data type and source file 2 Specify the coordinate system and datum of the source data 3 Map the source data fields with required target fields and optionally create attribute fields 4 Data preview and validation The following sections provide additional information on the import process for each data type e Pointshs71 e Polylines teel Polygons he e Surfaceslieal e Wellsh7i e 3D Gridded Datah7a e Cross Sections he3 e Maps lies e Time Schedules ho 4 1 1 Points Points represent discrete locations in space XYZ where attribute information is known Examples of points data include ground surface or subsurface elevations well tops locations with known aquifer hydraulic properties etc Typically this information may come from drilling wells or monitoring events where information is gathered from a specific 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 18 VMOD Flex Help location Once imported points data can then be interpolated to generate surfaces These surfaces can be used to create conceptual model horizons or for defi
416. rations in the first layer of the model should look similar to the following figure Visual MODFLOW Flex Airport A ee balm File Tools ETA EE Data i Data amp airport ground surface airporttayer2top 0 aiportiayer3top aiporttayer3 bottom O discontinuous aquitard D iver Q refueling area E Outputs 5 09 Aow Pumping_Wells1 Head_Observations1 Concentration_Observations 1 Model Explorer G Initial Concentrations Conc001 E E Species Parameters Conc001 Bulk Density Longitudinal Dispersion ii Boundary Conditions i Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 Constant Head 3 Wells PumpingWell1 lly Observations Heads Observations Concentration Observations Heads Drawdown S E Transport Z Concentration Conc001 dJ PON FIP Workflow Window Help E E Define Modeling Objectives 2D Viewer 1 X Numericalgrid Run X G El View Maps E E Define Numerical Model E Create Grd 3 I import Model I Fees EJ View Edit Grid Vi Layer E Define Properties i EJ Define Boundary Conditions Elf Select the Next Step Row E Define Observation Wels 5 E Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Column 5 8
417. rcise you will add several head observations wells and analyze these against the corresponding calculated values after the model run is complete First we need to import the observation wells e File Import Data from the main menu bar e Ensure Well is selected as the Data Type e to choose the Source File e Browse to My Documents folder then Visual MODFLOW Flex Projects suppfiles Head_Observations xls file e Open 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 105 e Next gt gt A preview window will appear displaying the source data Data Import g m eee eon x Work sheet and range Select Worksheet From row Observation_Wells hd 1 Preview Source Data Row Well ld x Y Elevation Well bottom Logger ld Logger Z ali owt 1590 77 2662 82 238 38 198 81 1 208 81 p2 OW 10A 1256 48 2985 59 240 32 205 38 1 215 38 PE ows 3146 97 3884 72 234 85 171 48 1 181 48 PHE Ow 15 1060 51 3527 37 238 05 169 14 1 179 14 T gis OW 15A 1037 46 3573 48 241 85 205 159996 1 215 159996 ebak Net Cancel C e Next gt gt VMOD Flex provides you with various options to import well data Choose the radio button Well heads with the following data Then select Observations points Then select Observed heads Ensure you have the options selected as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 106 VMOD Flex Help Cam E e a a O
418. re assigned and modified in VMOD Flex using an assortment of graphical tools appearing on the side menu bar of each Properties screen e Database View and edit the property zone values Each of these tools are described in the following sections For more details on the required flow and transport parameters for each category please see section Background on Flow and Transport Properties bs Database The Database button loads the property database window as shown in the following figure The database window is used for viewing and editing the parameter values and settings for all property zones in the model The functionality and settings for the property zones are described below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 359 Each row of the property database table contains information about each of the model property zones including e Zone number and associated color e Zone parameter values The zone parameter values can be modified by simply entering a new value in the desired field lf you are using distributed range of values for a parameter zone you will see Distributed Values in the field An example is below When you define property zones using Surfaces or 3D Gridded Data sets this will result in a Distributed Property Zone Each group of flow properties exists as a separate item in the model tree as shown below Right click on each node and select Settings This
419. re two options available Select a Heads from the Output tree from another model run in this case click on the Heads node from another model run and click on the button to add this to the field Select a MODFLOW HDS file from the hard drive from another model Click on the Open folder button and browse to a HDS file on the hard drive Click OK A new view will appear The plot shows the results of subtracting the heads selected specified above from the Heads where you launched the Compare Heads option 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 439 f all Residual between Heads and Heads AE Views i ma Attribute Heads a ine 7300 m 4 Layer go pe Ke PROee 1 amp Layer View Row 1 Column 1 E 3D Toolbox Layer 1 Row 1 Column 3 X 179 91 Y 1974 67 Heads 0 The same option is available for Drawdown Just launch Compare from the Drawdown node on the Output model tree and choose the Drawdown from another model run ora DDN file from the hard disk Limitations The comparison calculation has the following assumptions Both models must have e The same start date as defined in the Conceptual Model settings e The same stress periods e Spatial coverage XY extents e Angle of rotation 10 13 Duplicating Models Traditionally multiple scenarios of a model would be handled by savi
420. ree Next you need to add these raw observation wells as observation points for the numerical model e Be sure that the Concentration_Observations data object is selected in the tree button located under the toolbox in the Define Observation Wells workflow step e The observation wells will be added to the display and the numerical model tree under Inputs Observations e Locate Concentration Observations and click on the box beside this data object in the tree MI e You should see several orange points in the model domain that represent the locations where head measurements were taken E Visual MODFLOW Flex Aino E O ac e File Tools Workflow Window Help eae Data 2D Viewer 1 x Numerical grid Run x ai 5 2 COB E airport ground surface airport iayer2top 21 E Define Modeling Objectives aiporttayer3top fa E E Define Numerical Model Suns ees 1 aimorttayer3 bottom E EJ Create Grid Vews O discontinuous aquitard FS Import Model 7 GB river View Edit Gad said KP PROOF IO refueling area Define Properties 1 D few Pumping_Wells1 EJ Define Boundary Conditions Head_Observations1 5 Select the Next Step F Row Concentration_Observations1 Define Observation Wells 1 ol WW Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles Column Se
421. represent the geological structure This grid is useful where you have discontinuous layers Cross sectional view of deformed uniform grid from Visual MODFLOW For Deformed Uniform grids you must specify a Minimum Cell Thickness see above and the Number of Layers 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 321 Once the grid is created it will appear as a new node in the tree as shown below z AIRPORT2 REVISED Model Boundary J B Structure Properties 2 Simulation Domain E Model Domain P ad an Candian O AIRPORT2 REVISED grid gt E rous i 3 0 Properties B Aow i L Conductivity bo hu O InitialHeads 2 C Boundary Conditions 6 0 Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges 6 C Pumping Wells C Zone Budget 6 0 Particles J Outputs i V Heads S Forward Pathlines 8 1 1 Edit Grid When a numerical grid is initially created see Creating a Finite Difference Gridki5 section the horizontal grid spacing is uniform However in many situations it is advantageous to have non uniform grid spacing to allow for finer grid discretization in the areas of interest and larger grid spacing in areas which are less important or where less data is available VMOD Flex allows you to refine or coarsen areas of a numerical grid by adding or removing grid lines within a specified row column interval This process is described in the following section Note You
422. res then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 398 VMOD Flex Help the modeled domain is smaller than one foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the maximum number of iterations is not reached this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Printout Interval Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file e User Seed Value Default 0 01 There are two options either the user can enter the seed or the seed will be calculated at the start of the simulation from problem parameters The iteration parameter seed is used as a basis for determining the sequence of w values The w multiplies each term on the right side of the equation and must be cycled through a series of values in successive iterations to achieve satisfactory rates of convergence The more strongly diagonal the coefficient matrix the less important the choice of seed will be 10 10 1 4 5 SOR Slice Successive Over Relaxation is a method for solving large systems of linear equations iteratively It is implemented in the SOR Package by dividing the finite difference grid into vertical slices and g
423. review Heads Screens Pump Schedule Row x Y Well Id Elevation Bottom Warming status gt 1 574400 4863050 Pw 20 3 3 2 574622 4862900 Pw2 20 3 0 3 574680 4863050 Pw3 17 11 4 574700 4863209 Pwd 18 1 35 5 574710 4862849 39999949 Pw5 16 10 6 574555 4863111 Pw 20 3 3 el 574688 4862999 Pw 22 0 lad lt lt Previous Einish Cancel Help Please see Data Validationhs4 section for more information on data validation Click the Next button to import the data Once imported a Wells data object will be added in the Data Explorer 4 1 6 3D Gridded Data 3D Gridded Data refers to 3D grids with attributes assigned to each grid cell 3D Gridded data can be used in VMOD Flex to visualize heads generated from a MODFLOW run in Visual MODFLOW or for assigning spatially variable attributes to boundary conditions and property zones VMOD Flex supports the following file types for 3D Gridded data e MODFLOW Heads file HDS 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 180 VMOD Flex Help e TecPlot DAT Note In order to import data from MODFLOW HDS files the source file must exist in the folder that contains all associated MODFLOW data files e g DIS NAM etc To import 3D Gridded data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select 3D Gridded Data from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and loca
424. rge rate etc For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attributelesel section Isosurfaces The lsoSurface node allow you to create and modify one or more isosurfaces from 3D gridded attribute data An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space lsosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for representing the spatial distribution of heads drawdowns and concentrations 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 261 Creating an lsosurface To create an isosurface follow the steps below e From the Attribute Name combo box select the attribute from which the isosurface is to be created e Specify the attribute value in the Attribute Value field e Select the color method from the Color box The isosurface can be displayed as a solid color Custom or rendered by a specified attribute ByAttribute e Use the Visible check box to show hide the isosurface e Use the Show Border check box to display hide a color map of the element value on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain e Use the Show in Cutaway check box to make the isosurface visible invisible in cutaways e Use the transparent check box to enable disable transparency If enabled
425. rid screen specify the type of vertical discretization for this exercise the default Deformed grill be used More details on the grid types can be found in the Defining Grids Meshes s14 section e Leave the defaults as is click the Finish button The Grid will then appear as shown in the following screen 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s file Took Window Help Workflow 8 Ghd o Dats 1 G05 ar ene SSS view Finite Diffarance Grid DE layer2bon0m E Dere Concentus Model r QOG OO boundary E Odre Mose Sucre OG hitsa E Define Property Zones Layer View OG hiwa o E Sesa the Not Step OG nen E Sasa Gad Type 1 View finte Donert Mesh 3 e e O Conort Heod Wen E Mmencaind Lyer 1 Row 83 Commn t ie 312817 Y 3050 7 Atribute Conceptual Model 20 Viewer 1 e Click gt Next Step to proceed Convert to Numerical Model Now you are ready to populate the numerical grid mesh with the conceptual elements e Click on the Convert to Numerical Model button to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 40 VMOD Flex Help BVisvel MODFLOW Flex conceptucl mod TE loch micia File Tools Workflow Window Help BETE EE ail E ConceptualModelt x E earl g z 00E OO boundary f f DA ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives Og layer2top m EJ Collect Data Objects PETOS Siaa 1 layer2bottom E EJ Define Conceptual Model NumencalGnd1
426. rizons grid to insert it into the grid NOTE Horizons must be added from the topmost geological layers and working downwards e You can preview the horizons in the adjacent 3D Viewer by clicking the Preview button e Once finished you should see a display similar to the one shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials OF EJ Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure Define Conceptual Model GE 5 f J Define Model Structure bE 2 E B Frere Losas Define Property Zone Horizon Information 7 i Surfaces T eT b ground ec layer2 top IIRS jayerd botiom Preview Exaggeration 1 aap Ses See Name Type Horizont Erosional Horizon2 Conformable Horizon3 Conformable 5000 Bors 15000 e Finally click the o gt button to create the horizons and proceed to the next step Define Property Zones Once you have imported sufficient raw data into your project you can begin to construct one or more conceptual models using imported or digitized data objects as building blocks At this step you can view edit the flow properties for the model There are two ways to define property zones Using Structural Zones or Using Polygon Data Objects 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services z VMOD Flex Help Visual M
427. rom measured values of flow rate and head difference Drain leakance value is usually adjusted during model calibration When a polyline is used to define the boundary condition geometry the default formula for the leakance is as follows COND RCHLNG x LCOND When a polygon is used to define the boundary condition geometry the default leakance formula is as follows COND DX x DY x SCOND where e COND is the Leakance e RCHLNG is the reach length of the drain in each grid cell e LCOND is the Leakance per unit length of the drain in each grid cell e SCOND is the Leakance per unit area of the drain in each grid cell e DX is the length of each grid cell in the X direction e DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the Drain Leakance value Leakance per unit length or area are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a read write field where any value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for General Head boundary conditions can be specified using polygon or polylines Recharge For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Recharge Package RCH included 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 310 VMOD Flex Help with MODFLOW The Recharge input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname RCH file For finite element models recharge boundary conditions are translated as the In Ou
428. roup remain the same The regularisation weight factor by which the initial weights of all members of the group regul are multiplied during each optimisation iteration is calculated in such a way as to respect the PHIMLIM value provided by the user as the maximum tolerable model to measurement misfit for the current case An initial regularisation weight factor needs to be supplied by the user No Regularization If you choose the No Regularization option then no further settings need to be adjusted prior to the PEST run You will be presented with the PEST Control file whereby you can edit adjust values such as the PEST objective function goal number of iterations etc Please consult the PEST users manual for an explanation of these parameters 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 467 Define Observations Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms a Select Run Type I Sensitivity Analysis B PEST Select Regularization E SVD Assist Tikhonov Regularisation E No Regularization rameter Estimation oP ae nah sults u lodat ate Model Inputs pg4 relative 0 01 0 0 switch 1 5 parabolic parameter data pg 1 1 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 2 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pa 1 3 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pg 1 4 log factor 30 1 300pg1 1 00 01 pa 1 5 log factor 30 1 300 pg1 1 00 01 pa 1 14 log factor 30 1 300
429. rouping the node equations into discrete sets each set corresponding to a Slice In every iteration these sets of equations are processed in turn resulting in a new set of estimated head values for each slice As the equations for each slice are processed they are first expressed in terms of the changes in computed heads between successive iterations The set of equations corresponding to the slice is then solved directly by Gaussian elimination treating the terms for adjacent slices as known quantities The values of head change computed for the slice are then each multiplied by an acceleration variable T The results are taken as the final values of head change in that iteration for the slice This procedure is repeated for each slice in sequence until all of the slices in the three dimensional array have been processed thus completing a domain iteration The entire sequence is then repeated until the differences between the head values computed in successive iterations are less than the chosen criterion at all nodes in the mesh The SOR Package is described in detail in Chapter 13 of the MODFLOW reference manual included with your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The solver parameters for the SOR method are described below e Maximum Number of Iterations Default 50 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not rea
430. rview 13 Tools Menu The Tools menu provides the following options Free Memory allows you to free up the memory usage if you have been running a number of high demand 3D visualization operations Preferences Allows you to adjust the 3D Viewer performance preferences 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services u VMOD Flex Help a B Preferences for 3D Viewer OpenGL Driver Use hardware accelerator Use MS Driver Virtual Grd Number of Cells on X Y 60 Point Style Basic only sphere and cube Advanced all symbols Parallel Execution V use parallel Cancel Help OpenGL Driver By default VMOD Flex will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with your graphics acceleration hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers e g poor on screen display performance then VMOD Flex provides the option to use the Microsoft Driver for OpenGL Virtual Grid Depending on the size of your model VMOD Flex may run very slowly during rotations or when data is moved in the 3D Viewer In this situation the virtual grid option may be used to increase the speed of the data processing and image rendering It can be used to set up a uniformly spaced grid with a specified number of rows and columns The virtual grid option will interpolate the data from the model to the uniformly spaced virtual grid This allows a smaller amount of information t
431. ry for Layer 3 4 23 28 PM Tranwiate intial Heads for Layer 1 4 23 28 PM Transiste intial Heads for Laver M2 4 23 28 PM Translate intial Heads for Layer 3 4 23 28 PM Base Package trewater ratio 4 23 28 PM BAS Package 423 28 PM Nex naded 423 28 PM OC Package 42229 PM NOC Py 42329 PM No Dey Cot transistor newize 42929 PM No Dry Cal Package beneter Free 4 72 73 PM NAM Package 42029 PM shana Fie vandster heute 422 29 PM theme Fie transistor Fraize 42 90M ZNRINEITZIENISUTAN Trasee feted ETENTINEITEIENNSND Tieralstion inched succeishdly e Click the Next step button to proceed You will arrive at the Run Engines Step Run Engines 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials O OF gt j Stop a Define Modeling Objectives Define Numerical Mode I Create Grid EJ Import Model View Edit Grid Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Select Run Type W PEST Run Single Run gt Run e Click the Run Numerical Engines oa MODFLOW 2005 MODFLOW 2005 Version 1 8 00 12 18 2009 Prec single x86 32 bit OpenMP parallelized using 2 CPU Using NAME file D SampleProject demo data MODFLOW AIRPORT4 Run start date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 06 12 16 06 38 U S GEOLOGICAL SURVEY MODULAR FINITE DIFFERENCE GROUND WATER FLOW
432. s 422 VMOD Flex Help Numerical dispersion Dispersed fronts Peclet number lt 2 Numerical dispersion minimal Slightly slower runtimes Using the GCG Solver When the GCG Solver Package is specified to be included in a simulation MT3D will do the following e When the particle based methods MOC MMOC and HMOC or the TVD method are used to simulate solute transport the terms on the right hand side are represented with implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations Note The TVD algorithm implemented in MT3D is explicit in time This means that even if the GCG Package is used the time steps in the TVD run will still be subject to a time constraint but only the advection term e When the finite difference methods UFD CFD are used all terms in the governing equation are represented with implicit in time weighted finite difference approximations If the GCG solver is not included then all terms are represented with explicit in time weighted finite difference approximations When the GCG Solver is included during translation the GCG package file projectname GCG will be created in the model run directory GCG Solver Settings Maximum number of outer iterations MXITER Default 1 The outer loop in the iteration process updates all the coefficients that are concentration dependent The default number of outer iterations is one It should be set to an integer greater than one only when a non linear
433. s A Rita beans W3 A CONCOO1 7 OWZ A CONCO001 OW2AONCO01 OW4GECONCO01 359 4 824 8 1290 2 1755 6 2221 Observed Concentration mg L Min Residual 2 5E 11 mg L at OWZA CONC001 Standard Error of the Estimate 45 75 Max Residual 454 4 mg L at OW1 JA CONCO01 Root Mean Squared 211 99 mg L Residual Mean 125 02 mg L Nomalzed RMS 16 36 3 Abs Residual Mean 125 081 mg L Correlation Coefficient 0 59 This time series graph shows the calculated result using a line and point data series while the observation data is displayed only as data point symbols 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 132 VMOD Flex Help 3 5 e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu This concludes the tutorial exercise PEST with Pilot Points This exercise demonstrates some of the advanced and exiting opportunities for model calibration and uncertainty analysis using PEST in VMOD Flex This exercise is based on the problem described in Using Pilot Points to Calibrate a MODFLOW MT3D Model by John Doherty Watermark Numerical Computing and has been adjusted to work with the PEST workflow inside VMOD Flex Objectives By the time you have finished this exercise you will have e used pilot points as a means of characterizing the spatial distribution of an aquifer hydraulic property e used PEST s advanced regularization functionality in conjunction
434. s select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows or enter a specific row column or layer integer Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e The standard navigation tools allow you to zoom pan and in the case of 3D view rotate 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 355 a9 Fie Tools Window Help D H Workflow Data amp Data amp drumco Elevation 1 drumco Elevation 2 amp drumco Elevation 3 drumco Elevation 4 B drumco Elevation 5 drumco Elevation 6 A VMod Imported Wells Model Explorer 3 Wells Boundary Condition z rid uts Properties Flow Conductivity Storage InitialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiretion Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells z Pumping Wells Boundary Co Zone Budget Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow C Observation Wells mits it 5 EJ Define Modeling Objectives EJ Define Numerical Model Cr
435. s feature can be useful for digitizing boundary condition areas property zones or your conceptual model boundary To create a new polygon polyline or points data object follow the steps below e In the Data Explorer right click and select Create New Data Object from the pop up menu The following dialog will display 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 205 x Layer Type nn Layer Name e Select the data object type from the Layer Type combo box e Enter a name for the data object in the Layer Name field e Click the Ok button to create the new data object Once created the new data object will appear in the Data Explorer From here you can define the geometry of the data object using the 2D Viewer editing tools Digitizing amp Editing Geometry in 2D Viewers The 2D Viewer allows you to create and modify the geometry of points polylines and polygon data objects The process of drawing in a 2D Viewer is described below e Open a 2D Viewer by selecting Window from the VMOD Flex main menu and then clicking New 2D Window e Next display the data object that will be edited in the 2D Viewer Note You can have multiple data objects displayed in the viewer while you re editing drawing the data object However make sure that the data object being edited is the active one by selecting the data object name from the Layer combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer window
436. s in areas where predictions are important e decrease bias that is introduced by denser data if appropriate e give equal weight to observations with different units eg Heads vs Fluxes vs Concentrations The weight factor is commonly used to normalize observations of different types For example when you have head and flux observations included in the same PEST run the flux residuals are typically much higher than a head residual For example e a flux residual for a set of cells could be 1000 m3 day e ahead residual at a single cell is 1m PEST calculates the objective function by summing the squares of these residuals which results in flux observation residuals being several orders of magnitude greater than the head 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow s residuals As a result PEST will focus more on minimizing the flux residuals and less so on the head residuals which is most likely undesired from the modeler s view point The solution is a user defined weighting factor w min X w r We use a weight less than 1 0 to reduce the magnitude of flux errors so they are comparable to head errors A similar problem is often seen with concentration targets for the same reason The ability to use weights to address a variety of common calibration issues makes the objective more useful Settings If you click on the Setting button above the Observations grid you ca
437. s in the triangulation providing a nice set of triangles and avoiding narrow skinny triangles There are three triangulation methods from which to choose from Constrained Constrained Conforming and Conforming e Constrained Triangulation in which each segment appears as a single edge in the triangulation As such segments are not subdivided and new vertices are not added to the vertex set A constrained Delaunay triangulation is not truly a Delaunay triangulation because some of its triangles might not be delaunay e Constrained Conforming Triangulation in which triangles are constrained delaunay however additional vertices may be added to the vertex set and segments may be subdivided to ensure a user defined Minimum Angle constraint is satisfied If a minimum angle is not specified vertices are added to ensure all angles are between 20 and 140 degrees e Conforming Triangulation in which each triangle is truly delaunay and not just constrained delaunay Additional vertices may be added to the vertex set to enforce the delaunay property Meshing Algorithm l switch Two Delaunay algorithms are provided for generating the finite element mesh Divide and Conquer and Incremental Typically the divide and conquer algorithm is preferred However if this algorithm fails use the incremental algorithm Total Number of Elements Approx For the Conforming and Constrained Conforming triangulation methods you can specify the desir
438. s particular shape element Select the Transparent checkbox to make the polygon fill pattern transparent Use the adjacent Transparency text box to set the level of transparency e g a higher value will make the fill more transparent The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show areas the polygon in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled the polygon will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutaways For information on creating cutaways please see Creating Cutaways pia Lines General Operations Style Lines M Show Lines Labels Colors Color 3 Vertices Specified Ff Type iil Width 1 Preview 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 2a Select the Color method line Pattern solid or dash line Width from the appropriate combo boxes Choose from the following color methods e Specified Line is colored using the color specified in the General settings e Custom Specify a color for the line element This color will overwrite the default color defined in the general settings for this particular shape element The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show areas the line in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled lines will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutawa
439. s teenies EN SE A TE SE EE A E SEE a areal EE 410 PENNS EE o AAEE AET E A TAA A TE ST es 411 QUEPUt CONTON enaa T A A T A E a a a a a a 413 MODPATH sicviccesdenoesccbhe av ieet secs tives ecoecesaeneteud Varone SUE EOV OnE E Eataa SENSo NOSES ES oseo skopo satos e inatas 415 Discharge Options yh 415 Reference Time Sie 417 MT3DMS sasssesessssseeee we 418 MIS DMS SQUIRES E E eer Ol ashe Airset ea ERR eek 418 MISDMS SOLUTION Method s sziiveraveaccces eseesendescenens T ch seve E ETA cena chc ceva E ates ceseayagays oa dete E A 419 Technical Review iii vcisvdcednions niente ENEE VE Ea ESENE NE ion cima ESO S INEENS aaa a Sa aaa eas 424 MT3 DMS Output Control raara ciccencacesiadeesniadives ects cangioeusgaveidageuveds ch ote covecsddatbvsstiseieciges Mus neaeviear eee cleus 426 11 Run Numerical Engines 12 View Results Conitours and Color A eoe E EE T T A T 430 CANES gt E E e ae EE EE EE ONEA SE N E aae ESETE SAE KAES PENE NEI AEE Aa N EE 433 Compare Heads arid Drawdown mecre e a ea aa a a ea e esaer Ka pe a eE a Aao aS ENEE 437 13 Duplicating Models 14 Export Part 11 PEST Parameter Estimation Workflow 446 T Define Observations ccssesssssdiscsscvctecszgenctssocsccnssdegucsussocansseosecdounsesdcvnoiesuccnn DSi sapaa Sosi enbia sonsos 00S Sioa iE SS SDAS 449 2 Define Parameters Asnnsmnaciisria s a i E EST E E E i S aaas 451 3 Define Pilot Points draseusesssactbenussdencotevesssests c
440. s you want to be generated and what layers should be included Click OK and the shapefile will be created The following options are available for Heads B Export Select Co ordinate System eae rt Tene r Select Heads at All Ti World Co ordinate a oS ia a 500 666 E 2000 Z Null Value in Inactive or Dry Cells 3000 E 4000 1E 30 E E 6000 Bae Select Attributes Select Layers V Select All l Select All 7 Layer 4 Layer 1 V Row E Layer 2 7 Column F Layer 3 OK Cancel Choose which attributes you want to be generated and what layers should be included lf your model has transient heads you have an option to include Heads from multiple times as separate attributes in the shapefile DBF file Choose specific times or Select Heads at All Times to include all heads Notations There are some restrictions on attribute names in DBF files the length is restricted to 10 characters and certain characters cannot be used including decimal hyphens and plus sign As such VMOD Flex uses the following notation For transient heads the attribute name notation is HT head at time followed by the time value An underscore is used in place of a decimal 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow as Mis used in place of hyphen P is used in place of plus For example Calculated head Notation in DBF tim
441. scribed below General Operations Attributes Select Operation Create new attribute Description and Instructions Creates a new attribute with values from the selected data object s attribute Input Parameters _ Parameter Value dataDbject gt 3dGrid_Newkx lt Tl Save As New Data Object Execute This operation can be accessed from the Settings dialog Select the surface or points data object in the Data Explorer right click and then select Settings Once the Settings dialog launches expand the Operations node and select Attribute from the settings tree Select Create new Attribute from the Select Operation combo box Select the 3D Gridded data object from the Data Explorer and select the 3 button to insert the data object into the dataObject field Once the 3D Gridded data object is selected its available attributes are populated in the Attribute combo box Select the desired attribute from the Combo box Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transformed data as a new data object Click the Execute button to apply the operation Once the operation is applied you can confirm that the new attribute was created by viewing 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 231 the table view for the selected surface or points data object Converting Model Layers to Points Data Object For Cross Section data objects only This operati
442. see Defining the Structure 270l for more details VMOD Flex supports various methods for assigning values to hydrogeologic parameters The method used for defining attributes can be defined on the parameter level allowing you to use different methods for different parameters The supported methods include e Use Constant Value e Use Surface Data Object e Use 3D Gridded Data Object e Use Shapefile The following sections provide information on the following topics e Defining a New Property Zone e Assigning Property Parameters e Editing Property Zones e Deleting a Property Zone 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 281 Creating New Property Zone g Before You Start Make sure you have imported or created all the data objects that you plan on using for properties If you wish to use a property distribution Import Surfaces lies or Create Surfaces ha lf you wish to use shapefiles Import Polygons hes or Digitize Polygons koa Before you can create a property zone you must have already defined horizons for the conceptual model For more information see Defining the Structureb70l To define a new property zone follow the steps below e Enter a Name and Description optional for the property zone in the Name and Description fields respectively e Select the method by which the property zone geometry will be defined There are two options Use Structural Zone s and Use Polygon Data
443. sentative amp sws sales slb com Features VMOD Flex supports the following coordinate systems e Geographic coordinate systems data import only e Projected coordinate systems UTM StatePlane e Local Cartesian Work With Grid Independent Data Import spatial and attribute data from a wide variety of data types including e Points XLS TXT CSV MDB SHP DXF TRP e Polygons SHP DXF e Polylines SHP DXF e 3D Gridded Data HDS DAT e Raster Images BMP TIF JPG e Time Schedules XLS 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 5 e Surfaces DEM GRD TXT ASC e Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA Cross Sections 3XS e Vertical and Horizontal Wells XLS View and modify settings for imported data e View data object meta data including the source file name field mappings and the native coordinate system e View raw attribute data in a spreadsheet view e Apply mathematical operations to data e g set an attribute as a constant value convert well tops to a points data object and convert HGA cross section model layers to a points data object e Drape a raster image over a surface data object e g digital elevation models e Set symbol properties for points polygons polylines and display labels using a variety of style options e Color render shape features by attribute value using a classified or stretched color scheme e Show contour lines and set color rendering options for surfa
444. senting the conductance associated with an aquifer between the model area and a large lake or may be obtained through model calibration The leakance value C for the scenarios illustrated in the preceding figure may be calculated using the following formula Lx W xK D C where e LxW is the surface area of the grid cell face exchanging flow with the external source sink e K is the average hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer material separating the external source sink from the model grid e Dis the distance from the external source sink to the model grid When a General Head boundary condition is assigned the Use default leakance option is automatically selected If the Use default leakance option is selected the General Head boundary condition requires the following data e Stage The head value for the external source sink e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain this field is read only and is calculated using formula described below e Distance to Reservoir The distance from the external source sink to the General Head grid cell e General Head Average Conductivity The average hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer material separating the external source sink from the model grid The default formula used to calculate the Leakance value for the General Head boundary is COND SKAVG x FACEAREA x UCTOCOND cai DIST 2013 by Schlu
445. settings for different data object elements e g point line symbology show labels color rendering by attribute create isosurfaces set transparency etc e Data object settings can be accessed from the main VMOD Flex window To view the settings for a data object in the Data Explorer right click on the desired data object and select Settings from the pop up menu View Spreadsheet Export Delete Import Data Create Surface Create New Data Object New Folder 2D Viewer 3D Viewer aa This chapter presents information on the following topics 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help 6 1 Viewing General Data Settings Viewing the Data Table Performing Operations on Data Modifying Data Style Settings General Settings General settings consist of data object meta data including the coordinate system field mappings and source data information General settings can be accessed by expanding the General node in the Settings tree The settings in each sub node are described below ioi xi Info Details Name E Statistics as ET General Operations Type Data Source JE SampleFiles test_project points xls Color Description mM is a description of the data object Info The Info node contains the following information Name The name of the data object read only defined during import Type The type of the data object e g points po
446. shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s e Assign Polyline from the toolbox Beginning on the south west side of the grid and using the river polyline as a guide digitize a line that traces over the river by clicking along its path with the left mouse button When you have reached the south east boundary Right Click the mouse button at the end point of the line You should then see a small menu appear Define Attributes e Click Next gt gt to accept the default name e The Define Boundary Condition dialog will appear as shown below Defne Boundary Conditor e ______ Es PolytineO PolylineD Zone Ors Select how the attributes are defined i Define for the entire zone Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation dust stan and end points 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 VMOD Flex Help Traditionally the River boundary condition has required a value for the Conductance of the riverbed However the Conductance value for each grid cell depends on the length and width of the river as it passes through each grid cell Therefore in a model such as this with different sizes of grid cells the Conductance value will change depending on the size of the grid cell In order to accommodate this type of scenario Visual MODFLOW allows you to enter the actual physical dimensions of the river at the Start point and End point of t
447. sition from the fine elements around the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 330 VMOD Flex Help points to the coarser elements A smoother transition will result in more elements but will lead to more regular elements therefore improved model stability Polygon Refinement You can use one or more polygon data objects that have been included in the superelement mesh see Create Finite Element Meshb27 to define localized areas of mesh refinement To do so click the Polygons Refinement button The Polygon Refinement screen will appear e Polygon Refinement Refinement Polygons 0 no refinement Polygon ID Number of Elements Polygon1_0 1000 ok o eca In the left side of the Polygon Refinement window all features in the polygon add ins are listed in a table under the Polygon ID column When a feature is selected it is highlighted yellow in the adjacent 2D Viewer Select the polygon feature that represents that area of the mesh for which refinement is to be performed In the adjacent field under the Number of Elements column enter the desired number of element that should exist in polygon area VMOD Flex will automatically refine the underlying triangles to equal the prescribed number of elements for the polygon area Once you have defined the refinement for the polygon features click the OK button to apply the settings Generating the Horizontal Mesh 2013 by Schlumberger W
448. solute Time Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format OOs Time Format Time Format The Release Time s specified for the particles see Particle Release Time will be added to the Reference Time to determine the actual time of release for each particle There are two Time format options for setting the Reference time e Prd Stp Rel Tm Specify the Reference Time by entering the Stress Period Prd Time Step Stp and Relative time inside step Rel Tm e Absolute value Specify the reference time as an Absolute time from the beginning of the simulation Note For backward particle tracking in transient simulations the Reference Time cannot not be the beginning of the simulation because there are no simulation results before Time 0 i 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services as VMOD Flex Help 10 10 3 10 10 3 1 e you cannot go backwards from zero Therefore when simulating backward particle tracking the Reference Time should be a time somewhere between the start and the end times of the transient simulation MT3DMS Visual MODFLOW Flex supports MT3DMS v 5 1 The following sections describes the settings for adjusting the solver advection method output times and miscellaneous settings e Settings General e Solution Method e Output Control MT3DMS_settings Visual MODFLOW F
449. st of a series of points with known coordinates and elevation that represent nodes along the well path trajectory VMOD Flex then creates the well path by connecting each node in the series The Elevation frame allows you specify the Z value of the well path nodes as either an Elevation or as a Total Vertical Depth measured from ground surface Adding Well Path To add a new well path node to the Well Path table 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 6 3 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Select the Well from the Well Heads table for which the well path will be created Click the Add Row button from the Well Path toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the X Y and Z value of the well path node in the table If this is the first row in the table you would enter the X Y and Z values of the well head i e the top most node in the well path e Repeat above for additional nodes Data Operations For most data object types VMOD Flex allows you apply various arithmetic operations to your source data Operation settings can be accessed by clicking on the Operations tree node in the Settings window To access the Settings window in the Data Explorer right click on the data object and select Settings from the pop up menu HE FormSettings General g Operations Arithmetic General Style ioj x Operations Select Operation z Constant x Descr
450. stechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 Tutorials vmod model import zip 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations only If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt Transport MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package Creating the Project e Launch VMOD Flex e Select File New Project The Create Project dialog will appear e Type in project Name Exercise e Click Browse button and navigate to a folder where you wish your projects to be saved and click OK e Define your coordinate system and datum or just leave the non cartesian as defaults e Define the Units frame For this project the default units will be fine The Create Project dialog should now look as follows 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Create Project E Project Information Units FEA Name 21 g P Exercise 4 Unit Settings Conductivity m s Data Repository Length m n Pumping Rate m 3 d D Documents VMODFlex As Ex Recharge mm yr gk ve Specific Storage 1 m Time day Project Coordinate Coordinate Systems Local Cartesian SAAN Datum y Word Geodetic System 1984 e Click OK Th
451. steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Cross Section from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the data and click Next to continue Next select the Coordinate System of the cross section If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step The final step involves selecting the elevation units and previewing the cross section data 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 185 RE File Import i lo0 x Define the elevation units meters x Source file data Number of Cross sections je Number of Wells fie Number of Interpretation j3 Cross section names Well names Interpretation names AA A i o AO OE NM lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel At the top of the dialog specify the cross section elevation units from the drop down list box You can choose from metres or feet The Source File Data frame contains information about the selected source file Here you can preview the Number of Cross sections in the source file along with the cross section names The Number of wells in the source data is shown along with the well names Finally the number a
452. such that when a polyline polygon or point feature is selected in the 2D viewer its corresponding attribute data is automatically highlighted in the spreadsheet table Likewise when an attribute row is selected in the spreadsheet table its corresponding feature is highlighted in the active 2D Viewer In order to have this bidirectional linking between viewer and spreadsheet table the 2D Viewer must be in Pick mode and the spreadsheet table must be opened Tip Data object spreadsheet tables can be viewed by right clicking on the data object in the Data Explorer and selecting Spreadsheet from the pop up menu 2D Viewers can be set to pick mode by selecting the Pick Mode button from the viewer sidebar 3D Animations The 3D Viewer can animate items and also record static or transient models to AVI file Right click on the 3D viewer and select the Animation Parameters The following options are available 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services a VMOD Flex Help r ad Animation Parameters W Rotate E Transient Time Time Delay ms V Rotate on Z axis Video T Write Video File D apritest0 avi Rotate will allow you to rotate the model domain around the specified axis If you wish to save to a video file select the check box beside Write Video File and specify a name and directory The combo box below this allows you to specify the video resolution If you click on the Time tab
453. t flow material parameter The recharge boundary condition is typically used to simulate surficially distributed recharge to the groundwater system Most commonly recharge occurs as a result of precipitation percolating into the groundwater system However the recharge boundary can potentially be used to simulate recharge from sources other than precipitation such as irrigation artificial recharge or seepage from a pond Note The recharge rate is a parameter that is not often measured at a site but rather it is assumed to be a percentage of the precipitation This percentage typically ranges from 5 to 20 depending on many different factors including e the predominant land use and vegetation type e the surface topography slope and e the soil cover material Supported Geometry The geometry for Recharge boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Evapotranspiration For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Evapotranspiration Package ET included with MODFLOW After translation the Evapotranspiration input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname EVT file Currently this boundary condition is not supported for finite element translation The evapotranspiration boundary condition simulates the effects of plant transpiration direct evaporation and seepage at the ground surface by removing water from the saturated groundwater regime The evapotranspiration boundary approach is based on
454. t Kd 1 0e 7 L mg was specified during the setup of the transport numeric engine If this is not so e g if you did not enter this value when creating the project enter this now The Kd values for each zone can be modified to accommodate heterogeneous soil properties and reactions throughout the model domain However for this example you will keep it simple and use a uniform Distribution Coefficient for each layer of the model e OK to close the Database window Dispersion Coefficients The next step is to define the dispersion properties for the model Visual MODFLOW automatically assigns a set of default values for each of the dispersivity variables The following table summarizes these values Longitudinal Dispersivity Horizontal to Longitudinal Ratio 0 1 Vertical to Longitudinal Ratio Molecular Diffusion Coefficient oo o It is possible to assign alternate values for the longitudinal dispersivity by using the Assign gt option buttons from the left toolbar However for this example you will use a uniform dispersion value for the entire model domain In order to modify the horizontal or vertical dispersivity ratios and or the molecular diffusion 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services us VMOD Flex Help values you need to load the Layer Options e Right click on Longitudinal Dispersion from the model tree under Input Properties Transport e Select Dispersion Parameters The following window will appe
455. t H 5 Rivers LD River 1 Recharge S E Wells LD PumpingW E Outputs Z Heads i Drawdown J iM t Layer 1 Row 51 Column 4 X 192 27 648 74 Heads 17 3513 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 111 e By default VMOD Flex will display 10 contour lines with an arbitrary interval However if you do not like the default contour interval or line color you can customize the contour map settings To access the contouring options for Heads right click on Heads from the model tree and select Settings The following dialog will appear Settings j a es e tcl General Info Details Name E Statistics Heads Style Type Cell Zone Data Source User created Color Description Heads i H ij apy o 0K Cance Hep e From the Settings tree on the left select Style followed by Contour Lines This will expand the settings window and give you access to the Contour Line settings e Under Interval options select Contour Interval then enter 0 5 for the contour interval This is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 112 VMOD Flex Help r 7 Settings j gt ee 2 ee i General Contour Line El Style Seer V Show Contour Lines Contour Line 7 Show Contour Labels Interval options Number of contour Contour Interval og Lines style settings Label
456. t forever 1 Lake Save CMB CCM file mass balance output Yes Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MT3DMS Translation Type Settings Solution Method Output Control Output Times Simulation time is the total length of the transport simulation in the specified time units This must be greater than zero Max of transport steps is the maximum number of transport steps for the simulation Once the simulation has run through the specified Max of transport steps the model will stop This parameter is primarily used to limit the size of the output files generated Specify max stepsize sets the maximum step size to use for each transport time step MT3D will use the smaller of the internally calculated maximum timestep size based on the courant number or the maximum timestep size specified here If the implicit GCG solver is used this value is ignored and the value found in the GCG Solver options is used instead Save concentration at observation point for every Nth time step allows to filter the amount of observation data that is saved to the OBS file ideal for transient runs with large output files Save one line summary of mass budget for every Nth time step allows to filter the amount of mass budget data that is saved to the MAS file ideal for transient runs with large output files The Save CBW CCM file option must be checked if you want Mass Balance output to be 2013 by Schlumberger Water S
457. ta validation step For DXF files the following dialog will show indicating the number of polylines that will be created from the source file 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help 4 1 3 S Data Import E ioj o x Number of DXF entities processed 1 Number of Polylines created 2 lt Back Einish Cancel Click the Finish button to complete the polygon importing process Once imported a polyline data object will be added to the Data Explorer Polygons Polygons are closed shapes consisting of vertices line segments and have at least 3 sides Polygons can be used in VMOD Flex in the following ways e To define the horizontal boundary of a conceptual model e To define the geometry and attributes of horizontal boundary conditions e g recharge specified head e To define the geometry and attributes of property zones e To visualize spatial variation of geographic features using various style settings e VMOD Flex supports the following file types for polygon data Shapefile SHP AutoCAD DXF To import polygon data follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Polygon from the Data Type drop down list box Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Dat
458. tailed installation instructions please refer to the VMOD Flex Getting Started Guide e Place the DVD into your DVD ROM drive and the initial installation screen should load automatically Once loaded an installation interface will be presented e On the installation screen you may choose from the following two buttons VMOD Flex Installation and VMOD Flex User s Manual e The User s Manual button will display a PDF document of the manual which requires Adobe Reader to view If you do not have Adobe Reader a link has been created in the interface to download the appropriate software e The Installation button will initiate the installation of VMOD Flex on your computer VMOD Flex must be installed on your local hard disk in order to run Follow the installation instructions and read the on screen directions carefully You will be prompted to enter your name company name and serial number Please ensure that you enter your serial number exactly as it appears on your CD case or invoice Be sure to use capital letters and hyphens in the correct locations e Once the installation is complete you should see the VMOD Flex icon on your Desktop labeled VMOD Flex To start working with VMOD Flex double click on this icon Uninstalling To uninstall VMOD Flex follow the steps below e Make sure that VMOD Flex program is closed e For Windows XP users go to Start Settings Control Panel e For Windows Vista users go to Start Control Pan
459. tc are defined in the Numerical Model workflow after you have defined a grid and completed the Convert to Numerical Model step This is explained in the section Define Properties Numerical Model bse e Click Next Step to proceed 7 2 Collect Data Objects At this step in the workflow you collect the data you want to use to build and interpret your conceptual model The conceptual modeling workflow is data driven This means that you first need to collect the appropriate data objects in order to use these at a particular step in the workflow Data objects can be collected through several means 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 266 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model ix o File Tools Window Help Workflow ee U d e Data GOB a bjectives a 2 z ao ao Cd Cor PKA Create New Data Object Create Surface gt Importing Datahs7 Import GIS data shapefiles CAD files Gridded data images points wells in excel spreadsheets or XYZ points in text format gt Creating Data Objects 204 digitizing new point polygon or polyline data objects gt Creating Surfacesh s Interpolate XYZ points using Krigging Natural Neighbor or Inverse Distance The resulting surfaces can be used to define geological layers or 2D parameter distributions Kx Recharge etc
460. te the source file e Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue e Next select the Coordinate System of the 3D Gridded data If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step The next step allows you to specify how the gridded data is to be imported inixi IV Gridded data for an existing grid Numerical grid object you want to assign the data to Import the true grid dimensions High quality slower performance Import a reduced grid size Lower quality higher performance The true grid data can be retrieved from the data object after import Import every fi gt th node lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When importing a HDS file the Gridded data for existing grid option will be automatically 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data s selected The grid dimensions in the source file must be identical to the dimensions of a grid in your project Select the existing numerical grid from Conceptual Model tree and then click the button When importing a DAT file the Gridded data for existing grid option will be unchecked inixi J Gridded data for an existing grid Grid origin x Y Z foo m 0 0 m 0 0 m Rotation
461. ted as you progress through a specific numerical model workflow the items you see in the Flex Viewer originate from the corresponding Run folder on the Model Explorer For example if you are working a clone of a model run eg Run2 and you are viewing boundary condition cells you will see these originate from the After this the model tree will be duplicated and added under the selected numerical grid a new Numerical Model workflow will then load where you can work with this model run clone 10 14 Export VMOD Flex allows you to export some raw data and most of the numerical model inputs and outputs to shapefiles for external analysis Points Polygons and Polylines can be exported to SHP CSV Surfaces Horizons exported to CSV 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services m VMOD Flex Help To export a data object e From the Data Explorer right click on the desired data object and select Export from the pop up menu e A Save As dialog box will display on your screen e Specify a file Name and Folder location and the File Type for the exported file and then click the Save button Click the OK button from the Export dialog box Export to points or polygon shapefile is currently available for the following e Numerical Grid e Properties Conductivity Storativity Initial Heads e Boundaries All types including wells e Heads e Drawdown To export right click on the desired item on the model explorer eg Con
462. teps necessary to design a model with layers of highly contrasting hydraulic conductivities Click on the Database button and Type the following values in the window e Kx m s 2E 4 e Ky m s 2E 4 e Kz m s 2E 4 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s e OK to accept these values Note that in this case the Kx Ky and Kz values are the same indicating the assigned property values are assumed horizontally and vertically isotropic However anisotropic property values can be assigned to a model by modifying the Conductivity Database In this three layer model layer 1 represents the upper aquifer and layer 3 represents the lower aquifer Layer 2 represents the aquitard separating the upper and lower aquifers For this example we will use the previously assigned hydraulic conductivity values Zone 1 for model layers 1 and 3 representing the aquifers and assign different Conductivity values i e a new Zone for model layer 2 representing the aquitard Note that layer 1 is the top model layer Next you need to change to Layer 2 using the up arrow under the Layer text box shown below inspect Define Properties You are now viewing the second model layer representing the aquitard The next step in this tutorial is to assign a lower hydraulic conductivity value to the aquitard layer 2 We can graphically assign the property values to the model grid cells e Assign Entire La
463. terpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended Kriging Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anistropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deutsch and Journel 1998 The project kt3d performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIP If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hoe effect models If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 Natural Neighbors The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target to the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the ne
464. th Multiple Model Scenarios 478 for a better understanding of the various workflows in VMOD Flex gt See the Program Overview 8 section for detailed instructions on using VMOD Flex 1 1 Installation and Licensing Hardware Requirements VMOD Flex requires the following minimum system configuration e Pentium 4 1GHz recommended e 1GB RAM 4 GB or more recommended e DVD ROMdrive e 250 MB of free hard drive space e Graphics card with 3D Graphics Accelerator e Windows XP Pro SP3 32 Bit Windows Vista Business Ultimate or Enterprise 32 Bit SP1 and 64 Bit Windows 7 8 32 bit and 64 bit VMOD Flex 64 bit version is supported on Vista 64 bit and Windows 7 8 64 bit Note Windows XP Home Windows Vista Home Premium Home Basic or Starter Versions are not supported Microsoft NET Framework v 4 0 installed provided with installation Microsoft Office or Microsoft Access Database Engine NOTE Microsoft Office 64 bit version is currently not supported for XLS and MDB import Note If you intend to build complex projects it is recommended that you upgrade to the specifications in the above list If you have any problems with your particular system configuration please contact your system administrator or SWS technical support sws support slb com 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 3 Installation VMOD Flex is distributed on one DVD ROM To install please follow these directions Note For de
465. th water table elevation Supported Geometry The geometry for Evapotranspiration boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Lake For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Lake LAK3 package for MODFLOW After translation the Lake input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname LAK file Currently translation of this boundary condition is not supported for finite element models The lake boundary condition can be used to simulate the effects of stationary surface water bodies such as lakes and reservoirs on an aquifer The lake boundary is an alternative to the traditional approach of using the general head boundary condition The main difference in the lake boundary is that the lake stage is calculated automatically based on the water budget which is a function of inflow outflow recharge etc For more information on the Lake package please refer to USGS publication Documentation of a Computer Program to Simulate Lake Aquifer Interaction Using the MODFLOW Ground Water Flow Model and the MOC3D Solute Transport Model Required Data The lake package requires the following input parameters e Stage The initial stage of the lake at the beginning of the run e Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer bedding material of the surface water body e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain this field is read
466. the Use Shapefile method from the combo box e Click the Use Shapefile button to launch the Shapefile dialog 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 296 VMOD Flex Help e The combo box contains all the attributes of the specified polygon used to define the horizontal geometry of the boundary condition e Select the desired attribute from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box From 3D Gridded Data From 3D Gridded Data This method allows you to use spatially variable attributes from a 3D Gridded data object for defining a boundary condition attribute When this method is selected the Use 3D Gridded Data button will become active When selected the 3D Gridded Data dialog will launch e From the Data Explorer select the desired 3D Gridded data object e Click the button to insert it into the Select 3D Gridded Data Object field e Once selected the data object s attributes are listed in the combo box below e Select the desired attribute from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box Note The specified 3D Gridded data object must horizontally and vertically overlap the defined property zone geometry or else the data object cannot be used Use Time Schedule Transient Only This method allows you to use a time schedule data object for defining the stress periods and values of a transient attribute When this method is selected click the Use Time Schedu
467. the Layer combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer window The Layer combo box contains all of the layers currently displayed in the 2D nan c E Viewer Select a layer from the combo box to bring it to the top of the layer order Working with Viewers 3D and 2D Viewers behave just like any other window For example you can Minimum 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 210 VMOD Flex Help Maximize or Close the viewer by clicking the appropriate button in the top right corner of the viewer You can Resize the viewer by clicking and dragging the sides and corners of the viewer to a desired size or Move the viewer within the VMOD Flex main window by clicking the title bar and dragging it to a new location Select viewers aggeration 8 ft 3D Viewer 1 3DViewer 2 3D Views 3 2D Viewer 1 2D Viewer 2 Using Multiple Viewers VMOD Flex allows you to have multiple 2D and 3D Viewer windows opened and displayed at one time When a new viewer is opened it is added to the Viewer Bar located at the bottom of the main VMOD Flex Window You can change the current active viewer by clicking on a different viewer from the viewer bar 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 211 Viewer Controls The viewer controls allow you to interact with displayed data objects The controls are accessible from the toolbar located along the right side of the viewer window S View Mode
468. the PEST run should take between 3 5 minutes As PEST runs you should see the objective function phi decreasing over each optimization iteration pay attention to these values in the DOS window PEST will run a total of 25 optimization iterations and a total of 1366 model runs PEST should reach a final objective function phi value of approximately 2 06 E 02 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 151 When PEST finishes you should see a confirmation message in the main window below the PEST Run Log tab as shown below O Es gt RunPEST Stop oF PEST Check Define Observations Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms Select Run Type E Sensitivity Analysis E PEST Select Regularization Optimisation complete 3 optimisation iterations have elapsed since lowest phi was achieved Total mode calls 676 The model has been run one final time using best parameters I SVD Assist Thus all model input files contain best parameter values and model Tikhonov Regularisation output files contain model results based on these parameters No Regularization D ESE Analyze Results Update Model Inputs After the PEST run completes you can analyze the results e Click Next Step to proceed to the Analyze Results step Analyze Results VMOD Flex presents the results of the PEST run with one tab per output file 2013 by Sc
469. the simulation time length measured in days e Enter 5000 for Max number of transport steps e The remaining defaults can be left as is Output Times e Select Output Times under the MT3DMS Output Control tree and the following display will appear e For this tutorial you will define specified times at which you would like to see the transport simulation results e Add Row button repeat this 6 more times e Enter the following output times in the grid If you wish you can copy directly from this list below and paste into the table using the Paste button e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e You are now ready to translate the inputs into the MT3DMS packages 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services ze VMOD Flex Help gt Translate e Click to create the MODFLOW 2005 and MT3DMS packages this should take approximately 10 20 seconds e Click gt Next Step to proceed Run MODFLOW 2005 and MT3DMS gt Run e Click the button to run MODFLOW 2005 and MT3DMS e The MODFLOW model run should complete in a few seconds the MT3DMS run should also complete in 5 10 seconds e Once finished you should see Normal termination of simulation in the engine progress window In addition you will see Heads and Drawdown items will be added to the model tree under Output You should also see Concentrations added under the model output tree under Output Trans
470. the transport equation is split into two parts On the left hand side are the mass accumulation term and the advection term in fluid mechanics literature the sum of these two has been referred to as the total derivative of the concentration with respect to time Dc Dt On the right hand side the dispersion reaction and sink source terms are represented with finite difference approximation When the finite difference methods UFD CFD are used all terms in the governing equation are treated simultaneously with all advection dispersion reactions and sink source terms represented with finite difference approximations The finite difference solution is explicit or implicit in time weighting depending on whether the Generalized Conjugate Gradient Solver GCG package is selected or not Solution Method Upstream Finite Difference Method UFD The Upstream Finite Difference method is available in all MT3D versions Since the finite difference method does not involve particle tracking or concentration interpolations it is normally more computationally efficient than the Method of Characteristics MOC In addition the finite difference method normally has very small mass balance errors because it is based on the principle of mass conservation However the Upstream Finite Difference method can lead to significant numerical dispersion for problems having sharp concentration fronts Central Finite Difference Method CFD The Central Finite Di
471. then some additional options will be needed such as define regularization and adjust the PEST control file If you want to run Sensitivity Analysis this can also be launched 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Select PEST Run Type ll Sensitivity Analysis I PEST Select Regularization i SVD Assist i _ Tikhonov Regularisation jis No Regularization i Parameter Estimation i Analyze Results io Update Model inputs e Click the Parameter Estimation button from the main window as shown above e The next step will be to choose the Regularization options Select Regularization At this step choose the type of Regularization to run 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services us VMOD Flex Help OOF BJ Define Observations i Define Property Parameters i Parameter Estimation i Analyze Results ix Update Model inputs Select Regularization SVD Assist Tikhonov e Click No Regularization button from the main window e The next step will be to adjust the PEST control file other Regularization options will be explored in future versions of this tutorial Edit PEST Run Settings The last step before running PEST is to view and adjust the PEST Control file 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials u 3 Ea oh PEST Check E Define Observations BJ Define Prop
472. thick layers In the table located below the grid description enter a refinement factor for the desired layer s For example a layer refinement factor of 2 would subdivide the layer into two equally spaced layers Layer Name Layer Refinement Zone1 2 Zone2 i 2 Zoned Apply After entering a refinement factor click the Apply button to view the changes in the adjacent 2D Viewer Uniform In a uniform grid a number of layers with uniform thickness will be created At the time of translating the conceptual model to the numerical model the properties will be assigned to the appropriate grid cells to represent the geological structure This grid is useful for transport or density dependent simulations where it is desirable to have fine vertical discretization 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 320 VMOD Flex Help Cross sectional view of uniform grid from Visual MODFLOW When this grid type is selected specify the number of layers to create in the Number of Layers field default is 10 Note Maximum number of vertical layers is 1000 Deformed Uniform In a deformed uniform grid the top and bottom of the grid are deformed following the top most and bottom most horizons respectively in between a set of uniformly thick layers will be generated At the time of translating the conceptual model to the numerical model the properties will be assigned to the appropriate grid cells to
473. tics file origin etc and Style settings symbol colors shape labeling etc For more details see Data Settings b17 Many wizards and dialog boxes in VMOD Flex require you to select data objects from the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer e g when defining horizons creating property zones and assigning attributes to boundary conditions When you see a Blue Arrow 3 located next to an input field in a dialog box or a wizard this means that a data object selection is required Simply click the appropriate data object from the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer and then click the Blue Arrow button to insert the data object into the input field Model Explorers The Model explorers contain all of the conceptual models and numerical models and corresponding data objects for your project Conceptual Model Tree Numerical Model Tree 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 20 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model 2 AIRPORT2 REVISED C Model Boundary OB Structure pe C3 Properties E Simulation Domain E Model Domain Fs C Boundary Conditions 5 C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid 5 Run 5 inputs B C Properties O Flow C Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges C Pumping Wells 5 E Outputs Simulation Domain m Z Heads Model Domain acd Forward Pathiines Gy Boundary Conditions i be C Pumping Wells Boundary Condition O Riv
474. ties and Boundaries e Defining a Grid or Mesh e Converting this to a Numerical Model Start the Tutoriall s Numerical Modeling For Existing Models Use this option if you want to e Create a MODFLOW based numerical model define the numerical grid and populate the grid the properties and boundary conditions similar to conventional Visual MODFLOW e Import a Visual MODFLOW project set VMF 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 3 1 e Import a standard USGS MODFLOW data set MODFLOW 2000 2005 Start the Tutoriall ss See Also Several sample projects are available for download from our website that illustrate both the conceptual and numerical modeling workflows Conceptual Modeling The following example is a quick walk through of the basics of building a conceptual model and converting this to a numerical model Objectives e Learn how to create a project and import your raw data e Become familiar with navigating the GUI and steps for conceptual modeling e Learn how to define a 3D geological model and flow properties e Define boundary conditions using your GIS data e Define a MODFLOW grid then populate this grid with data from the conceptual model e View the resulting properties and boundary conditions e Translate the model inputs into MODFLOW packages and run the MODFLOW engines e Understand the results by interpreting heads and drawdown in several views e Check the quality of t
475. time unit e g use a residual criterion of 0 01 86400 if your time unit is days e Damping Factor Default 1 This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the damping factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to the acceleration parameters used in other solvers e Printout Interval Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file e f the Preconditioning Method is set to Cholesky the Relaxation parameter can be set Although the default is 1 in some cases a value of 0 97 0 99 may reduce the number of iterations required for convergence 10 10 1 4 2 GMG The GMG solver based on the preconditioned conjugate gradient algorithm has been developed by the USGS for solving finite difference based flow models As opposed to AMG the preconditioning in GMG is based on a solver method known as geometric multigrid The GMG solver has been demonstrated to greatly reduce model run times relative to other solvers using a compara
476. tion process As the latter is undertaken again and again as the model is run repeatedly by PEST the fact that it is not necessary to repeat calculation of the Kriging factors on each occasion that the model is run can result in large savings in the time required to complete the overall parameter estimation process Calculation of Kriging factors is undertaken by program PPK2FAC Variograms upon which these Kriging factors are based are supplied to PPK2FAC in a structure file Such a file is struct dat Inspect this file using your screen editor For full details of the specifications of this file see the documentation to the Groundwater Data Utilities Note that the variogram assigned to zones that have just a single pilot point is quite unimportant because there is only one pilot point assigned to each of them all cells within these zones will be assigned the one interpolated value Same as the respective pilot point irrespective of the variogram Note also that for all of the structures appearing in file struct dat the TRANSFORM variable is set to log Thus any variogram cited in each of these structures must pertain to the spatial distribution of the logarithm of the pertinent hydraulic property This is in accord with the fact that most studies cited in the groundwater literature which treat transmissivity and or hydraulic conductivity as a regionalised variable indicate that its distribution is better described by a log variogram t
477. to enter edit mode Make the necessary changes to the data table and once finished click the End Edit button to save the changes Please note that the data table only allows you to modify existing attribute and geometry data Currently VMOD Flex does not allow you to create new columns i e new data object attributes This can only be done during the data import process Well Table For Wells data objects the data table is different than that of other data objects The Well data table is designed to allow you to add and or modify wells and associated well data e g pumping schedule screen intervals observation points etc To access the well table right click on a Wells data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings In the Settings dialog click on the Table button In the Well Table there are two tabs Vertical and Horizontal Each tab is described in the following sections Vertical Wells The Vertical tab allows you to view and modify data for vertical wells 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services S Tableview 45 34E 334DC1 x lly 574366 679999999 4862849 39999949 574366 679999999 4862900 45 34E 34ACD01 574366 679999999 4863050 48 34E 35CC001 574366 679999999 4863349 39999949 Data Settings 221 101 x Data To Display Active Well 45 34E 32BBD1 m Display Format Elevation Measured Depths Divers Well tops ID Top fm _ Bottom m 4S
478. to proceed to the Boundary Conditions step View Edit Boundary Conditions e At this step you can view edit the flow boundaries for the model m Untitled gt iP ai Sad 9 OF Modeir fsi 000000 e From the toolbox select the Desired Boundary condition group Constant Head Rivers etc e Then select Edit Single or Edit Group Click on a cell that belongs to this group a dialog will appear where you can see the parameters for a single cell or group of cells Click Next Step to proceed You will arrive at the Flow Boundaries step Proceed to Run or Define Optional Model Elements e You will arrive at a choice screen here you can proceed to some of the non essential inputs for the model such as Zone Budget Zones Particle Tracking or Observation Wells Or you can proceed to Running the simulation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s B E Define Modeling Objectives S E Define Numerical Model i E Create Grid I import Mode E View Edit Grid E Define Properties E Define Boundary Conditions SD I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles 5 Ei Select Run Type o gage 0929 3 PEST Rur i e 5 Select Run Type Define Particles 213 1 214 5 mmm 60 2137 90 2124 120 212 4 Define Zone Budget Zones Define Observation Wells e Click the Select Run Type b
479. to this display such as well locations arial maps shapefiles etc When you are using this feature with your own models you just need to import these files before launching the Grid Refinement step e You will first start by refining the Rows Enter 5 for the Start and enter 35 for the end e For Refine by enter 2 Your screen should appear as follows 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help B Grid refinement gt Define grd refinement Edit rows Edit columns Select editing options Refine in an interval v Settings Start End B Refine by P i Add data to view e Click on the Apply button e Next you will refine the columns e At the top left of the window select the Edit Columns radio button e You will first start by refining the Rows Enter 5 for the Start and enter 35 for the end e For Refine by enter 2 e Click on the Apply button e You should now see coarse grid sizes around the edge of the model domain and a more finer sized grid spacing in the middle of model around the areas interest This is shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s B Grid refinement Define grd refinement Edit rows Edit columns Select editing options Refine in an interval v Settings Start ra Refine by Add data to view e Click on the OK b
480. trained and conforming Refine areas of the mesh using digitized or imported polygon shapes Fit the mesh to your model domain using deformed or semi uniform vertical slices 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services e VMOD Flex Help 2 Program Overview In order to become the most efficient and effective in the VMOD Flex environment it is recommended that you familiarize yourself with a few simple concepts terminology and where you can find and access things MONE OW Fler Iman 3 a e File Tools Window Workflow Help D Salo Workflow Navigation Data me Objects amp Data f amp drumco Bevation 1 Define Modeling Objectives YD H drumco Bevation 2 S Define Numerical Model ins nne P roas iC drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid Vi a drumco Bevation 4 Import Model i E amp drumco Bevation 5 View Edit Grid E RPP rey w amp drumco Bevation 6 I Define Properties 3 4 VMod Imported Wells Define Bounda H hea H O Select the Next Ste Row om H O View Re V Column gill JR SRUSUUORHORHERROEEOEEREER 2 escoiodd D eee ilill Conductivity x Zone zj E Database ayer View Model Explorer Wels Model RUMCO grid Explorer Run 5 Inputs H 5 C Properties o SO Aow i i M Conductivity C Storage i i
481. ty x Zones Database m Assign z Model Explorer Horizon2 a Legend Horizon3 Color Zones jes Zone1 Zone2 Zone3 es ductivity Conductivity Property Zone 2 Conductivity Property Zone 3 jon Domain del Domain Boundary Conditions Numerical arid e Run E rots Properties Flow Z Conduct Storage Initial Hee Transport Initial Cor Conc Species Conc Bat Nar iL Layer 2 Row 31 Column 25 X 707 11 Y 112511 Zone 2 0000 e Now view the model in cross section to see the three hydrogeological units First zoom out to the fill extent using one of the following options e Zoom out button from the toolbar 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s Zoom full extents button from the toolbar e Scroll wheel on the mouse scroll downwards e View Column Check box You will see another view appear beside the layer view showing a cross section through the model domain by default through Column1 To improve this view you should change the Exaggeration e Enter 40 in the Exaggeration field which is located in the toolbar directly above the Column view window e Enter 37 for the Column number as this will provide a cross section through the region with the discontinuous aquitard Take a moment to view the cross section of the properties You can
482. u have imported or digitized polygons One or more property zones are created Define Boundary Conditions kee At this step you define Property Zones for the conceptual model Each property zone is assigned appropriate property attributes e g conductivity storage and initial heads A groundwater flow model requires many different types of data to simulate the hydrogeological processes influencing the flow of groundwater In VMOD Flex the hydrogeological characteristics of the model are classified into the following parameter groups 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 280 VMOD Flex Help e Conductivity Kx Ky Kz e Storage Ss Sy Peff Ptot e Initial Heads By default VMOD Flex automatically assigns the entire model domain the default property parameter values specified in the Project Settings see Project Settings for more details However in most situations the flow properties will not be uniform throughout the entire model domain and it will be necessary to assign different property values to different areas of the conceptual model This can be accomplished by creating Property Zones In VMOD Flex a property zone is a specified 3D volume generated from structural zones with user defined hydrogeologic attributes Property zone geometry can be defined using one or more existing structural zones As such property zones can only be generated after horizons have been defined in the conceptual model Please
483. ual model environment Calculated heads from a regional model can also be used as boundary conditions for local scaled models Design the correct model faster The grid independent raw data is left intact and is not constricted by grid cells or mesh elements when modifying the data and project objective This allows you to generate multiple numerical models from the same conceptual model e Make changes to the model data and immediately see results The conceptual model environment provides simultaneous 2D and 3D views which are updated whenever changes to the data are made This document provides detailed descriptions of all features and functionality available in VMOD Flex 9 How to get started gt Study this Introduction chapter and Program Overview s sections to familiarize yourself with the program gt Then work through the Quick Start Tutorials 177 to familiarize yourself with using VMOD Flex These sections cover importing MODFLOW and Visual MODFLOW projects as well as building new models using the Conceptual Modeling approach Learning more gt See Conceptual Modeling Workflowle3 for instructions on building a grid independent 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help conceptual model using your raw data gt See Numerical Modeling Workflow for more instructions on working with numerical inputs translating to MODFLOW packages and running and analyzing the results gt See Working wi
484. ulation Domain a I Model Domain Eem E Boundary Condition Color Zones Constant Head Constant Head River 1 C Pumping Well 1 NumericalGrid1 Run EHE inputs S Properti 5 Fov S E Bounda Bay Con By Riv B Wel 3 ow Obs rs Ovtrido ad Cm j t x a i layer Row Column HCoord VCoord Atrribute e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views Place a checkbox beside the desired view and it will appear on screen e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e Now you will define a default initial heads value e Choose Initial Heads from the combo box under the Toolbox as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Views v Layer 1 gt A Row 1 Column 1 amp 3D Initial Heads Database Edit e Click Database button located below the Initial Heads combo box e Type 350 for each of the zone values this will apply an initial head value of 350 for the entire model domain e Click OK when you are finished e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views e The display tools w
485. un rec for full details Model command line Running model 1 time Could Not Find D SmokeTest PESTI Final pest tutorial idata MODFLOW SAMPLE2 grid Run MODFLOW 2868 pest hds Could Not Find D SmokeTest PEST Final pest tutorial data MODFLOWSAMPLE2 grid R fun MODFLOW 26GG pest ddn Sum of squared weighted residuals Cie phi 1205 4 OPTIMISATION ITERATION NO 214 Model calls so far si 4 m P Starting phi for this iteration 1205 4 Calculating Jacobian matrix Model Explorer i runs completed i Initial Heads a 3oundary Conditions Recharge Constant Heads i C Constant Head 0 Once PEST finishes you should see a confirmation message appear under the PEST Run Log tab indicating if the PEST run was successful or not e Click Next Step to proceed to the Analyze Results step 11 9 Analyze Results After the PEST run is successful you can analyse the results VMOD Flex provides a link to the PEST output files Record file REC Sensitivities for Observations SEO Sensitivities for Parameters SEN Residuals RES 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 474 11 10 VMOD Flex Help Define Observations Define Property Parameters Define Pilot Points Define Kriging Variograms EJ Select Run Type W W Sensitivity Analysis PEST Select Regularization W W SVD Assist I Tikhonov Regularisation No Regularization Parameter Estimation
486. ure Defining the geological model consists of providing geological surfaces as inputs for horizons then three dimensional solids are created between these horizons To create new horizons follow the steps below e From the Horizons Settings dialog shown below click the Add Horizon button to add a new horizon row to the Horizon Information table e Repeat this two more times so there are 3 new rows on the Horizons table e From the Data Explorer select the ground surface data object that will be used to generate the horizon e Click the gt button in Row1 of the Horizons grid to insert it into the Horizon Information table See the example below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 9 OE E Define Modeling Objectives E Collect Data Objects EJ Define Conceptual Model Define Model Structure 00000 Define Conceptual Model Structure LE bE E E erevien create Horizon Information Name Horizon2 Horizon3 e For this example the default horizon type will be adequate For information on each horizon type please refer to Horizon Types b74 e Repeat the steps above to add additional horizons e From the Data Explorer select the layer2 top surface data object click the 3 button in Row2 of the Horizons grid to insert it into the grid e From the Data Explorer select the layer2 bottom surface data object click the 3 button in the Row3 of Ho
487. ut Control 139 6227 1 6 yop sien Options Wiem A 7 Time Format 231 9904 1 8 292 4493 1 9 365 0 1 10 T 7 7 7 379 0608 2 1 Za 395 9338 2 2 F F F F 416 1813 2 3 440 4784 2 4 469 6349 2 5 504 6227 2 6 546 608 2 7 F F F F F F F 596 9904 2 8 657 4493 2 9 730 0 2 10 7 7 7 7 744 0608 3 1 760 9338 3 2 F F F 781 1813 3 3 805 4784 3 4 834 6349 3 5 869 6227 3 6 911 608 3 7 F F F F F F F 961 9904 3 8 1022 4493 3 9 Each MODFLOW simulation can produce three binary output files and one ASCII output file e Binary head file modelname HDS e Binary drawdown file modelname DDN e Binary flow file modelname BGT e ASCII listing file modelname LST The binary files contain head drawdown and flow exchange values for each grid cell while the ASCII listing file contains all relevant information on the operation of MODFLOW and the simulation results The listing LST file is useful if errors occur during a simulation and you 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 414 VMOD Flex Help want to know how far MODFLOW progressed or if you want to examine head or drawdown values at given intervals For a steady state simulation only one set of values for each grid cell are written to these files However for transient simulations each grid cell may contain simulation results for each time step resulting in file that can become unnecessarily large By default the information is saved in the binary files at the end o
488. uted covcuvepcoscuasebsnesebeonscetendceseuavesesceasevesascbnedosecbbessovsposedascvetendendess 454 4 Define Kriging VariOgrams vcncesececseccecictesdedutensevenebedeeedavchssbctectadeevienSecdbevestuateciecausvavsvevsdevsavoestentvesubeossdsecrovensies 457 5 SelectiRUMTYpe avoanbesNstdsccsesciins a a sevonsessouecsevsenesassescewsossoevaoustuaste ossoebevcvascors 460 6 RUM Sensitivity Analysis c scc sscecessccssseresnoesessnn casassnsoncessescesscbe cece Soap sovadeseseuardec dou csenesgusbcchscecayrondasesogetasseossesenes 461 7 Select Regularization ssieasaisissscesssssiassscscccssseoseatsssscuastne scucsase obecsasecnssiabossscsapnec sesasnssseabaicsascdoscsaeasodebeedsnsstasceets 464 No Regularization ccscsscssssssesssssssesssssceeescssceesssssceesessssceesesseceseuseseeeesesscceseusecaeseusesaguessesecausessecgeassusecnesenseeageess 466 TIKHONOV Regul ariZatiOns wise sceetevcecdiseesedecce deseGeeudevibcevcsessccctocscesinedcccardsvcccecscescsexssescertecccuctcossaverseesiescevessccucsessesssaeees 467 Truncated SVD Regularization 468 SVDASSIStY iare i sist evasaateavedeest AE sodeu cx A E e E E A E aO 469 8 Run PEST s cbassistnadsntstnsnnscensassondoasossssescsessscsbeseiesessssessseseossonsonSebsostessosessasssseascessessasseaseed sossoesueoseosess 471 9 Analyze Results O eane E ee EE Ee E Eai te e aiat E AE e a TE E odaia 473 10 Save PEST Parameters as New INpUtS ssssessesessessssoososseessessesoss
489. utput Region I Show Graticule J No Rotation Georeference Information Value Q VM5 6 Te 1453 1133 Projected lt lt Previous Nert Cancel L He Toolbar Buttons The buttons in the top toolbar are described below e Save Saves the transformed image along with a corresponding georeferencing tag file e Zoom In Click and drag the mouse to select the zoom area e Zoom Out Zoom out of the image e Full Extent Zoom completely out so that the entire image is shown e Pan When zoomed in move the image left right up or down e Add Control Point Add a georeference point See Adding Georeference Points e Delete Control Point Delete a selected georeference point e Transform Image Assigns coordinates to image pixels using the specified control points Output Region This button allows you to save a specified area of the image to the 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 188 VMOD Flex Help georeferenced file after the image has been transformed By default the output region is the whole image Click and drag a rectangular box on the image to define a new output region and then click the Save button to save the output region to the georeference file Configure Georeferencing Options Opens the configure georeferencing options dialog box For more information on these options please see Configure Georeferencing Options section Magnification Selector Select a magnification level from the c
490. utton Click Next Step to proceed This will generate the model run folder in the Model tree which includes input and output directories and default flow and transport properties e Now is a good time to save the project Click File Save Project from the main menu e In the next section you will view the numerical grid that you just created View Grid The View Edit Grid step provides several views for displaying and the grid in 2D and 3D along with tools for refining and coarsening the grid There are numerous tools available to control and manipulate the grid views 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help View Imported Grid Views LPA E E v Layer Layer View 1 Row 1 amp Column 1 e 3D Toolbox e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views Place a check box beside the desired view and it will appear on the screen e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e The standard navigation tools allow you to zoom pan and in the case of 3D view rotate e Click gt Next Step to proceed Defining Flow Properties This section will guide you through the s
491. utton to proceed Mouse over this and you will see the blue Next arrow appear on top just left click once to select this option Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help e Click the Compose Engines button to proceed Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step Tannie Fin Moce EO View Rowse e You will arrive at the Select Engines step Here you can choose what engines you want what version of MODFLOW 2000 2005 etc and if you want to include MODPATH and ZoneBudget in the run e MODFLOW 2005 should be selected by default if you wish to run MODPATH and ZoneBudget be sure to select these engines as well e Click Next Step to proceed 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s Translate Packages e You will arrive at the Translation Step oon p Define Modeling Objectives EJ Define Numerical Mode B Create Grid EJ Import Model View Edit Grid E Define Properties E Define Boundary Conditions B Select the Next Step Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles B B Select Run Type PEST Run Single Run J Translate Run Numerical Engine View Results
492. value for Time steps is 10 The time step Multiplier is the factor used to increment the time step size within each stress period i e it is the ratio of the value of each time step to that of the preceding time step The default value is 1 2 A time step Multiplier value greater than 1 will produce smaller time steps at the beginning of a stress period resulting in a better representation of the changes of the transient flow field Thus increasing the number of time steps in a simulation may result in smoother head or drawdown versus time Curves The Steady state column indicates if the stress period is transient or steady state This option is available if MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 and MODFLOW SURFACT is selected as the numeric engine for the flow model These engines allow individual stress periods in a single simulation to be either transient or steady state instead of requiring the entire simulation to be either steady state or transient Steady state and transient stress periods can occur in any order Commonly the first stress period may be run as steady state to produce a solution that is used as the initial condition for subsequent transient stress periods 10 10 1 4 Solvers VMOD Flex comes with a choice of different solvers to use in solving the numerical equations for the flow simulation 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow s Translate General 4 General Settings Selected Solver Conjug
493. vity distributions and you want to make qualitative comparisons between these This is challenging when each data object has its own min and max values and are colored based on this However it becomes much easier when these data objects all read from a common color palette B Project Color Palette Attribute Heads Max Value 360 0000 Min Value 280 0000 The Project Color Palette settings allow you to set the min max values for various attributes these can then be used for various data objects and viewers throughout the project To enable the Project Color Palette option for a specific data object this must be enabled in the Color by Attribute page see Color by Attributebs l for more details Workflow Menu Allows to create a new Numerical Model workflow or Conceptual Model workflow When you select the appropriate item a new workflow window will load Help Menu Provides links to help topics webhelp and online resources The Just In Time Help will display a small help panel below most steps in the workflow window Customer Feedback will allow you to submit bugs and suggestions using an online form on www swstechnology com The About screen will show the version and build you are using along with your registration details name company serial number License Request will load a form where you can request a license Complete the form and submit this using the e mail address provided
494. w Results View Maps View Charts E ZONEBUDGET MODPATH a g View Charts E View Maps 1 C Pumping Wells Boundary Coi Zone Budget Particles C Forward Particles C Backward Particles Flow C Observation Wells puts Heads Drawdown s illa DRUMCO grid Run 10 12 1 Contours and Color Floods At the View Maps step you can view contours and color shading of the flow and transport results 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 431 Visual MODFLOW Flex demo D gnd Run SA a Fie Tools Window Help Workflow Den EESAC ILJ O OE Data gt a G drumco Elevation 1 Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 Ej Define Numerical Model Vow Maps drumco Elevation 3 E Create Grd View drumco Elevation 4 import Model ay ea E dumco Elevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid E Layer PEP Exaggeration 10 S Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wireframe drumco Bevation 6 E Define Properties gt a A es 1 S 4 VMod imported Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions Layer View 3D View Select the Next Step C Row Define Observation Zones 50 Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Column Define Particles J EJ Select Run Type a2 5 PEST
495. w point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peak and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that you can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has a gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere 2013 by Schlumberger Water Servi
496. w viewer e Click on Window New 3D Window from the main menu an empty 3D Viewer will appear e Click on the check box beside each of the data objects you imported and they will appear in the 3D Viewer e Click Next Step to proceed where you will arrive at the Define Conceptual Model step Define Conceptual Model Provide a name for the conceptual model and model area From the Data Explorer select the polygon data object that represents the conceptual model horizontal boundary and then click the button Note The model area cannot be defined using a complex polygon or one that contains multiple polygons A complex polygon is a polygon that intersects with itself 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 25 BiiuaMonrlowFe der O_O Tai i o aao kala File Tools Workflow Window Help PECA IL Data Conceptual Model x j fz o ioe 9 OB O0 boundary Jio 2 EJ Define Modeling Objectives fo EJ Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model E EJ Define Conceptual Model 8 Define Mode Structure Save Dei T O Se Name Conceptual Mode 1 Condti Description KOE T Eo Model Area Select existing data object boundary Projection Type Coordinate Systems Model Explorer Local Cartesia Datum World Geodetic System 1984 e Click Next Step to proceed to the Define Model Structure step Define Struct
497. wells rivers drains and focused recharge e regions of site scale contamination within a regional aquifer where simulations of plume movement are of interest e regions requiring detailed representation of heterogeneity as may be required to simulate faults lithologic displacements caused by faulting fractures thin lenses pinch outs of geologic units and so on VMOD Flex allows you to create up to nine child grids within a single parent grid However you cannot create a child grid within a child grid and child grids cannot not overlap within a single parent grid AS Adding Child Grids Child Grids can only be added in the conceptual modeling workflow VMOD Flex currently does not support adding Child Grids onto models that have been imported If you wish to run LGR on an existing project you can re build this using the Conceptual Modeling workflow For more information on the local grid refinement package please refer to MODFLOW 2005 The U S Geological Survey Modular Ground Water Model Documentation of Shared Node Local Grid Refinement LGR and the Boundary Flow and Head BFH Package by Steffen W Mehl and Mary C Hill U S Geological Survey There are two ways in which you can define a child grid within a numerical model grid e When defining the parent grid check the Create Child Grid box in the Vertical Grid dialog and click the Next button 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 324 VMOD Flex Help
498. will vary depending on which option was selected in the previous step e g Absolute or Relative 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 16 VMOD Flex Help 4 2 RE Data Import 0 x Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type a Relative time newdate wi Length m 1 Numeric xl M Source Data Preview newdate stage E 11201 2005 16 78 1102 2005 16 81 11 03 2005 16 85 11 04 2005 16 9 11 05 2005 16 94 11 06 2005 16 94 2 11207 72NNF lica Aa T b lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help If you selected Absolute the required target field will be Start Date and Time and if you selected Relative the required target field will be Relative Time Map the time field in your source data to the required target field Next create a new attribute and map any associated parameter e g recharge in the source data to the new attribute If necessary repeat for additional parameters in the time schedule Data mapping and creating new attributes are described in the Data Mappingltest section The final step in the time schedule import process is data validation VMOD Flex will validate the mapped data and highlights any rows that contain invalid data e g null values wrong assigned data type duplicate rows etc Please see Data Validationhesl for more information on data validation Click the Next button to imp
499. will allow you to modify some of the appearance of each parameter group In addition each property group can be added to a stand alone 3D view to do this right click and select 3D Viewer 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 360 VMOD Flex Help 5 Simulation Domain B E Model Domain Q Boundary Conditions C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid aay Run D E i Z Heads ST Forward Pathlines Assign Use the Assign gt Polygon option to digitize one or more polygon shapes and assign Parameter attributes to the respective shapes Use the left mouse button to start drawing and add attributes at the desired locations Once you have finished digitizing right click with the mouse to close the shape and select Define Attributes as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 361 Inspect Define Properties Views V Layer Row 1 Je Column 1 3 3D Toolbox Assign Z Legend Color Zones E r 4 eas Layer 1 Row 21 Column 13 X 77 75 67 06 Zone 1 0000 The Define Property Zone attributes window will appear as shown below B New Property Zone A Zone 1 BL hen Zone Attributes Assign to all layers Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping VIETAN h E F PA E Layer 2 gt Kx m s 5E 05 Ly Layer 3 Ky m s gt 5E 05 x Layer 4 A F Layer 5 Kz ms
500. wish to use the default value enter a new value Use Surface The Use Surface method allows you use an existing surface data object to define spatially variable attribute values This is ideal if you have a Surfer GRD or ESRI ASCII GRD file containing parameter values Follow the steps below e Select Surface as the method from the combo box You should then see the 3 button become activated under the Value column e From the Data Explorer select the desired surface data object e Click the 3 button to insert this data object into the Object field Note The selected surface data object must cover the entire area of the property zone or else the data object cannot be used Use 3D Gridded Data 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 285 The Use 3D Gridded Data method allows you to use an existing 3D gridded data object to define spatially variable attribute values Follow the steps below e Select 3D Grid as the method from the combo box You should then see the 3 button become activated e From the Data Explorer select the 3D Gridded data object e Click the button to insert it into the parameter field e Select the desired attribute value from the Mapping combo box Note The specified 3D Gridded data object must horizontally and vertically overlap the defined property zone geometry or else the data object cannot be used Use Shapefile Attribute The Use Shapefile method is o
501. with geostatistically based regularization constraints e used the VMOD Flex GUI to e Build input files for PEST e Run PEST e Analyze the results e Save adjusted parameters as new model inputs 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 133 9 Before you start You are encouraged to familiarize yourself with the concepts and applications of PEST prior to using in VMOD Flex The time spent on this will make your experience with parameter estimation much more productive and will likely help you to overcome any difficulties you may experience the first time you run PEST In addition if you are not familiar with the VMOD Flex graphical environment please take a few minutes to review the Program Overview s section A Note You must have a license of Pro or Premium in order to use the PEST module in VMOD Flex Required Files Download the PEST Tutorial project from our website below e http trials swstechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 Tutorials PEST Tutorial zip e Unzip to a desired folder on your computer Introduction e File Open Project e Navigate to the directory where you unzipped the project that was downloaded from our website and select the pest tutorial amd file e Open In the Numerical Workflow window locate the Workflow Tree this is shown on the left in the window below Click on the Select Run Type in the numerical workflow tree Click on the PEST button as shown
502. y Boundary Conditions O Constant Head 1 Constant Head 2 O River 1 C Pumping Well 1 C NumericalGrid1 oO Object Bx ion 37 Seah Conceptual Model NumericalGridi Run 3D Viewer 1 i P Ome chVGE Sa ssam Figure 11 Pathlines in 3D in VMOD Flex with Pumping Wells and Horizons visible 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex and VMOD Classic 497 E Data Hog ground og layer2top D layer2 bottom Slsceduitese rede ier E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary Hi Structure Figure 12 Concentration Contours as Polylines in VMOD Flex with Boundary Condition cells and Lower Aquifer Property Zone visible Polyline data objects may also be added on the Layer view of the Numerical model as shown below 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 498 VMOD Flex Help 2cone polgyons_L1 3darid ff Polylinet Contomohydrogeobuilder_tesaved Contomahydrogeobuilder_resaved 4 Contomohydrogeobuilder out OO Contomohydrogeobuilder1 amp Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 itial Heads
503. y area to select the color to fill the empty spaces only if Show Fill Color option is selected Use the slider to set the JPEG Image Quality When set closer to L low more compression is used in the saved georeference image file resulting in a smaller file and poorer quality When set close to H high less compression is used in the saved georeferenced image file resulting in a larger file with better quality From the Interpolation Mode combo box specify the interpolation method algorithm to use when the image is scaled or rotated The various interpolation methods are briefly described below Keep in mind lower quality interpolation mode will result in a smaller output file whereas high quality interpolation modes will result in a larger output file Default default interpolation mode LowQuality a low quality mode HighQuality a high quality mode 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 192 VMOD Flex Help Bilinear Bilinear interpolation No prefiltering is done This mode is not suitable for shrinking an image below 50 percent of its original size Bicubic Bicubic interpolation No prefiltering is done This mode is not suitable for shrinking an image below 25 percent of its original size NearestNeighbor Nearest neighbor interpolation HighQualityBilinear Specifies high quality bilinear interpolation Prefiltering is performed to ensure high quality shrinking HighQualityBicubic High quality bicubic int
504. y is not permitted which is why surfaces are converted to horizons Assigning a horizon type will eliminate the intersections When horizons are generated from these surfaces and each surface is set to Conformable the horizons are truncated such that each one conforms to the horizon above it as shown in the following image If the middle horizon is set to Erosional with the top and bottom set to Conformable the topmost surface red is pushed up as shown in the following image 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 277 View Structural Zones During the horizon creation process VMOD Flex automatically generates the structural zones between the defined horizons within the horizontal extent of the conceptual model boundary To view the generated structural zones in the Conceptual Model Tree expand the Structure Node and then expand the Zones node 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 278 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model 4 Conceptual Modell Structure Horizons i be M Horizont Horizon2 Horizon3 Horizon4 Horizon5 Horizon6 Zones are given a default name e g Zone1 Zone2 Zone3 etc which cannot be modified You can view the zones in an active 3D Viewer window by checking the empty check box ie the zone name For more information on data viewers please refer to Data Viewers 208 section 7 5 Defining Property Zones At this step
505. yer Ss is used For a variable layer MODFLOW will check the head value of the cell to determine if it is confined or not SWS recommends that if you do not have measured parameter values for Ss and Sy that you refer to literature values as a default Effective Porosity Eff Por is the pore space through which flow actually occurs and is used by MODPATH to determine the average linear groundwater velocities for use in time dependent capture zones and time markers along pathlines This term is not used for MODFLOW simulations Total Porosity Tot Por is the percentage of the rock or soil that is void of material and is used by MT3D to determine the chemical reaction coefficients and for calculating the average linear groundwater flow velocity in the particle tracking solution schemes A different porosity is used for MT3D than for MODPATH because MT3D accounts for additional transport and reactive processes such as dispersion The total porosity term is not used for MODFLOW simulations These Storage parameters may be defined on a cell by cell basis using constant property values and or distributed property values When importing or assigning the Storage property zones Visual MODFLOW will require valid data for each of the above parameters Initial Heads In order to start solving the flow simulation MODFLOW requires an initial guess for the head values in the model A good initial guess for the starting heads of the simulation ca
506. yer from the toolbox The following dialog will appear 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help e L Ta E Assign to all layers Click on the New button at the top this will create a new zone e Enter the following values Kx m s 1E 10 Ky m s 1E 10 Kz m s 1E 11 e The dialog should appear as shown below E Assign to all layers E Layer 1 iea J E Layer 3 e OK to accept these values Once finished the cells for Layer2 should change red which indicates these cells belong to Zone2 you can use the Legend under the toolbox as a guide and also mouse over cells in the grid view and note the values in the status bar 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials File Tools Workflow Window Help beau Data Numerical grid Run x a 2 Ba OOB play dg airportdayer2 top 2 5 E Define Modeling Objectives i 2 Inspect Define Properties ciportiayerstop S E Define Numerical Model i airport jayer3 bottom Create Grid rs fs 8 Import Model 7 View Edit Grid tot RP PROWF J Define Properties 2 Select the ext Ste Row z e ation Z 1 5 D Column i pz 1 amp e 3D os a Toolbox ao Conductivity x e eS Zones x s Database Model Explorer Horizon2 a Legend Horizon3
507. ys For information please see the Creating Cutaways 12 section Labels 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help General Operations Style Lines General Labels Format Placement Colors Vertices General M Show Labels M Text String Label Field WIDTH 7 M Text Symbol Font Style rial bd 10 Regular l A Size Color Preview ABC The following label settings are available under the General node shown above e Show Labels Show Hide the labels in 2D 3D viewer e Label Field This combo box contains all attributes for the selected data object Select the desired attribute field to use for the labels Format Size Set the text size of the labels Color Set the color of the label text Font Select the label font from the combo box Style Set the font style for the labels e g Regular Bold Font Italicized etc 2013 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 243 The following label settings are available under the Format node e Format Choose between Numeric or Scientific notation e Decimals Set the number of decimals to plot for each label e Placement Polylines Only e Position Display the label above below or on the line e Offset This parameter controls how far the label will be placed from the line e Location along the line D

Flex User Manual%>

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Flex User Manual%&gt;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Flex User Manual%>